The Cottages at Cedar Run Operations & Maintenance Manuals

Transcription

1 Operations & Maintenance Manuals Prepared By: The Cottages at Cedar Run Operations & Maintenance Manuals Prepared By: N58 W14782 Shawn Circle Menomonee Falls, WI Contact Name: Tim Lhotka TABLE OF CONTENTS: Project Contacts Simplex Warranty Letter Code Requirements For Testing & Inspections Bill Of Materials Fire Alarm Data Sheets 4100ES FACP Operating Manual 4098 Devices Operating Manual

2 MC Table Of Contents

3 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE TABLE OF CONTENTS: Section 1. Table Of Contents: Simplex Project Contacts Page Simplex Warranty Letter & TIS Section 2. Code Requirements For Testing & Inspections Section 3. Bill Of Materials Section 4. Fire Alarm Data Sheets Section ES FACP Operating Manual Section Devices Operating Manual

4 PROJECT CONTACTS Project Manager: Bruce Cross - (262) Bill Black - (262) Pre-installation visit.* Support.* (see TIS page) *Give one week notice for all visits. System Application Specialists: Bill Black (262) Design Manager Chad Schoenherr (262) System Application Specialist Mike Cowell (262) Ext.109 System Application Specialist Questions concerning Drawings, Submittals. Sales Representative: Tim Lhotka (262) Questions concerning quotes, bids Pricing Information Project Additions/Needs >>> For Monitoring & Extended Warranty, Please Contact: <<< Service Sales Representatives: (262) Monitoring Contracts Extended Warranty. Operations Manager: Bruce Cross - (262) Total Service Manager: Don Rossbach - (262) District General Manager: Max Norton - (262)

5 SimplexGrinnell LP N58 W17482 Shawn Circle Menomonee Falls, WI Tele: Fax: Simplex Warranty Letter The Cottages at Cedar Run 5595 County Rd. Z West Bend, WI Dear Customer: Thank you for choosing SimplexGrinnell as the provider of your new Fire Alarm System. As of this date, work/construction on this project is substantially complete and your system/equipment is operating according to our published specifications. Accordingly, SimplexGrinnell provides a one (1) year warranty, which is now in effect and will expire on (1) year from date of Certification. Unless specifically negotiated or contracted otherwise, warranty service is available during regular working hours, i.e. 8AM-5PM, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. The warranty coverage does not include preventative maintenance or equipment provided by others. We want you to get the optimum performance from the equipment you have purchased from SimplexGrinnell, but if a warranty problem reported cannot be substantiated by SimplexGrinnell, we will invoice you for our service. Please be advised that the performance and longevity of your new system/equipment is directly related to the amount of periodic care and maintenance to which it receives. Therefore, SimplexGrinnell recommends that periodic preventative maintenance be performed to Protect your investment. Failure to do necessary preventive maintenance can also put your warranty coverage at risk. SimplexGrinnell maintains its commitment to you by providing warranty and maintenance services. Our planned service agreements are tailored to you and your new system/equipment needs. Should you need warranty service or wish to discuss your maintenance needs, please call our office at (262) The following people are available to assist you: Don Rossbach (262) Tabatha Schnitzler (262) Service Dispatch Total Service Manager Service Sales Representative SimplexGrinnell appreciates your business and wants you to maintain a long-term business partnership with you, our customer. Please feel free to call me if you have any questions about the project. We look forward to serving you. Sincerely, Bruce M. Cross Operations Manager

6 1. SIMPLEXGRINNELL WARRANTY STATEMENT: SIMPLEXGRINNELL WARRANTY HARDWARE SimplexGrinnell warrants to the purchaser of new Simplex product(s) that during the effective period of the warranty such product(s) shall be free of defects in workmanship and material. 2. WARRANTY PERIOD: The warranty period will terminate immediately following the earliest occurrence of either of the following: - Building Systems 1) 18 months have elapsed following shipment of any system or subsystem from Simplex to the customer site or 2) 12 months have elapsed following the final connection operation and beneficial use of all or any part of the system. 3. SIMPLEXGRINNELL OBLIGATION UNDER THE TERMS OF THE WARRANTY: SimplexGrinnell sole responsibility shall be to repair, adjust or replace at its option any SimplexGrinnell product which fails during this period provided purchaser has promptly reported such failure to SimplexGrinnell in writing. Replacement parts provided under warranty of products may contain used parts which are equivalent to new parts when used. Replacement parts will be warranted only for the balance of the equipment warranty. Simplex agrees to continue to honor all of the unexpired express warranties specified above on defective equipment after transfer of the equipment to purchasers customer, provided purchasers customer assumes the purchasers obligations specified below. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES STATED HEREIN, SIMPLEXGRINNELL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES ON PRODUCTS FURNISHED HEREUNDER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THE STATED WARRANTIES ARE IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS. THE SELLERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OF CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE TO THE PURCHASER OR USER OF THIS EQUIPMENT ARISING OUT OF THE FAILURE OF THE EQUIPMENT TO OPERATE IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF SAID EQUIPMENT. SimplexGrinnell makes no warranty and no warranty shall be deemed to exist, that purchaser holds the goods free of the claim of any third person by way of patent infringement or the like. 4. PURCHASER S OBLIGATIONS UNDER THE TERMS OF THE WARRANTY: This warranty is contingent upon the proper installation and use of the product(s). Such warranty shall not apply if the product failure is the result of accident, unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress, neglect, misuse, user programming errors, failure of electrical power, air conditioning or humidity control, construction dust, damaging foreign substances, transportation or causes other than manufacturing defect. Purchaser agrees to provide full and free access to authorized Simplex employees. 5. WARRANTY SERVICE HOURS: Services provided under this warranty will be performed during 8:00 am to 5:00 pm. Monday through Friday, excluding locally observed Simplex holidays. Off hours response is available as an extra cost service option. 6. WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS: 1. Labor, travel and mileage for: a) Service outside of Simplex normal business hours b) Program and/or label changes c) Failures due to external causes (lightning surges, construction dust, etc.) other than manufacturing defect. 2. Electrical work external to the equipment supplied by Simplex or maintenance of accessories, alterations, attachments or other devices nor furnished by Simplex. 3. Batteries 4. Coverage of equipment classed as a water flow monitoring/control devices installed in or on water piping.

7 Technical Installer Support (TIS) Introduction Technical Installer Support (TIS) is provided as part of the cost of the equipment and is designed to provide the expertise of a Simplex Technician to be available at key scheduled times during the project. This service is available during normal Simplex working hours, if scheduled five working days in advance. TIS Activities TIS includes the following activities by a Simplex factory-trained technician, when determined by Simplex to be appropriate: Pre-construction review of submittals and drawings with the installer Technical advice during initial start up of control panels before installer wiring is connected Review of panel wiring, and preparation of a list of any items to be corrected by the installer Checkout of Factory Program Program editing to correct minor errors and omissions System check in preparation for functional test Assistance with one complete, functional test of the system One training session for the owner s representative (2-4 hrs. per control panel) Additional support may be purchased. See other side for more information. Installer s Responsibility TIS contributes significantly to the installation of Simplex equipment but does not alleviate the installer s responsibility to: Provide skilled labor and supervision to complete the project Review and understand Simplex instructions for installing and testing Simplex equipment Ensure that all wiring provided and installed meets equipment specification requirements, UL, code compliance and is free of grounds and faults. How to Avoid Potential Problems Potential problems can be avoided by following these recommendations: Do not initially power up the system, except in the presence of a Simplex technician. Simplex assumes no liability for damaged equipment, and warranty may be voided if this procedure is not followed. Do not install smoke detectors (unless protected by plastic bags) until final construction clean up has occurred. This prevents damage caused by dust, dirt, and paint. Detectors installed prior to clean up may require disassembly, cleaning, or replacement which is not covered by warranty. Care must be taken to protect equipment during the installation and warranty period. Failures due to external causes (power surges, construction dust, water damage, etc.) will be repaired by Simplex only upon receipt of a valid written Purchase Order. TIS includes one complete system test, which is coordinated by the installer. To avoid additional charges, the installer should schedule this test so that all appropriate parties such as the owner s representative and local fire officials, are present. Introduction

8 Technical Labor Product (TLP) Technical Labor Product (TLP) is designed to make available the expertise of a Simplex technician for any support requirements outside of TIS. This service is available from Simplex at an extra cost. TLP Activities TLP includes, but is not limited to the following activities that are performed by a Simplex factory-trained technician, when determined by Simplex to be appropriate: A Simplex Technician performs or assists in additional System Tests beyond the one complete test provided by TIS, including Tests done with AHJ. A Simplex Technician performs or assists in the System Test provided by TIS after Simplex normal working hours. A Simplex Technician assists in troubleshooting or repairing installer wiring problems such as grounds, shorts, opens etc. A Simplex Technician participates in the electrical installation or connects wiring to control panels, transponders, or peripheral devices. A Simplex Technician interconnects an existing system with new Simplex control panels and/or transponders by installing wiring harness, modules, programming, etc. A Simplex Technician completes the interface between the Simplex system and another supplier s equipment or panel. A Simplex Technician provides customer training, as required by specification or customer, that goes beyond the training provided under TIS. A Simplex Technician works on or interfaces to any existing Network communication system. A Simplex Technician changes or adds to an existing program and, when appropriate, performs a field reburn. A Simplex Technician performs an audit/survey of a new or existing system and reports the results in accordance with a customer s request or specifications. A Simplex Technician performs work on a system that is determined by Simplex to be outside the definition of TIS. All TLP labor that is required with the project shall be priced and offered as additional installation support.

9

10 CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR VISUAL INSPECTIONS WEEKLY (owner s responsibility) Sprinklers Gauges (dry, preaction, and deluge systems) NFPA 25 Control valves Valves, Valve components, Trim Inspections Sealed Control valves Pressure Reducing and Relief Valves Pump house, heating ventilating louvers Fire pump system Casing relief Valves Pressure relief Valves Backflow Prevention Assemblies Reduced pressure Reduced pressure detectors Standpipe Fire Pump MONTHLY Portable Fire Location pressure tamper indicator, hose/nozzle sign, hanger, hazard NFPA 10 Extinguishers assessment, HMIS label Location in designated place No obstruction to access or visibility Operating instructions on nameplate legible and facing outward Safety seals and tamper indicators not broken or missing Fullness determined by weighing or hefting Examination for obvious physical damage, corrosion, leakage or clogged nozzle Pressure gauge reading or indicator in the operable range or position Condition of tires, wheels, carriage, hose, and nozzle checked (for wheeled units) HMIS label in place Automatic Fire Control Equipment: Fire Alarm Systems Unmonitore d * NFPA 72 Alarm Sprinklers Gauges (dry, preaction, and deluge systems) NFPA 25 Control Valves Gauges (wet pipe systems) Valves, Valves components, Trim Inspections Locked Control Valves Valve Supervisory Switches Tamper switches Exterior Alarm Valves Backflow Prevention Assemblies Reduced pressure Reduced pressure detectors Standpipe Emergency Functional Test NFPA 101, 70 Lights/Exit Signs Hood Owner s Inspection NFPA 17 Suppression System QUARTERLY Automatic Fire Control Equipment: Fire Alarm Systems Monitore d * NFPA 72 Alarm Fuses Interfaced equipment Lamps and LEDs Primary (main) power supply Control Equipment: Fire Alarm Systems Unmonitore d * Radiant energy fire detectors Supervisory signal devices Waterflow devices Sprinklers Alarm devices NFPA 25 Fire department connections Pressure Reducing and Relief Valves Sprinkler systems Hose connections Hose racks Backflow Prevention Assemblies Fire Department Connections Standpipe Private Fire Service Maintenance SEMIANNUALLY Hood Suppression System NFPA 96 Suppression System Fusible Link Replacement NFPA 17, 17A Automatic Control Equipment: Fire Alarm Systems Monitore d * NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Fuses Interfaced equipment Lamps and LEDs Primary (main) power supply Control Equipment: Fire Alarm Systems Unmonitore d * Transient Suppressors Control Unit Trouble Signals Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment Remote Annunciators Batteries Nickel-Cadmium Sealed Lead-Acid Initiating Devices Air sampling smoke detectors Duct smoke detectors Electromechanical releasing devices Fire extinguishing system(s) or suppression system(s) switches Fire alarm boxes (Pull Stations) Heat detectors Smoke detectors Interface Equipment Alarm Notification Appliances Supervised Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems Transmitters DACT Sprinklers Private Fire Service Maintenance NFPA 25 ANNUALLY Hood Fusible Links NFPA 17, 17A Suppression System Cartridge (Hydrostatic Test/Replacement) - PYROCHEM Replace rubber caps Portable Fire All of monthly inspection, plus conductivity test (carbon dioxide), NFPA 10 Extinguishers determination of 6 year or Hydrotest, inspection of shell and nameplate Sprinklers Hanger/seismic bracing NFPA 25 Pipe and fittings Sprinklers Spare sprinklers Fire Pump Emergency 90 Minute drain test and inspection, verification of charge voltage, NFPA 101, 70 Lights/Exit Signs alignment of heads, hazard assessment, inspection sticker, required paperwork Battery powered systems 5 YEAR INTERVAL Valves, Valve components, Trim Inspections Sprinklers Interior Alarm Valves NFPA 25 Strainers, filters, orifices (Alarm Valves) Interior Check Valves Standpipe Private Fire Service Maintenance 12 YEAR INTERVAL Hood Regulator NFPA 17, 17A Suppression System Actuation Hose (Hydrostatic Test/Replacement) Tank Cylinder (Hydrostatic Test) Cartridge (Hydrostatic Test/Replacement) - ANSUL See other side for Functional Testing Requirements *Alarm, supervisory and trouble signals Confirm local code requirements with your local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) SimplexGrinnell LP SIMPLEX MC Rev

11 CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTING MONTHLY Automatic Fire Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems - Receivers NFPA 72 Alarm Systems DACR, DARR Batteries Fire Alarm Systems Load Voltage test primary type (Dry Cell) Emergency Lights 30 Second quick check NFPA 101 QUARTERLY Automatic Fire Control Equipment: Building Systems Not Connected to a NFPA 72 Alarm Systems Supervising Station * Functions, Fuses, Interface Equipment, Lamps & LEDs, Primary (main) power supply, Transponders Batteries Public Fire Alarm Reporting Systems Voltage tests in accordance with Table item 7 (a) - (f) Sealed Lead-Acid - Discharge Test (2 Hours) Load Voltage Test (Sealed Lead-Acid, Nickel-Cadmium Type, Lead Acid type) Initiating Devices Supervisory signal devices (except valve supervisory switches) Off - Premises Transmission Equipment Sprinklers Alarm Devices NFPA 25 SEMIANNUALLY Hood Wet Chemical Systems NFPA 17A Suppression System Automatic Fire Initiating Devices NFPA 72 Alarm Systems Radiant energy fire detectors Waterflow devices Valve Supervisory Switches Batteries - Fire Alarm Systems Sealed Lead-Acid - Load Voltage Test Sprinklers Alarm Devices NFPA 25 Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems Transmitters DACT, DART Special Procedures Sprinklers Main drain NFPA 25 Antifreeze solution 5 YEAR INTERVAL Portable Fire Hydrostatic testing of carbon dioxide, wet chemical and NFPA 10 Extinguishers foam fire extinguishers Hydrostatic testing of cartridges associated with portable fire extinguishers and wheeled units Hydrostatic testing of carbon dioxide hoses equipped with a shut-off valve Sprinklers Gauges NFPA 25 Sprinklers extra-high temperature 12 YEAR INTERVAL Portable Fire Hydrotest of dry chemical extinguishers NFPA 10 Extinguishers Hydrotest of dry chemical hose equipped with a shut-off valve Hood Hydrostatic testing Suppression NFPA 17A System Cylinder Replacement of cartridge Regulator Test Wet chemical containers Auxiliary pressure containers Hose assemblies Sprinklers At 20 years and every 10 years thereafter NFPA 25 At 50 years and every 10 years thereafter ANNUALLY Continued (Top of next column) Hood Fixed Temperature Sensing NFPA 17A Suppression System Conductivity test of all carbon dioxide hose assemblies Empty and recharge all stored pressure-loaded stream fire extinguishers Automatic Fire Control Equipment: Building Systems Connected to NFPA 72 Alarm Systems Supervising Station * Functions, Fuses, Interface Equipment, Lamps & LEDs Primary (main) power supply, Transponders Batteries - Fire Alarm Systems Sealed Lead-Acid Type 1. Charger Test (5 years from date of manufacture) 2. Discharge Test (30 minutes) Batteries - Public Fire Alarm Reporting Systems Sealed Lead-Acid Type 1. Charger Test (Replace battery as needed) 2. Discharge Test (2 hours) Control Unit Trouble Signs Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment Remote Annunciators Initiating Devices Duct smoke detectors Electromechanical releasing devices Fire extinguishing system(s) or suppression system(s) switches Fire alarm boxes (Pull Stations) Heat detectors All smoke detectors - Functional Fire, Gas and other detectors Interface Equipment Special Hazard Equipment Alarm Notification Devices Audible Devices Audible Textual Notification Appliances Visible Devices See other side for Visual Inspections Requirements *Alarm, supervisory and trouble signals Confirm local code requirements with your local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) SimplexGrinnell LP SIMPLEX

12 SimplexGrinnell NFPA 72 Fire Alarm 10.1 Application The inspection, testing, and maintenance of fire alarm systems, their initiating devices, and notification appliances shall comply with the requirements of this chapter The inspection, testing, and maintenance of single- and multiple-station smoke and heat alarms and household fire alarm systems shall comply with the requirements of this chapter Procedures that are required by other parties and that exceed the requirements of this chapter shall be permitted The requirements of this chapter shall apply to both new and existing systems General Performance Performance Verification. Inspection, testing, and maintenance programs shall satisfy the requirements of this Code, shall conform to the equipment manufacturer s recommendations, and shall verify correct operation of the fire alarm system Impairments. (A) The requirements of Section 4.6 shall be applicable when a system is impaired. (B) System defects and malfunctions shall be corrected. (C) If a defect or malfunction is not corrected at the conclusion of system inspection, testing, or maintenance, the system owner or the owner s designated representative shall be informed of the impairment in writing within 24 hours Responsibilities The owner or the owner s designated representative shall be responsible for inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system and alterations or additions to this system The delegation of responsibility shall be in writing, with a copy of such delegation provided to the authority having jurisdiction upon request Inspection, testing, or maintenance shall be permitted to be done by a person or organization other than the owner if conducted under a written contract Testing and maintenance of central station service systems shall be performed under the contractual arrangements specified in Service personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the inspection, testing, and maintenance of fire alarm systems. Examples of qualified personnel shall be permitted to include, but shall not be limited to, individuals with the following qualifications: (1) Factory trained and certified (2) National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies fire alarm certified (3) International Municipal Signal Association fire alarm certified (4) Certified by a state or local authority (5) Trained and qualified personnel employed by an organization listed by a national testing laboratory for the servicing of fire alarm systems * Notification Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals and all building occupants shall be notified of the testing to prevent unnecessary response.

13 At the conclusion of testing, those previously notified (and others, as necessary) shall be notified that testing has been concluded The owner or the owner s designated representative and service personnel shall coordinate system testing to prevent interruption of critical building systems or equipment System Documentation. Prior to system maintenance or testing, the system certificate and the information regarding the system and system alterations, including specifications, wiring diagrams, and floor plans, shall be provided by the owner or a designated representative to the service personnel upon request Inspection * Visual inspections shall be performed in accordance with the schedules in Table or more often if required by the authority having jurisdiction The visual inspection shall be made to ensure that there are no changes that affect equipment performance Testing System Testing Initial Acceptance Testing. All new systems shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements of Chapter * Reacceptance Testing Reacceptance testing shall be performed as required in through When an initiating device, notification appliance, or control relay is added, it shall be functionally tested When an initiating device, notification appliance, or control relay is deleted, another device, appliance, or control relay on the circuit shall be operated When modifications or repairs to control equipment hardware are made, the control equipment shall be tested in accordance with Table , items 1(a) and 1(d) When changes are made to site-specific software, the following shall apply: (1) All functions known to be affected by the change, or identified by a means that indicates changes, shall be 100 percent tested. (2) In addition, 10 percent of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, also shall be tested and correct system operation shall be verified. (3) A revised record of completion in accordance with shall be prepared to reflect these changes Changes to all control units connected or controlled by the system executive software shall require a 10- percent functional test of the system, including a test of at least one device on each input and output circuit to verify critical system functions such as notification appliances, control functions, and off-premises reporting Test Methods * At the request of the authority having jurisdiction, the central station facility installation shall be inspected for complete information regarding the central station system, including specifications, wiring diagrams, and floor plans that have been submitted for approval prior to installation of equipment and wiring * Fire alarm systems and other systems and equipment that are associated with fire alarm systems and accessory equipment shall be tested according to Table * Testing Frequency. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the schedules in Table , except as modified in other paragraphs of , or more often if required by the authority having jurisdiction If automatic testing is performed at least weekly by a remotely monitored fire alarm control unit specifically listed for the application, the manual testing frequency shall be permitted to be extended to annually. Table shall apply * Sensitivity of smoke detectors and single- and multiple-station smoke alarms in other than one- and twofamily dwellings shall be tested in accordance with through Sensitivity shall be checked within 1 year after installation Sensitivity shall be checked every alternate year thereafter unless otherwise permitted by compliance with

14 After the second required calibration test, if sensitivity tests indicate that the device has remained within its listed and marked sensitivity range (or 4 percent obscuration light gray smoke, if not marked), the length of time between calibration tests shall be permitted to be extended to a maximum of 5 years If the frequency is extended, records of nuisance alarms and subsequent trends of these alarms shall be maintained In zones or in areas where nuisance alarms show any increase over the previous year, calibration tests shall be performed To ensure that each smoke detector or smoke alarm is within its listed and marked sensitivity range, it shall be tested using any of the following methods: (1) Calibrated test method (2) Manufacturer s calibrated sensitivity test instrument (3) Listed control equipment arranged for the purpose (4) Smoke detector/control unit arrangement whereby the detector causes a signal at the control unit where its sensitivity is outside its listed sensitivity range (5) Other calibrated sensitivity test methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction Detectors or smoke alarms found to have a sensitivity outside the listed and marked sensitivity range shall be cleaned and recalibrated or be replaced. Exception: Devices listed as field adjustable shall be permitted to be either adjusted within the listed and marked sensitivity range and cleaned and recalibrated, or they shall be replaced The detector or smoke alarm sensitivity shall not be tested or measured using any device that administers an unmeasured concentration of smoke or other aerosol into the detector or smoke alarm Test frequency of interfaced equipment shall be the same as specified by the applicable NFPA standards for the equipment being supervised Maintenance Fire alarm system equipment shall be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions The frequency of maintenance of fire alarm system equipment shall depend on the type of equipment and the local ambient conditions The frequency of cleaning of fire alarm system equipment shall depend on the type of equipment and the local ambient conditions Maintenance, Inspection, and Testing Records Records shall be retained until the next test and for 1 year thereafter The records shall be on a medium that will survive the retention period. Paper or electronic media shall be permitted A record of all inspections, testing, and maintenance shall be provided that includes the following information regarding tests and all the applicable information requested in Figure : (1) Date (2) Test frequency (3) Name of property (4) Address (5) Name of person performing inspection, maintenance, tests, or combination thereof, and affiliation, business address, and telephone number (6) Name, address, and representative of approving agency(ies) (7) Designation of the detector(s) tested, for example, Tests performed in accordance with Section. (8) Functional test of detectors (9)* Functional test of required sequence of operations (10) Check of all smoke detectors (11) Loop resistance for all fixed-temperature, line-type heat detectors

15 (12) Other tests as required by equipment manufacturers (13) Other tests as required by the authority having jurisdiction (14) Signatures of tester and approved authority representative (15) Disposition of problems identified during test (e.g., owner notified, problem corrected/successfully retested, device abandoned Table Visual Inspection Frequencies Component 1. Control Equipment: Fire Alarm Systems Monitored for Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble Signals Initial/ Reacceptance Monthly Quarterly Semiannually Annually (a) Fuses X X (b) Interfaced equipment X X (c) Lamps and LEDs X X (d) Primary (main) power supply X X 2. Control Equipment: Fire Alarm Systems Unmonitored for Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble Signals (a) Fuses X (weekly) (b) Interfaced equipment X (weekly) (c) Lamps and LEDs X (weekly) (d) Primary (main) power supply X (weekly) 3. Batteries (a) Lead-acid X X (b) Nickel-cadmium X X (c) Primary (dry cell) X X (d) Sealed lead-acid X X 4. Transient Suppressors X X 5. Control Unit Trouble Signals X (weekly) X 6. Fiber-Optic Cable Connections X X 7. Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment X X 8. Remote Annunciators X X 9. Initiating Devices (a) Air sampling X X (b) Duct detectors X X (c) Electromechanical releasing devices X X (d) Fire extinguishing system(s) or suppression system(s) switches X X (e) Fire alarm boxes X X (f) Heat detectors X X (g) Radiant energy fire detectors X X (h) Smoke detectors X X (i) Supervisory signal devices X X (j) Waterflow devices X X

16 Component 1. Control Equipment Building Systems Connected to Supervising Station Table Testing Frequencies Initial/ Reacceptance Monthly Quarterly Semi - annually Annually Table Reference (a) Functions X X (b) Fuses X X (c) Interfaced equipment X X (d) Lamps and LEDs X X (e) Primary (main) power supply X X (f) Transponders X X 2. Control Equipment Building Systems Not Connected to a Supervising Station 1, 7, 16, 17 1 (a) Functions X X (b) Fuses X X (c) Interfaced equipment X X (d) Lamps and LEDs X X (e) Primary (main) power supply X X (f) Transponders X X 3. Engine-Driven Generator Central Station Facilities and Fire Alarm Systems 4. Engine-Driven Generator Public Fire Alarm Reporting Systems 6. Batteries Fire Alarm Systems X X X (weekly) (a) Lead-acid type 6b 1. Charger test (replace battery as needed.) X X 2. Discharge test (30 minutes) X X 3. Load voltage test X X 4. Specific gravity X X (d) Sealed lead-acid type 6d 1. Charger test (replace battery within 5 years after manufacture or more frequently as needed.) X X

17 12. Component Initial/ Reacceptance 13. Retransmission Equipment (The requirements of shall apply.) Monthly Quarterly Semiannually Annually Table Reference X 14. Remote Annunciators X X Initiating Devices 13 (a) Duct detectors X X (b) Electromechanical releasing device X X (c) Fire extinguishing system(s) or suppression system(s) switches X X (d) Fire gas and other detectors X X (e) Heat detectors (The requirements of shall apply.) X X (f) Fire alarm boxes X X (h) System smoke detectors functional X X (i) Smoke detectors sensitivity (The requirements of shall apply.) (j) Single- and multiple-station smoke alarms (The requirements for monthly testing in accordance with shall also apply.) X X (k) Single- and multiple-station heat alarms X X (l) Supervisory signal devices (except valve tamper switches) X X (m) Waterflow devices X X (n) Valve tamper switches X X

18 MC Bill of Materials

19 SimplexGrinnell LP N58 W17482 Shawn Circle Menomonee Falls, WI Tele: Fax: Apr-14 Attention: RE: KEN FAY - STEINER ELECTRIC CO. THE COTTAGES AT CEDAR RUN Thank you for your recent order covering equipment for the above mentioned job. The following is a list of equipment we proposed to furnish for this job. FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL EPS MASTER CONTROLLER 120V POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE 120V AUX AUDIO INPUT MESSAGE EXPANSION, 32 MINUTES AUDIO IF MODULE MULTI-CHANNEL CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B BLANK DISPLAY MODULE SWITCH, 16 RED/GREEN LED MODULE /64 LED/SWITCH CONTROLLER LED/SWITCH SLIDE-IN LABEL KIT DIG 100W AMP 6 NAC 120V 25V EXPANSION BAY (PHASE 10 ONLY) LEGACY CARD STABILIZER BRACKET AUDIO EXPANSION BAY SERIAL DACT SIDE MOUNT BASIC AUDIO W/MIKE-DIGITAL INDICATOR ONLY 3 BAY GLASS BAY BB/GDOOR/DRESS PANEL PLATINUM 2 PW-PS1255OU BATTERY 55AH FIRE ALARM TRANSPONDER PANEL # BASIC TRANSPONDER DIGITAL AUDIO RISER MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE 120V CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B DIG 100W AMP 6 NAC 120V 25V EXPANSION BAY (PHASE 10 ONLY) LEGACY CARD STABILIZER BRACKET AUDIO EXPANSION BAY EPS POWER SUPPLY 120V INDICATOR ONLY 3 BAY SOLID

20 BAY BOX & SOLID DOOR PLATINUM BATTERY 18AH FIRE ALARM TRANSPONDER PANEL # BASIC TRANSPONDER DIGITAL AUDIO RISER MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE 120V CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B DIG 100W AMP 6 NAC 120V 25V EXPANSION BAY (PHASE 10 ONLY) LEGACY CARD STABILIZER BRACKET AUDIO EXPANSION BAY EPS POWER SUPPLY 120V INDICATOR ONLY 3 BAY SOLID BAY BOX & SOLID DOOR PLATINUM BATTERY 25AH FIRE ALARM DEVICES TRUEALERT ADDRESSABLE IDNAC REPEATER BATTERY 6.2AH LCD ANNUNCIATOR PULL STATION D/A IDNET PUSH SSD PHOTO SENSOR SSD SENSOR BASE SSD PHOTO SENSOR SSD SENSOR BASE W/SOUNDER SSD PHOTO SENSOR SSD CARBON MONOXIDE BASE HEAT SENSOR SSD SENSOR BASE HEAT DETECTOR 194 DEG FIXED ROR DUCT SENSOR HOUSING-4-WIRE SAMPLING TUBE 73 PLASTIC REMOTE TEST STATION RED LED KEY SW ENCAPSULATED RELAY PAM-SD 8 DH24120FPC DOOR HOLDER SEMI-FLUSH CHROME MR101/C RELAY SPDT W/LED W/CA IAM SUPERVISED IDNET IAM RELAY IDNET ISOLATOR MODULE TRUEALERT SPEAKE 25V/70VRMS TRUEALERT RED WALL S/V M-C TRUEALERT RED WALL S/V M-C TRUEALERT WHT CEIL

21 68 49VO-WRF V/O M-C TRUEALERT RED WALL 1 49AV-WRFO WP A/V M-C TRUEALERT RED WALL 1 49WPBB-WR WP AV/VO BACK BOX RED WALL (na) = No data sheet available Automatic detectors shall remain in original packing until the building construction clean-up has been completed. Detectors shall be the last electrical installation work and shall not be installed until the building air is in the purest and most dust free state. Normal delivery time is days. All equipment is in abeyance pending release and approval. Please advise to forestall further delay. Sincerely, SIMPLEXGRINNELL Tim Lhotka BUILDING SYSTEM SALES REPRESENTATIVE

22

23 ALARMS Fire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm Fire Alarm Ack Event Time Enable Disable Emergency Operating Instructions On Arm Off Disarm Pri ori ty 2 Ack Auto SYSTEM WARNINGS Supervisory Trouble Ala rm Silenced Su pv Ack Mo re Info Lamp Test Tr ouble Ack Menu Alar m Silence Previous Next Alarm or Warning Condition System ind icator flashing. Tone On. How to Acknowledge / View Events Press ACK l ocated under fl ashin g indi cator. Repeat operation unti l al l events are acknowledged. Local tone wil l silence. A B C D E F G H I ZONE SI G AUX J K L M N O P Q R FB I DNet AC Power 4 IO5 6 S T U V W X Y Z / P A L 'SP ' ( ), 0 : System N ET ADDR Reset 0 DE L Enter C/Exit How to Silence Building Signals Press Alarm Silence. How t o Reset System Press System Reset. Press Ack to si lence tone device. ALARMS Fire Alarm Priority 2 Ala rm Fire Alarm Priority 2 Ack Ack Event Time On Enable Arm Off Disable Auto Disarm Emergency Operating Instructions On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto SYSTEM WARNINGS Supervisory Trouble Alar m Silenced Supv Trouble Ack Ack Mor e Info Lamp Test Alarm or Warning Condition System indi cator flashing. Tone On. How to Acknowledge / View Events Press ACK located under flashing indicator. Repeat operation until all events are acknowledged. Lo cal to ne will silence. On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto A B C D E F G H I ZONE SI G AUX J K L M N O P Q R FB I DNet AC Power 4 IO5 6 S T U V W X Y Z / P A L 'SP' ( ), 0 : Alarm System NET ADDR Silence Reset 0 DEL Enter C/Exit Previous Menu Next How to Silence Building Signals Press Alarm Silence. How to Reset Syst em Press System Reset. Press Ack to si lence tone device. UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved* Features Master Controller (top) bay standard equipment: 32-Bit Master Controller with color-coded operator interface and raised switches for high confidence feedback Dual configuration program CPU, convenient service port access, and capacity for up to 2500 addressable points CPU assembly includes 2 GB dedicated compact flash memory for on-site system programming and information storage An Enhanced Power Supply (EPS+) and battery charger (9 A total) with on-board IDNAC SLCs (signaling line circuit) for addressable appliance control, IDNet 1+ isolated addressable device control channel, and programmable function auxiliary output Also available with InfoAlarm Command Center expanded content user interface (see data sheet S ) Standard addressable device interfaces include: IDNet point addressable device SLC supports TrueAlarm analog sensors and IDNet communications monitoring and control devices, and operates with isolated output for use with either shielded or unshielded, twisted or untwisted single pair wiring MINIPLEX Transponder and remote LCD and LED annunciator support via RUI+ (remote unit interface) communications port with isolated output for use with either shielded or unshielded, twisted or untwisted single pair wiring Standard EPS+ power supplies provide enhanced power delivery IDNAC SLCs to addressable notification appliances: With IDNAC SLCs, a constant 29 VRMS source voltage is maintained, even during battery standby, allowing strobes to operate at higher voltage with lower current and ensuring a consistent current draw and voltage drop margin under both primary power and secondary battery standby Efficiencies include lower strobe currents, wiring distances up to 2 to 3 times farther than with conventional notification, support for more appliances per IDNAC SLC, ability to use smaller gauge wiring, all providing installation and maintenance savings with high assurance appliances that operate during normal system testing will operate during worst case alarm conditions IDNAC SLCs are compatible with both TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert addressable notification appliances, and remote 4009 IDNAC Repeaters to extend power and wiring distance even farther Optional modules and connections include: Fire Alarm Network Interfaces, city connections, and up to five (5) RS-232 ports for printers and terminals Building Network Interface Module (BNIC) for Ethernet connectivity options (see data sheet S ) Side mounted DACT assembly requiring minimal panel space; DACT is compatible with IP Communicators Emergency communications systems (ECS) equipment; 8 channel digital audio or 2 channel analog audio 4100ES Fire Control Panels Addressable Fire Detection and Control Basic Panel Modules and Accessories 4100ES Cabinets are Available with One, Two or Three Bays Option Modules (Continued) Additional IDNet 1+ addressable device communications modules and IDNet+ quad output isolator modules; additional power supplies, alarm relays, and auxiliary relays LED/switch modules and panel mount printers; VESDA Air Aspiration Systems interface, ASHRAE BACnet Interface, TCP/IP Bridges Battery brackets for seismic area protection (see page 2) 4100ES compatible legacy interface modules, including control of conventional (non-addressable) NACS (see data sheet reference list on page 8) 4100ES Listings reference: UL Std. 864, Fire Detection and Control (UOJZ), and Smoke Control Service (UUKL) UL Std. 2017, Process Management Equipment (QVAX) UL Std. 1076, Proprietary Alarm Units-Burglar (APOU) UL Std. 1730, Smoke Detector Monitor (UULH) ULC Std. S527 Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems Software Feature Summary CPU provides dual configuration programs: Two programs allow for optimal system protection and commissioning efficiency with one active program and one reserve; downtime is reduced because the system stays running during download PC based programmer features: Convenient front panel accessed Ethernet port for quick and easy download of site-specific programming Modifications can be uploaded as well as downloaded for greater service flexibility; AND, firmware enhancements are made via software downloads to the on-board flash memory * See pages 7 and 8 for product that is UL or ULC listed and additional listing information. This product has been listed by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :0251 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. S /2013

24 A B C ZONE D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R FB IO IDNet 4 5 S T U V W X Y Z / P A L 'SP' ( ), 0 : NET Introduction 4100ES Series Fire Detection and Control Panels provide extensive installation, operator, and service features with point and module capacities suitable for a wide range of system applications. An on-board Ethernet port provides fast external system communications to expedite installation and service activity. Dedicated compact flash memory archiving provides secure on-site system information storage of electronic job configuration files to meet NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code) requirements. Modular design. A wide variety of functional modules are available to meet specific system requirements. Selections allow panels to be configured for either Stand-Alone or Networked fire control operation. Module Bay Description The Master Controller Bay (top) includes a standard multi-featured enhanced power supply (EPS+), the master controller board, two vertical expansion blocks, and operator interface equipment. The Expansion Bays include a Power Distribution Interface (PDI) for connection of single or multiple block modules, and/or slot style (motherboard/daughter card) modules. The Battery Compartment (bottom) accepts two batteries, up to 50 Ah, to be mounted within the cabinet without interfering with module space. Mechanical Description Boxes can be close-nippled; each box provides convenient stud markers for drywall thickness and nail-hole knockouts for quicker mounting Smooth box surfaces are provided for locally cutting conduit entrance holes exactly where required Cabinet assembly design has been seismic tested and is certified to IBC and CBC standards as well as to ASCE 7-05 category D, requires battery brackets as detailed on data sheet S The latching front panel assembly easily lifts off for internal access Modules are power-limited (except as noted, such as relay modules) The NEMA 1 box is ordered separately and available for early installation Doors are available with tempered glass inserts or solid; boxes and doors are available in platinum or red Boxes and door/retainer assemblies are ordered separately per system requirements; refer to data sheet S Operator Interface Detail Reference The following illustration identifies the primary functions of the operator interface. Operator interface panel is directly viewable and accessible (no access door) DACT mounting location Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Master Controller Bay ALARMS Fire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm Fire Alarm Priority 2 Ack Ack SYSTEM WARNINGS Supervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced Supv Trouble Alarm Ack Ack Silence AC Power System Reset 1 7 SIG AUX ADDR 0 DEL PDI Master Controller Board Optional TrueInsight Module mounting location Event Time Enable Disable Emergency Operating Instructions On Arm Off Disarm Auto More Info Lamp Test Menu Previous Next Enter C/Exit PDI board with two connectors available Alarm or Warning Condition System indicator flashing. Tone On. How to Acknowledge / View Events Press ACK located under flashing indicator. Repeat operation until all events are acknowledged. Local tone will silence. How to Silence Building Signals Press Alarm Silence. How to Reset System Press System Reset. Press Ack to silence tone device. Master controller with dual slot motherboard Expansion Bay 1 Expansion Bay 2 Battery Compartment Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 PDI PDI 4100 Option 4100 Option 4100 Option 4100 Option 4100 Option 4100 Option I/O Wiring 4x5 Module (Block E) 4x5 Module (Block F) I/O Wiring I/O Wiring 4x5 Module 4x5 Module I/O Wiring I/O Wiring Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (Blocks G & H) Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 (Block E) (Block F) I/O Wiring Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (Blocks G & H) EPS+ Power Supply with IDNet 1+ Module Typical bays with mixed module sizes 4100ES Module Placement Reference in 3-Bay Cabinet Upload/Download Ethernet port access (under sliding cover) Basic operator instructions are printed on the interface mounting plate Software Feature Summary Panel sounder Install Mode allows grouping of multiple troubles for uninstalled modules and devices into a single trouble condition (typical with future phased expansion); with future equipment and devices grouped into a single trouble, operators can more clearly identify events from the commissioned and occupied areas Module level ground fault searching assists installation and service by locating and isolating modules with grounded wiring Recurring Trouble Filtering allows the panel to recognize, process, and log recurring intermittent troubles (such as external wiring ground faults), but only sends a single outbound system trouble to avoid nuisance communications WALKTEST silent or audible system test performs an automatic self-resetting test cycle Support for TrueAlarm individual analog sensing and IDNAC addressable notification with front panel information and selection access 2 S /2013

25 Operator Interface Convenient Status Information. With the locking door closed, the glass window allows viewing of the display, status LEDs, and available operator switches. Features include a two-line by 40-character, wide viewing angle (super-twist) LCD with status LEDs and switches as shown in the illustration below. LED indicators describe the general category of activity being displayed with the LCD providing more detail. For the authorized user, unlocking the door provides access to the control switches and allows further inquiry by scrolling the display for additional detail. Operator Interface Features Convenient and extensive operator information is provided using a logical, menu-driven display Multiple automatic and manual diagnostics for maintenance reduction Alarm and Trouble History Logs (up to 1250 entries for each, 2500 total events) are available for viewing from the LCD, or capable of being printed to a connected printer, or downloaded to a service computer Convenient PC programmer label editing Password access control ULC SYSTEMS require designating a Ground Fault indicator SIX SYSTEM STATUS INDICATOR LEDs provide system status indications in addition to LCD information, LEDs flash to indicate the condition and then when acknowledged, remain on until reset : Fire Alarm & Priority 2 Alarm, red LED Supervisory & Trouble, yellow LED Alarm Silenced, yellow LED AC Power, green LED (on for normal) FIRE ALARM ACK acknowledges a Fire Alarm condition, logs the acknowledge, and silences the operator panel and all annunciator tone-alerts PRIORITY 2 ACK acknowledges a Priority 2 Alarm condition, logs the acknowledge, and silences the operator panel and all annunciator tone-alerts SUPV ACK acknowledges system supervisory conditions, logs the acknowledge, and silences the operator panel and all annunciator tone-alerts TROUBLE ACK acknowledges system troubles, logs the acknowledge, and silences the operator panel and all annunciator tone-alerts THREE PROGRAMMABLE LEDs provide custom labeling, the top two LEDs are selectable as red or yellow, the bottom LED is selectable as green or yellow Custom label insert 2 X 40 LCD READOUT, LED backlighted during normal conditions and abnormal operating conditions, provides up to 40 characters for custom label information FIRST ALARM DISPLAY: Operation can be selected for maintained display of first alarm until acknowledged ALARM SILENCE causes audible notification appliances to be silenced (depending on panel programming) typically after evacuation is complete and while alarm source is being investigated; may allow visible notification to continue (strobes still flashing) SYSTEM RESET restores control panel to normal when all alarmed inputs are returned to normal Waterflow-East Waterflow-West Ground Fault Manual Evac ALARMS Fire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm SYSTEM WARNINGS Supervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced AC Power A B C ZONE 1 D E F G H I SIG AUX 2 3 J K L M N O P Q R FB 4 IO 5 IDNet 6 S T U V W X Y Z / P 7 A 8 L 9 City Disconnect Fire Alarm Ack Priority 2 Ack Supv Ack Trouble Ack Alarm Silence System Reset 'SP' ( ), 0 : NET ADDR 0 DEL Elevator Recall Event Time More Info Previous Enter C/Exit Almost Dirty Enable On Arm Menu Next Ground Fault Latch Disable Off Disarm Auto Lamp Test FIVE PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION SWITCHES, each with a yellow LED indicator POINT STATUS CONTROL KEYS: Point Enable and Disable Force On or Arm Force Off or Disarm Return On/Off or Arm/Disarm to Auto Mode ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEYS: Event Time Request More Information Request Lamp Test LCD NAVIGATION CONTROL: Menu selection Vertical and Horizontal position selection buttons NUMERIC KEYPAD for point category and point selection (alphabet characters are not used at this time) 3 S /2013

26 IDNet Addressable Device and IDNAC Addressable Notification Appliance Control Overview. The 4100ES with EPS+ power supplies provides IDNet 1+ addressable initiating device and IDNAC addressable notification appliance Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs) that supervise wiring connections and the individual device/appliance communications status on their SLC. With these 2-wire SLCs, initiation, monitoring, and control devices such as manual fire alarm stations, TrueAlarm sensors, control relays, and sprinkler waterflow switches; and notification appliances such as strobes and horns can communicate their identity and status and receive fire alarm system control. Additional interface modules include circuit isolators, conventional IDC zone adapters, and interface to other system circuits such as fans, dampers, and elevator controls. IDNet Addressable Device Operation Each addressable device on the IDNet 1+ communication channel is continuously interrogated for status condition such as: normal, off-normal, alarm, supervisory, or trouble. Both Class B and Class A operation is available. Sophisticated poll and response communication techniques ensure supervision integrity and allow for "T-tapping" of the circuits for Class B operation. Devices with LEDs pulse the LED to indicate receipt of a communications poll and can be turned on steady from the panel. With addressable devices, the location and status of the connected device is monitored and logged, and displayed on the operator interface LCD and on remote system annunciators with each device having its own 40 character custom label for precise identification. TrueAlarm Addressable Sensor Operation Addressable initiating device communications include operation of TrueAlarm smoke and temperature sensors. Smoke sensors transmit an output value based on their smoke chamber condition and the CPU maintains a current value, peak value, and an average value for each sensor. Status is determined by comparing the current sensor value to its average value. Tracking this average value as a continuously shifting reference point filters out environmental factors that cause shifts in sensitivity. TrueAlarm Addressable Sensor Reference TrueAlarm heat sensors can be selected for fixed temperature detection, with or without rate-of-rise detection. Utility temperature sensing is also available, typically to provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system problems. Readings can selected as either Fahrenheit or Celsius. TrueSense Early Fire Detection. Multi-sensor provides photoelectric and heat sensor data using a single 4100ES IDNet address. The panel evaluates smoke activity, heat activity, and their combination, to provide TrueSense early detection. For more details on this operation, refer to data sheet S Diagnostics and Default Device Type Sensor Status. TrueAlarm operation allows the control panel to automatically indicate when a sensor is almost dirty, dirty, and excessively dirty. The NFPA 72 requirement for a test of the sensitivity range of the sensors is fulfilled by the ability of TrueAlarm operation to maintain the sensitivity level of each sensor. CO Sensors track their 5 year active life status providing indicators to assist with service planning. Indicators occur at: 1 year, 6 months, and end of life. Modular TrueAlarm sensors use the same base and different sensor types (smoke or heat sensor) and can be easily interchanged to meet specific location requirements. This allows intentional sensor substitution during building construction when conditions are temporarily dusty. Instead of covering smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors may be installed without reprogramming the control panel. The control panel will indicate an incorrect sensor type, but the heat sensor will operate at a default sensitivity to provide heat detection for building protection at that location. IDNet Addressable Device Wiring Reference IDNet 1+ Addressable Channel Capacity. The CPU bay system power supply (EPS+) provides an IDNet 1+ signaling line circuit (SLC) that supports up to 250 addressable monitor and control points intermixed on the same pair of wires. Additional 250 address IDNet 1+ circuit modules are available. IDNet 1+ SLC Wiring Specifications TrueAlarm Photo Sensor with Base TrueAlarm Photo/Heat Sensor in CO Base Programmable sensitivity of each sensor can be selected at the control panel for different levels of smoke obscuration (shown directly in percent) or for specific heat detection levels. To evaluate whether the sensitivity should be revised, the peak value is stored in memory and can be easily read (or downloaded as a report) and compared to the alarm threshold directly in percent. CO sensor bases combine an electrolytic CO sensing module with a TrueAlarm analog sensor to provide a single multiple sensing assembly using one system address. The CO sensor can be enabled/disabled, used in LED/Switch modes and custom control, and can be made public for communication across a fire alarm Network. (refer to data sheet S for details) Maximum Distance from Control Panel per Device Load Total Wire Length Allowed With T Taps for Class B Wiring Maximum Capacitance Between IDNet+ Channels 0 to ft (1219 m); 50 ohms feet (762 m); 35 ohms Up to 12,500 ft (3.8 km); 0.60 µf 1 µf Shielded or unshielded, Wire Type and Connections twisted or untwisted wire* Terminal blocks for 18 to Connections 12 AWG Installation Instructions (see for more information) * Some applications may require shielded wiring. Review your system with your local Simplex product supplier. 4 S /2013

27 IDNAC SLC Control of TrueAlert and TrueAlert ES Addressable Notification Addressable notification appliance communications include operation of TrueAlert and TrueAlert ES Visible only (V/O, strobe), Audible only (A/O, horn), Audible/Visible (A/V, horn/strobe), and strobes of Speaker/Visible (S/V) notification appliances. (S/V appliances require separate speaker wiring.) IDNAC SLC addressable communications allow each horn and strobe to be individually controlled using a single two-wire circuit, confirms the wiring connections to the individual notification appliance s electronic circuit, and confirms communications between each appliance and the fire alarm control panel. Addressable communications increases supervision integrity versus conventional notification systems by providing supervision beyond the circuit wiring to each individual appliance and by constantly verifying the ability of each appliance to communicate with the control panel. Individual Appliance Status and Settings. Each addressable notification appliance is polled by the control panel to verify its ability to communicate. The fire alarm control panel monitors each addressable notification appliances for its status, condition, type of appliance, and configured appliance settings. A fault in any individual appliance automatically reports a trouble condition to the control panel. TrueAlert ES Addressable Appliance Reference A/O (horn) V/O (strobe) A/V (horn/strobe) Location Information, Diagnostics, and Troubleshooting. Each addressable notification appliance has its own 40 character custom label to identify the location of the appliance and to aid in troubleshooting fault conditions. In conventional notification systems, conventional appliances are not capable of communicating with the control panel. Fault reporting on a conventional system is limited to the circuit wiring and the entire area (zone) covered by appliances on the notification appliance circuit (NAC) making it much more difficult and costly to locate and correct the source of a problem. Tracking Appliance Details. The 4100ES with IDNAC SLCs provides intelligent addressable communications that allow detailed information associated with each addressable notification appliance to be reported to the fire alarm control panel for diagnostics and troubleshooting. Detailed information available includes; the appliance location, status, condition, type of appliance, and configured appliance settings. New Installation, Retrofit, and Life-Cycle Cost Benefits. With each addressable appliance capable of being controlled separately on the same two-wire SLC, installation time and expense for both retrofit and new construction can be significantly reduced. When Class B wiring is used, wiring can be T-tapped, allowing more savings in distance, wire, conduit (size and utilization), and overall installation efficiency. Panel Control Convenience. Applicable operation settings for each appliance can be programmed without having to replace appliances or remove them from the wall or ceiling. An appliance s notification zone can be easily changed through programming without having to add additional circuits, conduit, and wiring. Audible and visible appliances for non-fire Emergency Communications notification can be programmed to operate separately on the same pair of wires as the fire alarm notification appliances. The result is lower installation, retrofit, and overall life-cycle cost of ownership compared with traditional conventional notification systems. IDNAC SLC Hardware Reference EPS+ and EPS Power Supplies provide three, 3 A IDNAC SLCs for control and power to TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert addressable notification appliances. Both power supplies incorporate an efficient switching design that provides a regulated output of 29 VRMS, even during battery operation. With 29 VRMS minimum output at the panel, addressable notification SLCs can support wiring distances 2 to 3 times farther than available with conventional notification, or support more appliances per SLC, or work with smaller gauge wiring, or combinations of these benefits, all resulting in installation and maintenance savings with high assurance appliances that operate during normal system testing will operate during worst case alarm conditions. Virtual NACs Provide Control Convenience. For control convenience, IDNAC notification appliances can be grouped into Virtual NACS for group control, grouping that can be made across SLCs, not defined by their wiring connection. IDNAC SLC Appliance Wiring Reference Recommended wire type IDNAC SLC Capacity Maximum wire length allowed with T-Taps for Class B wiring, per SLC Maximum wire length per SLC to any appliance Maximum wiring resistance between appliances Wiring connections Installation Instructions (see for more information) UTP, unshielded twisted pair Up to 63 addresses and up to 75 unit loads (appliances are typically one unit load, devices such as Isolators may require more than one load, refer to individual device data sheet for specific information) 10,000 ft (3048 m) 4000 ft (1219 m) 26 Ω Terminal blocks for 18 to 12 AWG S /2013

28 CPU Bay Module Details Master Controller and Motherboard: Mounts in Slot 2 of a two slot motherboard and provides one Style 4 or Style 7, RUI+, isolated communications channel with earth fault detection RUI+ isolated communications controls up to 31 devices per master controller at up to 2500 ft (762 m) for single run, or 10,000 ft (3048 m) total if wiring is Class B and T-tapped; if more distance is required, up to four total RUI channels are supported; add up to three RUI expansion modules ( provides unisolated RUI communications) RUI remote equipment includes: MINIPLEX transponders, LCD Annunciators, Status Command Units (SCU), Remote Command Units (RCU), 4602 Series LED Annunciator Panels, 4100 Series 24 I/O and LED/Switch modules Open slot space on the left of the CPU motherboard is available for either another dual slot motherboard, or for one or two block modules (refer to diagram on page 2) Slot 1 of the motherboard is primarily for the Network Interface Board with media modules EPS+ Power Supply: (see page 9 for more detail) Rating is 9 A total with Special Application appliances Outputs are power-limited, except for the battery charger Provides system power, battery charging, auxiliary power, earth detection, on-board IDNet 1+ communications channel for 250 points, three on-board 3 A IDNAC SLCs, and provisions for either an optional City Connect Module or an optional Alarm Relay Module IDNet 1+ SLC Output provides Class B or Class A communications for up to 250 addressable devices (as described on page 4) DCAI (Dual Class A IDNAC Isolator) module creates two Class A outputs from one IDNAC SLC Class B Input; up to two can be connected to one IDNAC SLC, with up to 6 total per EPS; total Class A output loop current is limited to the 3 A rating of the IDNAC SLC EPS+ Power Supply (Continued): Battery Charger is dual rate, temperature compensated, and charges up to 50 Ah sealed lead-acid batteries mounted in the battery compartment (33 Ah for single bay cabinets); also is UL listed for charging up to 115 Ah batteries mounted in an external cabinet (see data sheet S for details) Battery and Charger Monitoring includes battery charger status and low or depleted battery conditions; status information provided to the master controller includes analog values for: battery voltage, charger voltage and current, actual system voltage and current, and individual IDNAC SLC currents Low Battery Cutout is selectable for each EPS+ (and EPS) power supply, Canadian models are shipped selected, other models are shipped unselected 2 A Programmable Output: Select for conventional non-synchronous NAC operation to provide supervised reverse polarity for sounder base power, Suppression Release Peripheral (SRP) power, or other coded NAC operation requirements Select for Auxiliary (AUX) operation for sounder base power, 4-wire detector power, or door holder; supervised AUX operation does not require an end-ofline relay to provide Power-Limited operation EPS+ Power Supply Mounted Optional Modules (select one): City Connect Module ( , with disconnect switches, or , without disconnect switches) can be selected for conventional dual circuit city connections Alarm Relay Module ( ) provides three Form C relays that are used for Alarm, Trouble, and Supervisory, rated 2 A 32 VDC Master Controller Selection Information Master Controller and Expansion Bay Selection Model Model Type and Listing Description Current VAC, 50/60 Hz Input UL 4100ES Master Controller Assembly with LCD and operator interface, 9 A EPS+ Enhanced English 120 VAC, Power Supply/battery charger with 250 point 50/60 Hz ULC French IDNet 1+ interface, 3 Class B IDNAC SLCs, Canadian RUI+ isolated output communications interface, VAC, 50/60 Hz and one output configurable for Auxiliary or UL Input simple NAC operation VAC, 50/60 Hz input UL VAC, 50/60 Hz input, Canadian, English ULC 4100ES Master Controller Assembly, No Display, No Operator Interface, 9 A EPS+ Enhanced Power Supply/battery charger with 250 point IDNet 1+ interface, 3 Class B IDNAC SLCs, RUI+ isolated output communications interface, and one output configurable for Auxiliary or simple NAC operation Without IDNet devices: Supervisory = 217 ma Alarm = 480 ma With 200 IDNet devices and 20 device LEDs in alarm: Supervisory = 417 ma Alarm = 770 ma Expansion Bay Assembly; order for each required expansion bay Slot Module Stabilizer Bracket, used when expansion bays have style modules (Continued on next page) 6 S /2013

29 Module Selection Information Communication Modules Model Description Size Supv. Alarm For Master Controller; mounts in Slot 3 Modular Network Interface; each requires 1 Slot 46 ma 46 ma For Redundant Master Controller two media modules (below) 1 Slot 46 ma 46 ma Wired Media Module Select two media cards as required; mounts on N.A. 55 ma 55 ma Fiber Optic Media Module or N.A. 25 ma 25 ma Building Network Interface Card (BNIC), refer to data sheet S for details 2 Blocks 291 ma 291 ma Network Access Dial-in Service Modem, mounts to or Network Interface Card, requires telephone line connection N.A. 60 ma 60 ma Remote Unit Interface Module (RUI, unisolated); up to 3 maximum per control panel 1 Slot 85 ma 85 ma City Circuit, with disconnect switches N.A. 20 ma 36 ma Select one per City Circuit, w/o disconnect switches N.A. 20 ma 36 ma EPS+ or EPS Alarm Relay, 3 Form C relays, 2 32 VDC N.A. 15 ma 37 ma Dual Port RS-232 standard interface (single block) 3 maximum RS Block 60 ma 60 ma Dual Port RS-232 with 2120 interface (slot module) modules per panel 1 Slot 132 ma 132 ma SafeLINC Internet Interface (refer to data sheet S for details) 2 Blocks 145 ma 145 ma TrueInsight Remote Monitoring Module (refer to data sheet S for details) Side Mt. 62 ma 73 ma Physical Bridge, Class B, includes 1 modem module and 2 wired modules 1 Slot 210 ma 210 ma Physical Bridge, Class X, includes 2 modem and 2 wired modules 2 Slots 300 ma 300 ma VESDA Aspiration System Interface 1 Slot 132 ma 132 ma DACT, Point or Event Reporting; 1 shipped unless is selected; 2 max. per system; includes 2, cables, 14 ft (4.3 m) long, RJ45 plug and spade lugs Side Mt. 30 ma 40 ma Additional Enhanced Power Supplies, Expansion and Remote Power Supplies, and Accessories Model Voltage/Listing Description Size Supv. Alarm VAC UL & ULC 217 ma 480 ma VAC UL VAC UL & ULC VAC UL Additional Enhanced Power Supply (EPS+); 9 A Enhanced Power Supply/battery charger with 250 point IDNet 1+ interface, 3 Class B IDNAC SLCs, and RUI+ isolated output communications interface; 120 VAC model has selectable low battery cutout Enhanced Power Supply (EPS); 9 A Enhanced Power Supply/battery charger with 3 Class B IDNAC SLCs, and RUI+ isolated output communications interface; 120 VAC model has selectable low battery cutout 4 Blocks Right Side 4 Blocks Right Side with 200 IDNet devices and 20 device LEDs in alarm 125 ma 220 ma Dual Class A IDNAC Isolator (DCAI), converts a single Class B IDNAC SLC input to two Class A or two Class B SLC outputs; provides short circuit isolation between each Class A or B output circuit; connect up to two DCAI modules per IDNAC SLC input up to a maximum of 6 DCAI modules per EPS; each isolated output SLC used requires one IDNAC address; the total current remains controlled by the Class B input source SLC at 3 A maximum 1 Block 6.5 ma 6.5 ma VDC Power Option, 2 A maximum 1 Block 1.5 A maximum VDC Converter, required for multiple Physical Bridge Modules, 3 A maximum 1 Block included w/loads Box Interconnection Harness Kit (non-audio); order one for each close-nippled cabinet Slot Module Additional 24 VDC Harness; need when 4100 Slot module requirements exceed 2 A from EPS Module Selection is continued on next page Additional 4100ES Data Sheet and Related Product Reference Subject Data Sheet Subject Data Sheet Introducing the 4100ES S Fire Alarm Network Overview S ES Enclosures S Network Communications S ES Audio and Firefighter Phone Modules S Network Display Unit (NDU) S LED/Switch Modules & Printer S Addressable Device Compatibility S Remote Annunciators S IDNAC Repeater S MINIPLEX Transponders S IDNet+ Module w/quad Isolator S Building Network Interface (BNIC) S Remote Battery Charger S InfoAlarm Command Center S TFX Interface Module S Graphic I/O Modules S SafeLINC Internet Interface S TrueInsight Remote Service S ES Panels for Conventional Notification S Agent Release Applications S TrueAlarm Sensors S TrueAlert ES Audible Only Appliances S49AO-0001 TrueAlert ES Audible/Visible Appliances S49AV-0001 TrueAlert ES Visible Only Appliances S49VO-0001 TrueAlert ES Weatherproof Appliances, UL Listed S49WP-0001 TrueAlert Appliance/IDNAC SLC Isolator S TrueAlert ES Weatherproof Appliances, ULC Listed S49WP S /2013

30 Module Selection Information (Continued) Addressable Interface Modules (refer to location reference on pages 9 and 10) Model Description Supv. Alarm With 250 IDNet devices, and 20 device LEDs in alarm 292 ma 510 ma IDNet 1+ Module, 250 point capacity Module without devices 92 ma 115 ma with isolated output, 1 block Loading per IDNet device (no LEDs on) 0.8 ma 1 ma Quad IDNet Isolator Module; converts a single connected SLC into four isolated outputs selectable as Class A or Class B, provides advanced diagnostics for use with retrofit wiring; dual horizontal block module; (see data sheet S for additional details) NOTE: This module is compatible with IDNet Remote Isolators 75 ma 115 ma Relay Modules; Nonpower-limited (for mounting in expansion bay only, refer to location reference on pages 9 and 10) Model Description Resistive Ratings Inductive Ratings Size Supv. Alarm DPDT w/feedback VAC VAC 2 Slots 15 ma 175 ma DPDT w/feedback 2 30 VDC/VAC 1/2 30 VDC/120 VAC 1 Block 15 ma 60 ma SPDT 3 30 VDC/120 VAC 1-1/2 30 VDC/120 VAC 1 Block 15 ma 190 ma Current Calculation Notes: 1. To determine total supervisory current, add currents of modules in panel to base system value and all external loads powered by panel power supplies. 2. To determine total alarm current, add currents of modules in panel to base system alarm current and add all panel SLC and NAC loads and all external loads powered from panel power supplies. Miscellaneous Accessories Model Description Single blank 2 display cover; provides a single plate for a full bay Termination and Address Label Kit (for module marking); provides additional labels for field installed modules Smoke Management Application Guide; required for UUKL listing Tamper Switch, one per cabinet assembly if required; monitors solid door for panels with solid door; monitors the internal retainer panel for panels with glass door (not the glass door); has a built-in addressable IDNet IAM Series resistor for WSO, IDCs (N.O. water flow and tamper on same circuit, wires after water flow and before tamper) 470 Ω, 1 W, encapsulated, two 18 AWG leads (0.82 mm 2 ), 2-1/2 L x 1-3/8 W x 1 H (64 mm x 35 mm x 25 mm) General Specifications Input Power Power Supply Output Ratings for EPS/EPS+ Enhanced Power Supplies, EPS/EPS+ Total Power Supply Output Rating Compatible Special Application Appliances Battery Charger Ratings for EPS/EPS+ (sealed lead-acid batteries) 120 VAC Models 4.6 A 102 to 132 VAC, 50/60 Hz VAC Models 2.3 A 204 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz; separate taps for 220/230/240 VAC Including module currents and auxiliary power outputs; 9 A total for Special Application appliances IDNAC SLC Ratings 3 A, regulated 29 VRMS, 63 addresses, 75 unit loads Auxiliary Power Tap 2 A maximum, 24 VDC nominal (19.5 to 31.1 VDC) Battery capacity range Charger characteristics and performance Output switches to battery backup during mains AC failure or brownout conditions Simplex TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert addressable notification appliances; contact your Simplex product representative for compatible appliances UL listed for battery charging of 6.2 Ah up to 115 Ah (batteries larger than 50 Ah require a remote battery cabinet); ULC listed for charging up to 50 Ah batteries Temperature compensated, dual rate, recharges depleted batteries within 48 hours per UL Standard 864; to 70% capacity in 12 hours per ULC Standard S527 Environmental Operating Temperature 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) Operating Humidity Up to 93% RH, 90 F (32 C) maximum Description Document ES Installation Instructions Additional Technical Reference ES Operating Instructions IDNet 1+ Module Installation Instructions EPS/EPS+ Installation Instructions DCAI Module Installation Instructions S /2013

31 Expansion Bay Module Loading Reference Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Block A Block C Block E Block G Size Definitions: 1 Block = 4 W x 5.65 H (102 mm x 144 mm); (often called x 5 modules) 1 Slot = 2 W x 11.3 H (51 mm x 287 mm), typically a motherboard with daughter card Block B Block D Block F Block H Expansion Bay Chassis Mounting and CPU Bay Module Reference (* indicates supplied modules) Master Controller Bay Space for two 2" slot modules, or one 4" slot modules, or two single block modules, or one double block (vertical mount) module Optional TrueInsight Module mounting location Typical Expansion Bay (showing mixed module sizes) Two bay cabinet shown without dress panel Battery Compartment (50 Ah maximum) One 2" card: either Network Module with media cards or RS-232/2120 Interface PDI DACT mounting location *EPS+ power supply with IDNet 1+ module Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 *Master controller I/O Wiring I/O Wiring with motherboard PDI 4100 Option 4100 Option 4100 Option Master Controller Board Service Modem mounts only on master controller board 4x5 Module (Block E) 4x5 Module (Block F) I/O Wiring Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (Blocks G & H) or City Circuit or Alarm Relay mounts on bottom of EPS Exposed cabinet for semi-flush mounting 1-3/8" (35 mm) minimum Exposed door and cabinet for semiflush mounting 6-1/8" (156 mm) minimum Door thickness 4-3/4"(121 mm) Knockout screw/nail holes (for semi-flush mounting) Wall board reference for semi-flush mounting, 6" stud Stud alignment markers, each side 6" stud 4" stud Cabinet height: (2 bay shown for reference) 1 Bay = 22" (559 mm) 2 Bay = 40" (1016 mm) 3 Bay = 56" (1427 mm) Door can be hung hinged left or right 24" (610 mm) Optional semi-flush trim kit Door 4-3/4" (121 mm) 6-29/32" (175 mm) 11-11/16" (296 mm) NOTE: A system ground must be provided for Earth Detection and transient protection devices. This connection shall be made to an approved, dedicated Earth connection per NFPA 70, Article 250, and NFPA S /2013

32 TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. VESDA is a trademark of Xtralis Pty Ltd. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). ASHRAE and BACnet are trademarks of ASHRAE, American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers. Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

33 ALARMS SYSTEM WARNINGS AC Power Fire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm Supervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced Fire Alarm Priority 2 Supv Trouble Alarm System Ack Ack Ack Ack Silence Reset Event More Time Info Previous Menu On Enable Next Arm Off Lamp Disable Auto Disarm Test Emergency Operating Instructions Alarm or Warning Condition System indicator flashing. Tone On. How to Acknowledge / View Events Press ACK located under flashing indicator. Repeat operation until all events are acknowledged. Local tone will silence. A B C D E F G H I ZONE SIG AUX J K L M N O P Q R FB IDNet 4 IO5 6 S T U V W X Y Z / P A L 'SP' ( ), 0 : NE T ADDR 0 DEL Enter C/Exit How to Silence Building Signals Press Alarm Silence. How to Reset System Press System Reset. Press Ack to silence tone device. On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto Fire Control Panels UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Addressable Fire Detection and Control Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment Features Emergency voice/alarm communications provide: Alarm/evacuation signal generation with multiple built-in tones Standard or customized digital message storage and message generation Automatic or manual operation Mass Notification operation Multiple channels are available: Analog audio systems provide dual channel operation Digital audio systems provide up to eight channels over a single wire pair Communications features: Up to five supervised remote microphone inputs Spoken voice coding from the digital message player Multiple digitally recorded human voice messages Spoken WALKTEST system testing Separate evacuation, drill, and optional All Clear voice messages and tones Ready-to-talk microphone indicator on front panel audio control module Local panel speaker for tone/message broadcast verification MINIPLEX Voice Transponders are available for distributed audio Amplifiers are available with analog or digital input: Flex-35 (35 W) and Flex-50 (50 W) amplifiers provide a dual channel design with configurable operation modes 100 W primary and backup, single channel amplifiers include a built-in power supply Amplifiers are available for 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS output with on-board, power-limited NACs (only one voltage choice per system) Built-in Temporal Pattern horn tone provides default backup signal operation Optional modules provide power-limited NAC expansion, convert Class B NACs to Class A operation, and provide Constant Supervision Operation for Non-Alarm Audio (NAA) applications (NAA requires additional hardware, and software revision or higher) Firefighter telephone systems: Master telephone can simultaneously talk with up to 6 remote telephones and can be connected as an audio input for broadcast messages Ring signal on remote firefighter telephone indicates that a call request is initiated and a hold signal indicates that a connected line has been deselected Telephone circuits are supervised for open and short circuits, too many telephones connected, and the master telephone is supervised for cord integrity Degraded mode allows remote telephones to remain connected to each other in the event of a communications loss 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel with Voice and Firefighter Telephone Options Listed to: UL Std. 864, Fire Detection and Control (UOJZ), and Smoke Control Service (UUKL) UL Std. 2017, Process Management Equipment (QVAX) UL Std. 1076, Proprietary Alarm Units-Burglar (APOU) UL Std. 1730, Smoke Detector Monitor (UULH) ULC Std. S Description 4100ES Audio Systems provide voice communication, alarm tones, and/or digitally prerecorded voice messages to alert occupants of fire or other emergency situations. Evacuation signaling may be automatically generated via alarm initiated event programs or by firefighting personnel using the operator controls. 4100U Series Products Note. The audio system modules and features listed in this data sheet are both compatible with, and listed for use with 4100U series fire alarm control panels. Contact your local Simplex product supplier for details. * See page 5 for product that is listed as UL or ULC and additional product listing details. This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :251 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. S /2013

34 Audio Controller Module Description The Audio Controller Module provides digitized alarm tones and digitally recorded voice messages and message construction, and manages both microphone inputs and other auxiliary inputs connected to the optional Auxiliary Audio Input Module. Tones and voice messages are digitally recorded and stored in the audio control module s message memory. Two versions are available: Analog and Digital. Systems must be either analog or digital, not intermixed. One audio control module controls the entire audio system. Common audio control board features: On-board digital message memory provides up to 2 minutes at normal or 1 minute at high resolution Connects to optional 4-input audio input modules (two maximum) for a total of up to 6 microphones and 11 distinct audio inputs Memory expansion is available to provide up to 8 minutes or 32 minutes at normal resolution (4 minutes or 16 minutes at high resolution) Connections for a Master Microphone and one Remote Microphone, compatible with standard or noise-canceling microphones Master telephone to audio interface connection uses the audio bay s Power Distribution Interface Module (PDI) Local panel speaker output with on-board volume control On-board download port for message loading The microphone ready-to-talk LED is located on the front panel audio control module (see p. 4) and requires connection to a 64 LED/64 switch controller Audio risers, either digital or analog, may be directly connected to 31 remote nodes; for applications requiring audio risers to more than 31 remote nodes, alternate connection methods are available, contact your Simplex product representative for details Analog Audio Controller Modules Analog audio control modules are for systems that require one or two simultaneous channels of audio information per the following feature summary. Built-in 10 VRMS riser output eliminates the need for separate riser amplifiers available as Class B or Class A Messages can play on one or both risers simultaneously, with the same or a different message Analog audio controllers are for connection to analog input audio amplifiers and audio risers only On-board status LEDs assist with setup and troubleshooting Digital Audio Controller Modules Digital audio control modules are for systems that require more than two simultaneous channels of audio information per the following feature summary. Up to 8 channels of information at normal resolution are available (4 channels at high resolution) on one twisted wire pair Primary 1 Digital Audio Riser (DAR) output can be either wired Style 4 or Style 7; Primary 2 DAR is an identical, separate output for Style 4 connections, typically to local MINIPLEX voice transponders Digital audio controllers are for connection to digital input audio amplifiers and digital audio risers only Audio Tone List The Temporal 3 Pattern is available for compatible tones (1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off, 1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off, 1/2 sec on, 1-1/2 sec off) to indicate evacuation. The following is a list of the standard audio tones. Horn, continuous 500 Hz tone, primarily used for coded systems or general temporal pattern signaling Chime, a digitally recorded mechanical chime tone, normally used free-running or for coded operation Bell, a digitally recorded mechanical bell sound, normally used free-running, for coded systems, or general temporal pattern signaling Fast Whoop, a quickly ascending tone Slow Whoop, a slowly ascending tone High/Low, with high frequency of 750 Hz for 100 ms and low frequency of 500 Hz for 400 ms Beep, 500 Hz tone of 0.7 s on, 0.7 s off Stutter, 500 Hz tone with on and off times of 100 ms Wail, ascends, then descends between 600 to 940 Hz GSA Tone, continuous 2000 Hz tone Audio Controller Message Description Zone Coded Signaling is available using tones or spoken numbers. Spoken coded messages can be used in place of conventional pulse tone coding to eliminate counting and interpretation of the zone coded location. For example, a fire alarm zone such as First Floor East, Smoke Detector Room 23 will be Code Two possible transmission schemes are: 1. Conventional Zone Coded Signaling where T = Tone: T...T...TT...TTT...T...T...TT...TTT Spoken Coded Signaling: Code, one..one..two..three; Code, one..one..two..three The Audio Controller has the ability to precede spoken codes with phrases and alert tones. As an alternative, the previous example could have been preceded with a chime tone. The word code could be replaced with the phrase Doctor Firestone, please dial.... Preprogrammed Special Messages can be ordered. Up to 32 minutes of special phrases and messages are available to meet specific applications. The standard Evacuation Message is: Attention... Attention... Attention...An emergency has been reported... All occupants walk to the nearest stairway exit and walk down to your assigned re-entry floor or main lobby... Do not use the elevator... Walk to the nearest stairway... Do not use the elevator... Walk to the nearest stairway. Custom Message Ordering is summarized below: Model Description Select when Custom Messages are required, choose message types from below as required (minimum quantity of one) Custom Messages from Tape Order (1) Custom Messages from Transcript; NOTE: Send transcript in advance to Applications Engineering to verify phrase quantity Custom Messages from Archive x for each (2) complete messages without spliced phrases; or for each (50) spliced phrases CO Relocation Message; Temporal 4 Pattern horn tone with English male voice instruction; identify as UCSET1393 when ordering 2 S /2013

35 Audio Amplifiers General Description 4100ES audio amplifiers are available as dual channel models rated for 35 W (Flex-35) or 50 W (Flex-50) and as single channel 100 W models with on-board NACs (notification appliance circuits) for convenient field wiring. Common features are summarized as follows: Analog input amplifier models are for single or dual channel system operation Digital input amplifier models are for multi-channel system operation providing up to eight channels over a single twisted wire pair Amplifiers are power-limited with models available providing 25 VRMS, or 70.7 VRMS output When Non-Alarm Audio (NAA) applications (such as for background music, paging, or for Mass Notification) are required, optional Constant Supervision modules provide continued speaker zone supervision during the page or while background music is playing; due to the NAA supervision requirements, amplifiers used for paging or playing background music are derated to 70% of alarm output rating (24.5 W, 35 W, and 70 W) Linear power output stages are traditional Class B designs for low distortion and low EMI An on-board 500 Hz temporal pattern horn tone on each amplifier provides a default backup tone Supervision actively monitors amplifier gain in real time, comparing output level to input level On-board test switches can be activated to test and observe amplifier backup On-board overcurrent protection protects against overloads and short circuits Each amplifier communicates to the host CPU and allows voltage and current values to be accessed from the fire alarm control panel operator interface Flex-35 and Flex-50 Amplifiers, General Flex-35 and Flex-50 amplifiers are a self-backup dual channel design that provides a total of 35 W or 50 W of audio power with the following common feature summary: Self-backup feature allows NACs connected to a disabled amplifier channel to be routed to the remaining channel with the full 35 W or 50 W providing the single channel as selected by the fire alarm control panel programming; external backup amplifiers are not required Three standard on-board audio NACs are each rated for 2 A maximum and are capable of being routed to either desired amplifier channel Compatible power supplies include the: Expansion Power Supply (XPS), Enhanced Power Supply (EPS+ and EPS), Remote Power Supply (RPS), or System Power Supply (SPS); power supplies with single amplifiers can provide power for other compatible applications within their rated output Digital models of the Flex-35 and Flex-50 have a digital decoder module that selects one or two of the input channels as desired Selectable reduced output levels of -12 db or -6 db are available for non-emergency audio output, selectable per channel Flex-35 Amplifiers Each Flex-35 channel is capable of up to 35 W output with a total of 35 W Channels can be divided as 0 W and 35 W; 17.5 W and 17.5 W; 10 W and 25 W; or any combination that totals 35 W or less Flex-50 Amplifiers Each Flex-50 channel is capable of up to 50 W output with a total output of 50 W Channels can be divided as 0 W and 50 W; 25 W and 25 W; 10 W and 40 W; or any combination that totals 50 W or less Dual Flex-35 or Flex-50 Connections Two Flex-35 amplifiers, or two Flex-50 amplifiers can connect to a single Expansion Power Supply (XPS) in the same audio expansion bay (amplifiers must be the same model number); XPS output is dedicated to amplifier power Mounting for dual Flex-35 or Flex-50 amplifiers is Blocks A & B for amplifier 1, Blocks C & D for the XPS, blocks E & F are not used, and Blocks G & H are for amplifier 2 (see page 7 for mounting reference) 100 W Audio Amplifiers 100 W amplifiers provide single channel operation per the following feature summary: Six standard on-board Class B audio NACs are each rated for 2 A maximum 100 W amplifiers include a built-in power supply and use system battery backup Amplifier and power supply size requires four continuous blocks of expansion bay size A single 100W primary amplifier or both a primary and a backup amplifier can be located on a single expansion bay (refer to page 7 for bay loading) Redundant (backup) amplifiers interconnect directly to minimize wiring connections and their power is routed through the NACs of the primary amplifier Redundant amplifier operation can be configured as one-for-one or one-for-many depending on specific requirements Digital models of these amplifiers have a digital decoder module that selects the desired input channel per system requirements Selectable reduced output levels of -12 db or -6 db are available for non-emergency audio output Audio NAC Expansion Modules For applications requiring additional NACs, modules are available for on-board expansion and further expansion is available with the chassis mounted Expansion Signal Module 100 W Amplifiers support optional modules that convert the six audio NACs to Class A or to increase the Class B audio NACs to twelve NOTE: Adding NAC expansion modules does not increase amplifier power beyond the stated ratings 3 S /2013

36 Audio Bay Reference with Single Channel Audio Control and Firefighter Telephone Modules Phone Control Phone Control Audio Control Speaker Circuits Phone Circuit 1 Phone Circuit 9 Command Center Active 8th Floor Phone Circuit 2 Phone Circuit 10 All Speakers EVAC 7th Floor Phone Circuit 3 Phone Circuit 11 Selective EVAC 6th Floor Push-to-Talk switch Phone Circuit 4 Phone Circuit 12 5th Floor Phone Circuit 5 Phone Circuit 13 4th Floor Phone Circuit 6 Phone Circuit 14 3rd Floor Phone Circuit 7 Phone Circuit 15 All Speakers Talk 2nd Floor Phone Circuit 8 Phone Circuit 16 Ready to Talk 1st Floor Master Phone Module Audio Control Modules 8 Switches with 8 Red LEDs, , 2 shown with typical labels Master Microphone Module Single Channel Audio Control Switches with 8 Red LEDs, , Single Channel , 1.5 Channel , Dual Channel , 3-8 Channel Audio Control Audio Control Audio Control Audio Control Command Center Active Green LED Command Center Active Green LED Command Center Active Green LED Command Center Active Green LED All Speakers EVAC All Speakers EVAC All Speakers EVAC All Speakers EVAC Visible area 8-1/4" H, 2" W (210 mm x 51 mm) Selective EVAC Red LEDs Selective EVAC Selective Alert Red LEDs Selective EVAC Selective Alert Red LEDs Start All Selected Red LEDs Local Speaker EVAC Local Speaker All Speakers Talk Ready to Talk Green LEDs Local Speaker EVAC All Speakers Talk Ready to Talk Green LEDs Local Speaker Alert All Speakers Talk Ready to Talk Green LEDs All Speakers Talk Ready to Talk Green LEDs Blank switches can be programmed as required 4 S /2013

37 Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment Product Selection NOTE: Select systems as either analog or digital (refer to pg. 7 for mounting reference and pg. 8 for additional specifications) Analog Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment, Constant Supervision Compatible Model Description Details Basic Analog Audio Operation with microphone, requires Includes: Expansion Bay, Analog Controller Board, dedicated expansion bay Microphone Module, and Audio Expansion Bay Kit Analog Controller Board only; order expansion bay and Controller board mounts in Blocks A and B audio expansion bay kit separately VRMS output VRMS output Flex-35, 35 W Amplifier, constant supervision compatible NAC rating = 1.4 A NAC rating = 0.5 A 35 W, or 100 speakers max VRMS output Flex-50, 50 W Amplifier, constant NAC rating = 2 A 50 W, or VRMS output supervision compatible NAC rating = A speakers max. 100 W Analog Amplifiers with Power Supply, Constant Supervision Compatible Model/Output Voltage 25 VRMS 70.7 VRMS Power Supply Input/Listing Description Details VAC, 60 Hz UL VAC, 60 Hz ULC /230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz UL VAC, 60 Hz UL VAC, 60 Hz ULC /230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz UL Primary 100 W Amplifier Backup 100 W Amplifier Includes three onboard Class B audio NACs; power is supplied from an XPS, EPS, RPS, or SPS* Includes six, Class B audio NACs; NAC rating = 100 speakers maximum; 2 25 VRMS (50 W); VRMS (100 W) Uses the six Class B NACs of primary amplifier Digital Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment, Constant Supervision Compatible Model Description Details Basic Digital Audio Operation with microphone, requires Includes: Expansion Bay, Digital Controller Board, dedicated expansion bay Microphone Module, and Audio Expansion Bay Kit Eight Channel Digital Controller Board only; order Controller board mounts in Blocks A and B expansion bay and audio expansion bay kit separately VRMS output VRMS output Flex-35, 35 W Amplifier, constant supervision compatible NAC rating = 1.4 A NAC rating = 0.5 A 35 W, or 100 speakers max VRMS output Flex-50, 50 W Amplifier, constant NAC rating = 2 A 50 W, or VRMS output supervision compatible NAC rating = A speakers max. 100 W Digital Amplifiers with Power Supply, Constant Supervision Compatible Model/Output Voltage 25 VRMS 70.7 VRMS Power Supply Input/Listing Description Details VAC, 60 Hz UL Primary VAC, 60 Hz ULC 100 W /230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz UL Amplifier VAC, 60 Hz UL Backup VAC, 60 Hz ULC 100 W /230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz UL Amplifier ULC models have low battery dropout circuit Includes three onboard Class B audio NACs; power is supplied from an XPS, EPS, RPS, or SPS* Includes six, Class B audio NACs; NAC rating = 100 speakers maximum; 2 25 VRMS (50 W); VRMS (100 W) Uses the six Class B NACs of primary amplifier Audio Options for use with either Analog or Digital Systems (see page 2 for custom message ordering) Amplifier and Related Audio Options Model Description Details and Mounting Reference Flex-35/50 Expansion NAC Module; adds three Class B audio NACs Flex-35/50 Class A Adapter Module; converts three on-board NACS to Class A operation 100 W Amplifier Expansion NAC Module; NAC ratings = 1.5 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers max. 100 W Class A Adapter Module; NAC ratings = 2 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum 25 VRMS Output; NAC rating = 2 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum 70.7 VRMS Output; NAC rating = A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum Choose one per amplifier Choose one per amplifier Constant Supervision Adapter for three NACs; select per amplifier output (not compatible with amplifier NAC expansion modules) ULC models have low battery dropout circuit Mounts on Flex-35/50 assembly; NAC ratings = 1.5 A, 35/50 W, or 100 speakers maximum; Supv. = 8.4 ma, Alarm = 60 ma Mounts on Flex-35/50 assembly; NAC ratings = 2 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum; Supv. = 1 ma, Alarm = 30 ma Provides six additional Class B audio NACs, mounts on 100 W amplifier assembly; Supv. = 17 ma, Alarm = 60 ma Converts six on-board NACs to Class A operation, mounts on 100 W amplifier assembly; Supv. = 1 ma, Alarm = 60 ma Supv. = 10 ma on batteries; Alarm = 35 ma Supv. = 38 ma Alarm = 70 ma Converts three Class B audio NACS to Class A or Class B Constant Supervision NACs; mounts on Flex-35/50 or 100 W amplifier assembly; use two for the six NACs on 100 W amplifiers; * Refer to data sheets S (EPS+/EPS) and S (SPS/RPS) for power supply details. (continued on next page) 5 S /2013

38 Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment Product Selection (Continued) Amplifier and Related Audio Options (Continued) Model Description Details and Mounting Reference Expansion Signal Module; three, 1.5 A Class B NACs; up to five maximum per amplifier; NAC rating = 1.5 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum Converts one NAC input to three NAC outputs; selects between two inputs; for Flex-35/50 amplifiers only, two input NACs are required; Single Block module mounts in expansion bay; Supv. = 20 ma; Alarm = 80 ma Expansion Signal Module NAC Expander; NAC Expands module capacity to six, Class B NACs; rating = 1.5 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum Supv. = 0.84 ma; Alarm = 60 ma These modules mount on the Expansion Signal Module Class A Adapter; NAC Converts 3 Class B, NACs to Class A; Supv. = 1 ma; ; rating = 1.5 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum Alarm = 30 ma select one max. Expansion Signal Module Constant Supervision Converts 3 Class B NACs to Class B or Class A Constant per Adapter for 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS; NAC rating Supervision NACs; Supv. = 38 ma on batteries (constant as required = 1.4 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum supervision deactivated); Alarm = 70 ma End-of-line resistor harness for 70.7 VRMS NACs; 10 k, 1 W Expansion Bay Hardware; order one for each expansion bay Audio Bay-to-Bay Interconnection Harness Kit; order one for each audio bay addition Audio Box Interconnection Harness Kit; order one for each close-nippled audio cabinet Audio Input and Controller Options (see page 2 for custom message ordering) Model Description Details and Mounting Reference Auxiliary Audio Input Module; four additional Inputs for 10 VRMS, 25 VRMS, 70.7 VRMS, line level (0.707 VRMS), or (unsupervised) inputs per module; 2 maximum microphone; 1 Block; current = 10 ma Provides 8 minutes at normal resolution or 4 minutes at high Minute Message Expansion Module Mounts to resolution, Supv. = 2 ma; Active = 17 ma audio Minute Message Expansion Module Provides 32 minutes at normal resolution or 16 minutes at controller high resolution; Supv. = 2 ma; Active = 17 ma module Operator Interface and Related Options Model Description Details and Mounting Reference Microphone Module (mike); for One maximum per audio system; front panel module that requires 2 Slots (4 ), Supervisory Fire Alarm Control Panels locate on expansion bay only; space behind for 4100ES flat modules only current = Remote Microphone Module; for Remote Annunciator Panels Front panel module that requires 2 Slots (4 ), locate on expansion bay only; space behind for 4100ES flat modules only; distance limited to 4000 ft (1219 m) 2.4 ma Active current = 6 ma Remote Microphone Module Mounted on plate with controls, for 2-gang box mount, see data sheet S for details Channel (audio or mike) Single Slot LED/switch modules; connects to a or Channel (audio + mike) Operator LED/switch controller in the same bay; space behind controller accepts Channel (full audio) Interface 4100ES flat modules only (see drawings on p. 4); current = 24 ma; Channel (8 channel normal LED/Switch Additional adjacent LED/switch modules, as shown on p. 4, are used as res. messages, 4 channels of Modules required for specific speaker circuit selection (refer to data sheet high res. messages) S for LED/switch module availability) 64 LED/64 Switch Controller Mounts behind the LED/switch modules; has Module with mounting plate Refer to data provisions for one Controller Module sheet S LED/64 Switch Controller for details Mounts on extra space of ; controls Module without mounting plate additional 64 LEDs and 64 switches Firefighter Telephone System Products Model Description Details and Mounting Reference Master Telephone with Control Module and three Class B telephone NACs, one maximum per audio system; for use in Fire Alarm Control Panels only; includes one Module LED/switch controllers and their connected modules must be in the same bay Front panel module; space behind for 4100ES flat modules only; phone control module included, mounted on bay module mounting plate; for individual telephone circuit control, use LED/switch modules; Supv. = 80 ma; in use = 140 ma + remote phones (see table on page 7) Remote Master Telephone Mounts in Remote Annunciator Panel only (see S ) Expansion Telephone Control Module with three Expansion module for additional telephone circuits in main control or Class B telephone NACs transponders; Supv. = 80 ma; in use = 140 ma + remote phones Telephone NAC Class A Adapter Module Mounts to or -1272; no additional current required Network and MINIPLEX Transponder Audio Connection Options Model Description Details Network Audio Riser Controller Module for Typically for Network nodes without an audio controller, used for NAA control of either an analog or digital riser module applications; mounts in Block A; current = 35 ma Dual Channel Analog Audio Accepts two separate audio signals from host; controlled by Transponder Riser Module Interface Module; current = 25 ma when active 3-8 Channel Digital Audio Riser Select one, Receives and decodes digital inputs; up to eight audio channels; Module; with NAA input mounts in current = 70 ma; NAA input for 25, 70.7, or VRMS Block B Selects a single digital audio channel and converts it to an analog line level MCC (Multiple Command Center) for input to an analog 4100ES/ 4100U/4100 Legacy voice panel; current = Digital Audio Riser Interface 70 ma /4100+ Legacy bay mounting kit Use to mount MCC Digital Audio Riser Interface in legacy panel NPU to 4100ES Audio Interconnect Module; Dual terminal block module with harnesses for connecting to the Audio mounts in 4100ES Audio cabinet Controller and Telephone Control module (requires 1 Block) 6 S /2013

39 Firefighter Telephone System Description Firefighter telephone systems provide two-way communications for facilities where radio communications may not be available or are unreliable. They are typically used during active firefighting conditions, during a fire alarm investigation, or during fire alarm system inspection and test. System Operation. Connections are made using a common talk line (party line) that includes a Master Telephone and up to six remote telephones. Remote telephones call into the Master by either being taken off-hook or by being plugged into a telephone jack. The Master Telephone location receives a ring-in tone with a visible LED indicator for each telephone circuit. When the call is received, the operator selects the calling telephone circuit using the assigned switch control. The operator at the master location can place the original telephone circuit on hold and connect to additional telephone circuits or add them to the talk line. Master Telephone Operation. The Master Telephone connects directly into a telephone interface module. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) switch provides the operator with voice input control. Each master telephone uses local LED/switch modules to select telephone circuits and to silence any subsequent call-ins until selected. Telephone Circuit Control. A call request causes the local call-in tone sounder and assigned telephone circuit LED to pulse quickly. Pushing the calling circuit s switch silences the local sounder and connects that circuit to the talk line. Activating the switch again places that circuit on hold with a hold tone being heard at the remote telephones and causing that circuit s LED to pulse slowly. Subsequent pushes toggles from active to hold. Activating a telephone circuit switch when no call is incoming places a request to pick up on remote telephones equipped with local LEDs. Master telephones can be also be connected as an input to an audio controller module to allow audio system message broadcasting without using a microphone. Remote Master Telephones mount in Remote Annunciator Cabinets and are wired as the only connection to a telephone circuit. By adding local LED/switch modules, operation is that of the Master Telephone. Remote telephones are available cabinet mounted or for plugging into a dedicated telephone jack. Each hears a ring tone when a call-in is selected and a hold tone when placed on hold. When on hold, the remote telephones are each separated from the talk line. The Telephone Interface Module provides three Class B (Class A option is available) telephone circuits, connection for a master telephone, and a telephone riser input. One module is supplied when selecting a Master Telephone. Additional telephone interface modules can be added as required. Telephone circuit outputs can be programmed as remote telephones, as a Remote Master, or for telephone riser operation. Telephone circuits are supervised for opens, shorts, and overload conditions. The Master Telephone is supervised for broken cord or off-hook. Telephone riser operation can be programmed to provide a telephone riser output that is used to interconnect telephone interface modules in different locations. This output type has ring and hold tones disabled. Degraded Mode. If the telephone interface module loses communications with the host fire alarm control panel, telephone circuits off-hook are automatically connected to the talk line allowing any telephone to talk to another simply by being picked up (or plugged in). Master Telephone Control Current with Remote Telephones. The following table lists Master Telephone Control current with the addition of remote firefighter telephones. Remote Phones Current (ma) Expansion Bay Module Loading Reference Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Block A Block B Block C Block D Block E Block F Expansion Bay Chassis Block G Block H Size Definitions: Block = 4 W x 5 H (102 mm x 127 mm) card area Slot = 2 W x 8 H (51 mm x 203 mm) motherboard with daughter card Description Mounting Audio Controller Modules Blocks A & B Network Riser Controller Module Block A Audio Riser Modules Block B EPS+, EPS, SPS, or RPS Blocks E, F, G & H ONLY XPS Blocks G & H ONLY* Flex-35 Amplifiers, 2 max /bay* Blocks E & F; C & D; or A & B Flex-50 Amplifiers, 2 max/bay* Blocks E & F or C & D 100 W Amplifiers, 1 max/bay Blocks E, F, G & H 100 W Backup Amplifiers, 1 max. per bay with primary amplifier Blocks A, B, C & D Master or Remote Phone Module Blocks A & B Two vertical Blocks, Master or Remote Microphone any location (except Module next to telephone) Telephone Module 1 Block Expansion Signal Module 1 Block Operator LED/Switch Modules 1 Slot NPU to 4100ES Audio Interconnect Module 1 Block * NOTE: When mounting dual Flex amplifiers on an expansion bay, special mounting rules apply. 7 S /2013

40 General Specifications Input Power Power Supplies; SPS, XPS, RPS, and 100 W Amplifiers Enhanced Power Supplies EPS+ and EPS Amplifier Ratings Built-in Tones Flex-35 Amplifiers: Flex-50 Amplifiers: W Amplifiers and Backup Amplifiers: , , , , , ; , , , , , Total Amplifier Power per Cabinet Audio Controller Ratings Current Requirements Analog Riser Distance Digital Riser Distance; 18 AWG unshielded, twisted pair (UTP) required, except as noted (refer to Installation Instructions )* 120 VAC Models 4 A 102 to 132 VAC, 60 Hz VAC Models 2 A 204 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz; with taps for 220/230/240 VAC 120 VAC Models 4.6 A 102 to 132 VAC, 60 Hz VAC Models 2.3 A 204 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz; with taps for 220/230/240 VAC 500 Hz horn tone operated at temporal pattern, provided when amplifiers are separated from audio controller Input Voltage 19 to 35 VDC from adjacent power supply 425 ma with power stage supervised Supervisory Current 85 ma in low power mode Alarm full output power Input Voltage Supervisory Current Alarm full output power Supervisory Current Alarm full output power 300 W maximum Use this value for power 5.5 A with continuous horn tone supply loading Use this value for battery 1.64 A average, with temporal pattern horn backup reference 19 to 35 VDC from adjacent power supply 425 ma with power stage supervised 85 ma in low power mode Use this value for power 5.55 A with continuous horn tone supply loading Use this value for battery 2.27 A average, with temporal pattern horn backup reference 400 ma (analog); 220 ma (digital) with power stage supervised 85 ma in low power mode 9.6 A with continuous horn tone Use this value for battery 3.8 A average, with temporal pattern horn backup reference , Analog = 225 ma supervisory Add for local speaker in alarm: 75 ma min. volume; 190 ma half volume; 333 ma full volume; Add microphone current separately; Supv.= 2.4 ma; , Digital = 85 ma supervisory Active = 30 ma Up to 10,000 ft (3048m) total with 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ) shielded twisted pair (STP) Up to 2500 ft (762 m) from Digital Controller to Digital Audio Riser or MCC Digital Riser Interface; up to 2500 ft (762 m) between Digital Audio Riser Modules or MCC Digital Riser Interfaces (signal is reformatted and repeated); wire runs over 100 ft (30 m) require UTP wire * NOTE: Wire runs of 100 ft (30 m) or less require shielded twisted pair wire (STP) Firefighter Telephone Distance Ratings Distance 7500 ft (2286 m) distance to farthest phone, 18 AWG shielded twisted pair (STP) Battery Charger, System and Remote Power Supply (sealed lead-acid batteries) Battery capacity range UL listed for battery charging of 6.2 Ah up to 110 Ah (batteries larger than 50 Ah require a remote battery cabinet); ULC listed for charging up to 50 Ah batteries Charger characteristics and performance Temperature compensated, dual rate, recharges depleted batteries within 48 hours per UL Standard 864, to 70% capacity in 12 hours per ULC Standard S527 Environmental Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) Operating Humidity Range Up to 93% RH, 90 F (32 C) maximum Additional 4100ES Data Sheet Reference Subject Data Sheet Subject Data Sheet Subject Data Sheet Basic Panel with EPS/EPS+ S Network Display Unit (NDU) S Remote Firefighter Phones S Enclosures S LED/Switch Modules S Mic. Multiplex Module S MINIPLEX Transponders S S/V, Addressable Strobe S Remote Battery Charger S Speakers S S/V, SmartSync Strobe S Remote Annunciators S TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

41 FIRE PULL DOWN ALARM A LARM S SYSTEM WARNINGS AC Power Fire A larm Pr iority 2 Ala rm S uperv isory Trou ble Alarm Silenced Fire A larm Priority 2 Supv Trouble Alarm System Ac k Ack Ack Ack Silence Reset Event More Time Info Previous Menu Enable On Next Arm Of f La m p Di sable Auto Di sa rm Te s t Emergency Operating Instructions Alarm or Warning Condition System indicator flashing. Tone On. How to Ac knowledge / View Events Press ACK located under flashing indicator. Repeat oper ation until all events are acknowledged. Local t one will silence. A BC D E F G H I ZONE SIG AU X J KL M N O P Q R FB IO IDNe t S T U V W X Y Z / P A L 'SP' ( ), 0 : NET ADDR 0 DEL En t er C/Exit How to Silenc e Building Signals Press Alarm Silence. How to Reset System Press System Reset. Press Ack to silence tone device. On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto DISCONNECT A.C. PO WE R C AN D BATTE RY BEFORE A SE RV IC ING U T I O N DIS CO N NE CT A.C. POWER On Of f Auto On Of f Auto On Of f Auto On Of f Auto C A U T I O N Fire Alarm Local Mode Controller Alarm Local Mode Alarm CONTROL Control Silenced ENABLE Local Mode Active Alarm Silence Reset Po wer On UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved * Features 4100ES Series MINIPLEX transponders allow remotely located initiating and notification functions: Transponder operation is available as standard or with local mode operation Communications with the host fire alarm control panel use the Remote Unit Interface (RUI/RUI+) format Initiating functions include: Addressable device support including TrueAlarm analog sensor compatibility Conventional initiating device circuit (IDC) support Notification functions include: Addressable strobe and horn notification using enhanced power delivery IDNAC SLCs Emergency voice/alarm communications Conventional DC notification appliance circuits (NACs) Local mode operation provides: Default local initiating and notification operation in the event of a communications loss with the host control panel Enabling of an optional Local Mode Controller with a local alarm sounder, LED status indicators, and keyswitch enabled control switches Support for IDNet addressable devices, addressable and conventional notification appliances, and default output tones from local amplifiers Optional modules include: Digital or Analog audio riser modules for connection to system audio signals Digital or analog input audio amplifiers with integral on-board NACs Power supplies with or without battery chargers City Connect modules and RS-232 ports for printers or maintenance terminals Alarm relays, auxiliary relays, additional IDC modules, and NAC expansion modules Cabinets are equipped with solid doors (beige or red) and in one, two, or three bay sizes Listed to: UL Std. 864, Fire Detection and Control (UOJZ), and Smoke Control Service (UUKL) UL Std. 2017, Process Management Equipment (QVAX) UL Std. 1076, Proprietary Alarm Units-Burglar (APOU) UL Std. 1730, Smoke Detector Monitor (UULH) ULC Std. S * See pages 4 and 5 for product that is listed as UL or ULC. This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :0251 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. IDNet addressable devices Audio NAC MINIPLEX transponder 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel with Voice Control AND BATTERY BE F ORE S ER VICIN G Addressable strobes on IDNAC SLC Local mode controller Typical 4100ES MINIPLEX System One-Line Drawing Introduction 4100ES Fire Control Panels Addressable Fire Detection and Control MINIPLEX Transponders 4100ES MINIPLEX transponders connect to a host 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel using Simplex remote unit interface (RUI) communications. At the transponder, RUI communications are received by the transponder interface module and translated into the same internal communications format that is used in the host control panel. Remotely located modules. With RUI communications, the transponder can remotely provide the same initiating and notification functions that occur at the host control panel without requiring multiple long distance wiring runs. Connections to the host panel are low current communications and audio wiring with distances up to 2500 ft (762 m). Additional Reference. Refer to document S and the other documents listed on page 3 for additional information concerning the extensive initiating and notification features of the 4100ES fire alarm control panels. S /2013

42 Module Bay Description Transponder model includes a bay assembly, a power distribution interface module (PDI), a Basic Transponder Interface Module, and an interconnect harness. Communications with the host fire alarm control panel are via a Remote Unit Interface (RUI) connection that allows for up to 2500 ft (762 m) distance. RUI can communicate with up to a total of 31 remote devices and can be either Style 4 or Style 7 communications. Transponder model substitutes a Local Mode Transponder Module for the Basic Transponder Module. Optional Expansion Bays each include a PDI and accept a variety of optional modules (refer to list starting on page 4). The Battery Compartment (bottom) accepts two batteries, up to 50 Ah, that can be mounted within the cabinet. Battery mounting does not interfere with available module space. A power supply with battery charger is required for each battery set. Packaging Availability Modules are power-limited (except as noted, such as relay modules) Enclosure are available for one, two, or three bay sizes or for cabinet rack mounting Boxes and solid doors are available in beige or red (ordered separately) Up to eight close-nippled cabinets can be connected at one transponder location (close-nippled is mounted within 20 ft (6 m) and with interconnecting wiring enclosed in conduit) Refer to document S for enclosure details Local Mode Control Operation Default Stand-Alone Operation. In the event of a communications loss with the host fire alarm control panel, model MINIPLEX Local Mode Transponders provide fire alarm response default operation for its connected devices and appliances per the following. Input Operation. During local mode operation, TrueAlarm initiating devices connected to the transponder will cause an alarm at their least sensitive alarm threshold. Photoelectric sensors will alarm at 3.7%/ft smoke obscuration Ionization sensors will alarm at 1.3%/ft obscuration Heat sensors will alarm at a fixed temperature of 135 F (57 C) TrueAlarm device LEDs will be activated to indicate a device in alarm Local Mode Control Operation (Continued) Notification Operation. Fire alarm conditions reported against a fire alarm point type within a transponder in local mode will cause all notification appliance circuits in that transponder to: Sound a general alarm temporal pattern horn tone Activate visible notification appliance circuits Local Mode Module Support. Local mode operation provides support for the following 4100ES modules: Enhanced Power Supplies (EPS+/EPS) including on-board IDNAC SLCs IDNet 1+ addressable device circuits, including those on-board the EPS+, IDNet 1+ expansion modules, and the Quad IDNet Isolator Module Expansion Power Supplies (XPS) including on-board NACs and expansion signal modules, operated at a temporal pattern 4100ES amplifiers will provide their on-board horn tones (500 Hz) at a temporal pattern through their on-board amplifier NACs Firefighter Telephone control modules in local mode Local Mode Operation Module Exclusion. Modules not listed above but that are listed as compatible with MINIPLEX transponders per this document, do not interfere with local mode operation but are not supported during local mode operation. Local Mode Controller Operation. During local mode operation, an optional Local Mode Controller will indicate status (see illustration below) and can be enabled using a keyswitch to perform local alarm silence or reset. If alarms occurring during local mode are reset using a Local Mode Controller, upon restoration of communications, those alarms will not be sent to the master controller. If alarms are still present upon restoration of communications, then the alarm condition will be reported and host fire alarm control panel programmed alarm functions will occur. When communications are re-established, the local mode transponder restores automatically. Mounting. Local Mode Controllers are mounted on three-gang plates, are available in beige or red, and for either flush or semi-flush mounting. (See page 7 for details). Fire Alarm Local Mode Controller CONTROL ENABLE Local Mode Control Alarm Silence Reset Alarm Alarm Silenced Local Mode Active Power On See Operating Instruction Local Mode Controller Module 2 S /2013

43 PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL DOWN DOWN DOWN DOWN DOWN DOWN C A U T I O N C A U T I O N DISCONNECT A. C. POWER DISCONNECT A.C. POWER O N AND BATTERY BEFORE S ERVICING DISCONNECT A. C. POWER AND BATTERY BEFORE S ERVICING A.C. POWER DISCONNECT C A U T I C A U T I O N Em ergency Operati ng Instructions ALARMS Fi re Alarm P riorit y 2 Alarm Fi rea l a rm Ack E vent Time Enable Di sable On Arm Off Di sarm Pri ori ty2 Ack Auto SYSTEM WARNI NGS Supervi sory Trouble Al arm Si l enced Supv Ack More Info La mp Test Tr ouble Ack Menu Alarm Si lence Pr evious Next AC Power System Reset Alarm or Warn ing Condition Sy stem indic at or flashing. Tone On. How to Ac knowl edge / Vi ew Eve nts Pr es s ACK locat ed under f lashing indic ator. Repeat oper ation unt il all events are ack nowledged. Local t one will silence. A B C ZONE 1 D E F On Of f Aut o On Of f Aut o On Of f Aut o On Of f Aut o G HI J KL M N O P Q R FB 4 S T U V W X Y Z / P 7 ' SP' ( ), 0 : NE T SI G AU X 2 3 IO 5 A 8 How to Silenc e Buildi ng Signals Press Alarm Silence. H ow to Res et System Press Syst em Reset. Press Ack to silenc e tone device. IDN et 6 L 9 ADD R 0 DEL En te r C/Exit On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto FIRE PULL DOWN ALARM Typical Multi-Floor MINIPLEX Audio System FIRE ALARM Seventh floor Legend: Sixth floor FIRE ALARM AND BATTERY BEFO RE SERVICING MINIPLEX transponder Addressable strobes on IDNAC SLC Speaker NAC FIRE ALARM Fifth floor TrueAlarm sensors and IDNet/MAPNET II addressable circuits Audio riser wiring, twisted pair FIRE ALARM Fourth floor RUI communications wiring, twisted, shielded pair FIRE ALARM AND BATTERY BEFO RE SERVICING MINIPLEX transponder Third floor FIRE ALARM Second floor 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel with Voice Control First floor Additional 4100ES Data Sheet Reference Subject Data Sheet Subject Data Sheet MINIPLEX Transponders for conventional Basic Panel Modules and Accessories S S (non-addressable) notification applications Network Display Unit (NDU) S Enclosures S Remote Annunciators S LED/Switch Modules S Remote Battery Charger S ES Audio/Phone Modules S Addressable Device Compatibility S IDNet+ Module with Quad Isolator S S /2013

44 MINIPLEX Transponder Product Selection Transponder Type Model Description Supv. Alarm Basic Transponder, includes bay equipment with power distribution interface, and Basic Transponder Interface Module mounted in Block A 87 ma 87 ma Local Mode Transponder, includes bay equipment with power distribution interface, and normal 87 ma 87 ma Local Mode Transponder Interface Module mounted in Block A in local mode 112 ma 112 ma Local Mode Controller Selection Model Description Supv. Alarm Flush mount Red with white Local Mode Controller, 3-gang plate mounted; Surface mount lettering flush mount requires a 1 ½ (38 mm) deep normal 12 ma 12 ma Flush mount Beige with black 3-gang box; surface mount controllers include a Surface mount lettering matching mounting box; see p. 7 for details in local mode 20 ma 60 ma Communication Modules Model Description Size Supv. Alarm City Circuit, with disconnect switches N.A. 20 ma 36 ma Select one per City Circuit, without disconnect switches N.A. 20 ma 36 ma EPS+ or EPS Alarm Relay, 3 Form C relays, 2 32 VDC N.A. 15 ma 37 ma Dual RS-232 Interface 1 Slot 132 ma 132 ma Decoder Module 3 Slots 85 ma 163 ma VESDA Aspiration System Interface 1 Slot 132 ma 132 ma Master Clock Interface Module with one standard RS-232 port (see S ) 1 Slot 132 ma 132 ma Enhanced and Expansion Power Supplies and Accessories (see specification details on page 6) Model Voltage/Listing Description Size Supv. Alarm UL & VAC 217 ma 480 ma ULC VAC UL VAC UL & ULC VAC UL Enhanced Power Supply (EPS+); 9 A Enhanced Power Supply/battery charger with 250 point IDNet 1+ interface, 3 Class B IDNAC SLCs, and RUI+ isolated output communications interface; 120 VAC model has selectable low battery cutout Enhanced Power Supply (EPS); 9 A Enhanced Power Supply/battery charger with 3 Class B IDNAC SLCs, and RUI+ isolated output communications interface; 120 VAC model has selectable low battery cutout 4 Blocks Right Side 4 Blocks Right Side with 200 IDNet devices and 20 device LEDs in alarm 125 ma 220 ma Dual Class A IDNAC Isolator (DCAI), converts a single Class B IDNAC SLC input to two Class A or two Class B SLC outputs; provides short circuit isolation between each Class A or B output circuit; connect up to two DCAI modules per IDNAC SLC input up to a maximum of 6 DCAI modules per EPS; each isolated output SLC used requires one IDNAC address; the total current remains controlled by the Class B input source SLC at 3 A maximum 1 Block 6.5 ma 6.5 ma Model Voltage/Listing Description Size Supv. Alarm VAC UL Expansion Power Supply (XPS); 9 A output, 3 built-in Class A/B NACs, rated 3 A for Special Application VAC, Canadian ULC appliances (2 A for Regulated DC); NACs can be selected 2 Blocks 50 ma 50 ma VAC UL as auxiliary power outputs, derated to 2 A for continuous duty, total per XPS is 5 A; has low battery cutout NAC Expansion Module, 3 NACs, Class A/B, mounts on XPS only N.A. 25 ma 25 ma VDC Power Option, 2 A maximum 1 Block 1.5 A maximum Box Interconnection Harness Kit (non-audio); order one for each close-nippled cabinet Miscellaneous Options and Accessories Model Description Point I/O Module for external connections, select each point as either a switch input (momentary or maintained) or an output (for lamp/led/relay); requires 1 Slot (refer to data sheet S for additional information) Terminal Block Utility Module with 2, 16 position terminal blocks on 4 x 5 single block, for of up to 12 AWG wire (3.31 mm 2 ) Door Tamper Switch, connects into Transponder Interface Module, one per cabinet assembly if required VAC /230/240 VAC Power Distribution Module (PDM) select per system voltage; one required per box Green LED Power-on Indicator Kit, required for ULC listing of MINIPLEX transponder; mounts on solid door knockout Series resistor for WSO, IDCs (N.O. water flow and tamper on same circuit, wires after water flow and before tamper) 470 Ω, 1 W, encapsulated, two 18 AWG leads (0.82 mm 2 ), 2 ½ L x 1 ⅜ W x 1 H (64 mm x 35 mm x 25 mm) * Standard power supply NACs can provide synchronized strobe or SmartSync, two-wire operation. Continued on next page 4 S /2013

45 MINIPLEX Transponder Product Selection (Continued) Audio Riser Modules Model Description Size Supv. Alarm Dual Channel Analog Audio Riser Module; accepts one or two separate audio signals from host control panel; mounts in Block B, is controlled by Transponder Interface Module 3-8 Channel Digital Audio Riser Module; similar to analog module, except receives and decodes a digital input signal with up to eight audio channels; with Non-Alarm Audio input Analog Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment, Constant Supervision Compatible* Model Description Details VRMS output Flex-35, 35 W Amplifier, constant Includes three on-board VRMS output supervision compatible Class B audio NACs; NAC rating = 0.5 A VRMS output Flex-50, 50 W Amplifier, constant power is supplied from supervision compatible an EPS+, EPS, or XPS VRMS output NAC rating = A 100 W Analog Amplifiers with Power Supply, Constant Supervision Compatible Model/Output Voltage Power Supply Input/Listing Description Details 25 VRMS 70.7 VRMS VAC, 60 Hz UL Primary 100 W Amplifier 1 Block 0 ma 15 ma 1 Block 70 ma 70 ma NAC rating = 1.4 A 35 W, or 100 speakers NAC rating = 2 A 50 W, or 100 speakers Includes six, Class B audio NACs; NAC rating = 50 W or 100 speakers maximum; 2 25 VRMS; VRMS VAC, 60 Hz ULC /230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz UL VAC, 60 Hz UL Backup Uses the six Class B NACs of primary VAC, 60 Hz ULC 100 W amplifier /230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz UL Amplifier Digital Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment* Model Description Details VRMS output Flex-35, 35 W Amplifier, constant Includes three on-board VRMS output supervision compatible Class B audio NACs; NAC rating = 0.5 A VRMS output Flex-50, 50 W Amplifier, constant power is supplied from supervision compatible an EPS+, EPS, or XPS VRMS output NAC rating = A 100 W Digital Amplifiers with Power Supply, Constant Supervision Compatible Model/Output Voltage 25 VRMS 70.7 VRMS Power Supply Input/Listing Description Details VAC, 60 Hz UL Primary 100 W Amplifier ULC models have low battery dropout circuit NAC rating = 1.4 A 35 W, or 100 speakers NAC rating = 2 A 50 W, or 100 speakers Includes six, Class B audio NACs; NAC rating = 50 W or 100 speakers maximum; 2 25 VRMS; VRMS VAC, 60 Hz ULC /230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz UL VAC, 60 Hz 120 VAC, 60 Hz 220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz UL ULC UL Backup 100 W Amplifier Options for use with either Analog or Digital Amplifiers Model Description Details and Mounting Reference Flex-35/50 Expansion NAC Module; adds three Class B audio NACs Flex-35/50 Class A Adapter Module; converts three on-board NACS to Class A operation 100 W Amplifier Expansion NAC Module; NAC ratings = 1.5 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers max. 100 W Class A Adapter Module; NAC ratings = 2 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers max. 25 VRMS Output; NAC rating = 2 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers max VRMS Output; NAC rating = A, 50 W, or 100 speakers max. Choose one per amplifier Choose one per amplifier Constant Supervision Adapter for three NACs; select per amplifier output; not compatible with amplifier NAC expansion modules; deactivated when on batteries Uses the six Class B NACs of primary amplifier ULC models have low battery dropout circuit Mounts on Flex-35/50 assembly; NAC ratings = 1.5 A, 35/50 W, or 100 speakers maximum; Supv = 8 ma, Alarm = 60 ma Mounts on Flex-35/50 assembly; NAC ratings = 2 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum; Supv =10 ma, Alarm = 30 ma Provides six additional Class B audio NACs, mounts on 100 W amplifier assembly; Supv = 17 ma, Alarm = 60 ma Converts six on-board NACs to Class A operation, mounts on 100 W amplifier assembly; Supv = 1 ma, Alarm = 60 ma Supv = 10 ma on batteries; Alarm = 35 ma Supv = 38 ma on batteries; Alarm = 70 ma Converts three Class B audio NACS to Class A or Class B Constant Supervision NACs; mounts on Flex-35/50 or 100 W amplifier assembly; use two for the six NACs on 100 W amplifiers Firefighters Telephone Options* Model Description Size Supv. In Use Expansion Telephone Control Module with three Class B telephone NACS; required when telephone circuits are mounted in transponder; 1 Block 80 ma 130 ma Telephone Class A Adapter Module; mounts on ; no additional current required * Refer to document S for additional audio information. Continued on next page 5 S /2013

46 MINIPLEX Transponder Product Selection (Continued) Audio Expansion Signal Module and Options Model Description Details and Mounting Reference Expansion Signal Module; three, 1.5 A Class B NACs for Audio applications; up to five maximum per amplifier; NAC rating = 1.5 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum Expansion Signal Module NAC Expander; NAC rating = A, 50 W, or 100 speakers max. Expansion Signal Module Class A Adapter; NAC rating = A, 50 W, or 100 speakers maximum Expansion Signal Module Constant Supervision Adapter; Converts 3 Class B NACs to Constant Supervision Class B or Class A NACs; for 25 or 70.7 VRMS audio General Audio Options Model Description Converts one NAC input to three NAC outputs; selects between two inputs; for Flex-35/50 amplifiers only, two input NACs are required; Single Block module mounts in expansion bay; Supv = 20 ma; Alarm = 80 ma Expands module capacity to six, Class B NACs; Supv = 0.84 ma; Alarm = 60 ma Converts 3 Class B, NACs to Class A; Supv = 0 ma; Alarm = 30 ma NAC rating = 1.4 A, 50 W, or 100 speakers max.; Supv = 38 ma on batteries (constant supervision deactivated); Alarm = 70 ma These modules mount on the ; select one max. per as required End-of-line resistor harness for 70.7 VRMS NACs; 10 k, 1 W Audio Bay-to-Bay Interconnection Harness Kit; order one for each audio bay addition Audio Box Interconnection Harness Kit; order one for each close-nippled audio cabinet Addressable Interface Modules Model Description Supv. Alarm IDNet 1+ Module, 250 point capacity with isolated output, 1 block With 250 IDNet devices, and 20 device LEDs in alarm 292 ma 510 ma Module without devices 92 ma 115 ma Loading per IDNet device (no LEDs on) 0.8 ma 1 ma Quad IDNet Isolator Module; converts a single connected SLC into four isolated outputs selectable as Class A or Class B, provides advanced diagnostics for use with retrofit wiring; dual horizontal block module; (see data sheet S for additional details) NOTE: This module is compatible with IDNet Remote Isolators 75 ma 115 ma Relay Modules; Nonpower-Limited Model Description Resistive Ratings Inductive Ratings Size Supv. Alarm DPDT w/feedback 10 A 250 VAC 10 A 250 VAC 2 Slots 15 ma 175 ma DPDT w/feedback 2 A 30 VDC/VAC ½ A 30 VDC/120 VAC 1 Block 15 ma 60 ma SPDT 3 A 30 VDC/120 VAC 1 ½ A 30 VDC/120 VAC 1 Block 15 ma 190 ma Current Calculation Notes: 1. For total supervisory current, add panel module currents to base system value and add all external panel-powered loads. 2. For total alarm current, add panel module currents to base system alarm current and add all panel SLC/NAC loads and all external loads powered from panel power supplies. General Specifications Input Power Power Supply Output Ratings for EPS/EPS+ Power Supply Output Ratings for XPS (nominal 28 VDC on AC; 24 VDC on battery backup) 120 VAC Models 4.6 A 102 to 132 VAC, 50/60 Hz Enhanced Power Supplies, EPS/EPS+ 2.3 A 204 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz; VAC Models separate taps for 220/230/240 VAC 120 VAC Models 4 A 102 to 132 VAC, 60 Hz Expansion Power Supply (XPS) 100 W Amplifiers 2 A 204 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz; VAC Models separate taps for 220/230/240 VAC Total Power Supply Including module currents and auxiliary power outputs; 9 A Output Rating total for Special Application appliances IDNAC Output Voltage Regulated 29 VRMS Auxiliary Power Tap 2 A maximum Total Power Supply Output Rating Auxiliary Power Tap 2 A maximum NACs Programmed for Auxiliary Power Compatible Special Application Appliances Battery Charger Ratings for EPS/EPS+ (sealed lead-acid batteries) Battery capacity range Charger characteristics and performance 9 A total including module currents and auxiliary power outputs Output switches to battery backup during mains AC failure or brownout conditions 2 A maximum per NAC; Rated 19.1 to 31.1 VDC 5 A maximum total Simplex TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert addressable notification appliances; contact your Simplex product representative for compatible appliances UL listed for battery charging of 6.2 Ah up to 115 Ah (batteries larger than 50 Ah require a remote battery cabinet); ULC listed for charging up to 50 Ah batteries Temperature compensated, dual rate, recharges depleted batteries within 48 hours per UL Standard 864, to 70% capacity in 12 hours per ULC Standard S527 Operating Temp. Range 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) Environmental Operating Humidity Range Up to 93% RH, 90 F (32 C) maximum Installation Instruction Reference , Transponder Interface Cards , Local Mode Controller 6 S /2013

47 Local Mode Controller Detail Matching box is supplied with surface mount models (red) and (beige); for semi-flush models (red) and (beige), use a 1-1/2" (38 mm) minimum depth, 3-gang box Box dimensions, 6-1/2" (165 mm) 1" (25.4 mm) into box Fire Alarm Local Mode Controller CONTROL ENABLE Local Mode Control Alarm Silence Reset Alarm Alarm Silenced Local Mode Active Power On 4-1/2" (114 mm) 4-5/8" (117 mm) See Operating Instruction Local Mode Controller dimensions, 6-3/8" (162 mm) 1-3/4" (44 mm) Local Mode Controller to Transponder Wiring: 1. Wire close-nippled to transponder, maximum distance = 20 ft (6.1 m). 2. Nine wires required: 24 VDC (2), one per LED indicator (4), and one per switch (3). 3. Wire size, 18 AWG (0.82 mm² ). Expansion Bay Module Loading Reference Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Block A Block C Block E Block G Size Definitions: 1 Block = 4 W x 5.65 H (102 mm x 144 mm); (often called 4 x 5 modules) 1 Slot = 2 W x 11.3 H (51 mm x 287 mm), typically a motherboard with daughter card Block B Block D Block F Block H Expansion Bay Chassis 7 S /2013

48 ALARMS Fire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm Fire Alarm Ack Event Time Enable Disable Emergency Operating Instructions On Arm Off Disarm Priority 2 Ack On Of f Aut o On Of f Aut o On Of f Aut o On Of f Aut o Auto SYSTEM WARNINGS S upervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced Supv Ack More Info Lamp Test Trouble Ack Alarm or Warning Condition System indicator flashing. Tone On. H ow to Ac knowledge / Vie w Ev ents Press AC K located under flashing indicator. Repeat operation until all events are acknowledged. Local tone will silence. On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto On Off Auto Menu Alarm Sil ence Pr e vio us Ne xt A B C D E F G H I ZONE SIG AUX J K L M N O P Q R FB IO IDNet AC Power S T U V W X Y Z / P A L 'SP' ( ), 0 : System NET ADDR Reset 0 DEL En ter C/Exit How to Silence Building Signals Press Al arm Sil ence. How to Reset System Press System Reset. Press Ack to silence tone device. CAUTION DISCONNECT A.C. PO WER AND BATTERY BEFORE SERVICING CAUTION DISCONNECT A.C. POWER AND BATTERY BEFORE SERVICING Fire Control Panels UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Cabinet Reference; Boxes, Doors, Dress Panels, Rack Mounting, and Accessories Features 4100ES Box and door options: Boxes are available sized for one, two, or three equipment bays, each with a battery bay located at the bottom Colors include platinum or red Doors are glass front with modular dress panels, or solid Models are available with box and door combined for single package shipping, or packaged separately Enclosures are NEMA 1 rated Refer to individual 4100ES data sheets for product application listings (see list on page 2) Door and dress panel selection is coordinated with cabinet function: Glass doors with modular dress panels provide visibility of annunciation and interface modules for Control Panels, Network Display Units (NDU), and Remote Annunciators Solid doors are for MINIPLEX Transponders and utility function cabinets where module visibility is not required 4100ES Enclosure details: Latching dress panels easily lift off for internal access Smooth box surfaces are provided for locally cutting conduit entrance holes exactly where required Alignment markers are provided at the top and bottom of each box side for 6 (152 mm) or 4 (102 mm) wall studs Knockout screw/nail holes are supplied for semi-flush mounting Upright cabinet rack packaging reference: For use with Bud Industries Inc. special cabinet rack model number Refer to page 2 for cabinet rack listing 4100ES One Bay Cabinets 4100ES Two Bay Cabinets 4100ES Three Bay Cabinets * For 4100ES one, two, and three bay cabinets with associated equipment: Products are listed by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :251 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. Cabinet Rack Enclosure (shown with door open) S /2013

49 Enclosure Installation Reference Front view, box outline without door Side view with door attached 3 Bay height = 56" (1422 mm) Door thickness 4-3/4"(121 mm) Knockout screw/nail holes (for semi-flush mounting) 2 Bay height = 40" (1016 mm) Exposed cabinet for semi-flush mounting 1-3/8" (35 mm) minimum Wall board reference for semi-flush mounting, 6" stud 1 Bay height = 22" (559 mm) Doors can be hinged left or right Exposed door and cabinet for semi-flush mounting 6-1/8" (156 mm) minimum Optional semi-flush trim kit reference Stud alignment markers, each side 6" stud 4" stud 24" (610 mm) 11-11/16" (296 mm) 6-29/32" (175 mm) NOTE: A system ground must be provided for Earth Detection and transient protection devices. This connection shall be made to an approved, dedicated Earth connection per NFPA 70, Article 250, and NFPA 780. TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. VESDA is a trademark of Xtralis Pty Ltd. Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

50 Enclosure Selection Chart (refer to pages 3 and 4 for dimensions) Combined Box and Door Selection (select if box and door are to be shipped together) Description Platinum 1 Bay Platinum 2 Bay Platinum 3 Bay Red 1 Bay Red 2 Bay Red 3 Bay Box with Glass Door and Dress Panel Box with Solid Door Separate Box and Door Selection (select if boxes and doors are required to be shipped separately) Description Platinum 1 Bay Platinum 2 Bay Platinum 3 Bay Red 1 Bay Red 2 Bay Red 3 Bay Box Glass Door and Dress Panel Solid Door Cabinet Rack Mounting (refer to page 4 for additional details) Model Description #45964 Listings #45964, from Bud Industries Inc. Special upright cabinet rack for 4100ES; 19 (483 mm) E.I.A.; gray texture; includes front polycarbonate door and rear louvered door, both keyed with Simplex B keys UL and ULC listed only as of document revision date; cabinets are listed with the Simplex 4100ES product line Master Controller Rack Mount Kit, one required per master controller Master Controller and Option Bays each require 9 Rack Units; Option Bay Rack Mounting Kit, one required per expansion bay height (400 mm) Power Distribution Module (PDM) Rack Mount Kit, order PDM separately per system voltage, one required per cabinet rack Power Distribution Modules Model Voltage Description VAC Power Distribution Module (PDM); select per system voltage; /230/240 VAC one required per 4100ES box or cabinet rack Miscellaneous Accessories Model Description Canadian French Appliqué Kit, for 1, 2, or 3 bay sizes ES Appliqué Retrofit Kit, for 1, 2, or 3 bay sizes; use to identify 4100ES features when new door is not used; included with Master Controller Upgrade kits as detailed on data sheet S NOTE: One kit is supplied for each cabinet; order this Termination and Address Label Kit, for module marking if required for additional field module installation Green LED Power-on Indicator Kit, required for ULC listing of MINIPLEX transponder Mounts using knockout provided in solid door Platinum semi-flush box trim (37 mm) wide, four corners and trim pieces for Red semi-flush box trim top, bottom, and sides Battery Reference Model Capacity Model Capacity Battery Notes Ah Ah 1. Sealed lead-acid batteries, 12 VDC each; two required per Ah Ah Ah Ah Ah Battery Accessories Model Description Battery Shelf, required for 50 Ah batteries battery location. 2. Battery selection is required if batteries are internal. 3. Select one size per battery set 4. Refer to data sheet S for battery details. Battery Distribution Terminal Block, mounts to side of box, required for all close-nippled cabinets unless cabinet receives all power from power supplies and batteries located in the adjacent cabinet Additional Data Sheet Reference Subject Data Sheet Subject Data Sheet 4100ES Panels with EPS Power Supplies S Network Display Unit (NDU) with EPS 4100ES Basic Panel Modules and Accessories S Power Supplies S MINIPLEX Transponders with EPS Power Supplies S Network Display Unit (NDU) S MINIPLEX Transponders S Remote Annunciators S LED/Switch Modules S InfoAlarm Command Center S ES Audio/Phone Modules S Remote Battery Charger S S /2013

51 Wall Mounted Enclosure Installation Reference Front view, box outline without door Side view with door attached NOTE: A system ground must be provided for Earth Detection and transient protection devices. This connection shall be made to an approved, dedicated Earth connection per NFPA 70, Article 250, and NFPA Bay height = 56" (1422 mm) Door thickness 4-3/4"(121 mm) Knockout screw/nail holes (for semi-flush mounting) For additional installation information refer to Installation Instructions Bay height = 40" (1016 mm) Exposed cabinet for semi-flush mounting 1-3/8" (35 mm) minimum Wall board reference for semi-flush mounting, 6" stud 1 Bay height = 22" (559 mm) Doors can be hinged left or right Exposed door and cabinet for semi-flush mounting 6-1/8" (156 mm) minimum Optional semi-flush trim kit reference Stud alignment markers, each side 6" stud 4" stud 24" (610 mm) 6-29/32" (175 mm) 11-11/16" (296 mm) 3 S /2013

52 Console Package Reference Cabinet Rack Specifications Type Supplier Front View Side View Rear View Model Number Outside Dimensions Color Panel Space Width Front Door Rear Door Sides Bottom Levelers Height Width Depth Upright cabinet rack for exclusive use with Simplex 4100ES Fire Alarm Products Order from Bud Industries Inc. ( 69-7/8 (1775 mm) 24-1/16 (611 mm) 22 (559 mm) Gray texture Installation Instructions E.I.A. (483 mm) Surface mount with 1/8 thick (3.18 mm) smoke gray polycarbonate, locked with Simplex B key, hinged on left of cabinet Ventilated top and bottom, locked with Simplex B key Side panels are removable from the inside for rack-to-rack mounting Pan attached for battery mounting Includes 4 stem levelers on bottom TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

53 Sealed Rechargeable MH20845 BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED NONSPILLABLE PS Volt 55.0 AH Features Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) technology for superior performance Valve regulated, spill proof construction allows safe operation in any position Power/volume ratio yielding unrivaled energy density Rugged impact resistant ABS case and cover (UL94-HB) Integrated ABS carrying handles for ease of movement Approved for transport by air. D.O.T., I.A.T.A., F.A.A. and C.A.B. certifi ed U.L. recognized under fi le number MH Terminals (mm) Performance Specifications U: Universal terminals: Heavy-duty posts with nut & bolt fasteners Battery MODEL PS U 12 Volt 55.0 Amp. Hr. L Pb W 10 HT 8.5 Positive Terminal 17.4 Physical Dimensions: in (mm) Negative Terminal L: 9.04 (230) W: 5.45 (138) H: 8.15 (207) HT: 8.98 (228) Tolerances are +/ in. (+/- 1mm) and +/ in. (+/- 2mm) for height dimensions. All data subject to change without notice H 22 Nominal Voltage volts (6 cells) Nominal Capacity 20-hr. (2.75A to volts) AH 10-hr. (5.1A to volts) AH 5-hr. (8.8A to volts) AH 1-hr. (30.6A to 9.00 volts) AH 15-min. (96A to 9.00 volts) AH Approximate Weight lbs. (16.33 kg) Energy Density (20-hr. rate) W-h/in3 ( W-h/l) Specific Energy (20-hr. rate) W-h/lb (38.91 W-h/kg) Internal Resistance (approx.)... 7 milliohms Max Discharge Current (7 Min.) amperes Max Short-Duration Discharge Current (10 Sec.) amperes Shelf Life (% of nominal capacity at 68 F (20 C)) 1 Month... 97% 3 Months... 91% 6 Months... 83% Operating Temperature Range Charge F (-20 C) to 122 F (50 C) Discharge F (-40 C) to 140 F (60 C) Case... ABS Plastic Power-Sonic Chargers...PSC A-C To ensure safe and efficient operation always refer to the latest edition of our Technical Manual, as published on our website. All data subject to change without notice.

54 PS Volt 55.0 AH MODEL FINAL VOLTAGE Constant Power Discharge Ratings WATTS PER 25 C 5 MIN 10 MIN 15 MIN 20 MIN 30 MIN 45 MIN 60 MIN PS Discharge Time min h Discharge Time vs. Discharge Current Final Voltage 10.5V 10.2V 9.6V 9.0V 8.1V 40 o C (104 o F) 20 o C (68 o F) 0 o C (32 o F) Terminal Voltage (V) Discharge Characteristics Ambient Temperature 20 o C (68 o F) Final 55 Voltage min h Discharge Time Discharge Current (A) Shelf Life & Storage Charging Cycle Applications: Limit initial current to 16.5A. Charge until battery voltage (under charge) reaches 14.4 to 14.7 volts at 68 F (20 C). Hold at 14.4 to 14.7 volts until current drops to under 550mA. Battery is fully charged under these conditions, and charger should be disconnected or switched to float voltage. Float or Stand-By Service: Hold battery across constant voltage source of 13.5 to 13.8 volts continuously. When held at this voltage, the battery will seek its own current level and maintain itself in a fully charged condition. Capacity Retention Ratio (%) o C (104 o F) 30 o C (86 o F) 20 o C (68 o F) 5 o C (41 o F) Charging is not necessary unless 100% of capacity is required. Charging before use is necessary to help recover full capacity. Charge may fail to restore full capacity. Do not let batteries reach this state. Note: Due to the self-discharge characteristics of this type of battery, it is imperative that they be charged within 6 months of storage, otherwise permanent loss of capacity might occur as a result of sulfation. Standing Period (Months) Chargers Power-Sonic offers a wide range of chargers suitable for batteries up to 100AH. Please refer to the Charger Selection Guide in our specification sheets for C-Series Switch Mode Chargers and Transformer Type A and F Series. Please contact our Technical department for advice if you have difficulty in locating suitable models. Further Information Please refer to our website for a complete range of useful downloads, such as product catalogs, material safety data sheets (MSDS), ISO certification, etc.. Contact Information DOMESTIC SALES Tel: Fax: national-sales@power-sonic.com CUSTOMER SERVICE Tel: Fax: customer-service@power-sonic.com TECHNICAL SUPPORT Tel: Fax: support@power-sonic.com INTERNATIONAL SALES Tel: Fax: battery@power-sonic.com CORPORATE OFFICE 7550 Panasonic Way San Diego, CA USA Tel: Fax: M

55 Fire Alarm Control Panel Accessories Listings* System Batteries, Sealed Lead-Acid; with Applications Reference for Battery Cabinets, and Battery Cabinets with Charger Features Rechargeable, sealed lead-acid batteries: Lead-calcium grid structure with immobilized electrolyte in absorbent separator Low maintenance with no need to add water Low self-discharge characteristics One-piece, high impact polystyrene cell cover with high reliability dual seal construction UL 924 recognized pressure relief valves Available in a variety of capacities: Batteries for internal mounting range from 6.2 Ah up to 50 Ah, depending on control panel cabinet size Larger batteries, up to 110 Ah, mount in external battery cabinets with models available with internal chargers Battery cabinets with chargers: Battery cabinets with charger communicate with their connected fire alarm control panel and are available for 4100ES/4010ES/4100U Series and 4010 Series panels Description Simplex rechargeable sealed-lead acid batteries provide reliable and repeatable discharge and recharge characteristics for use in fire alarm and other systems applications. They are designed with immobilized electrolyte in an absorbent separator, allowing them to provide rated capacity on the first cycle. Because of their sealed construction, packaging is allowed within the system electronics enclosure (see illustration on page 2). When this is applicable, the quantity of system cabinets and the battery wiring distances are both minimized. Where required, external battery cabinets can be close-nippled to the control panel to house larger batteries with battery chargers available in some battery cabinet sizes. Battery Details Charging. These batteries are intended to be used with compatible Simplex battery chargers. Series Connections. These batteries are required to be connected in series to produce 24 V system voltage. Battery sets must be of identical voltage, model number, appearance, and approximately the same date of manufacture for proper operation. Testing. Battery capacity testing is recommended to be performed by using a sealed lead-acid battery tester designed to withdraw a minimum of battery charge. The preferred tester applies a variety of amplitude and duration controlled test pulses that compares terminal voltage against those predicted for the specific battery size. (Testing is available through your local Simplex product supplier.) Compatible Sealed Lead-Acid Batteries can be Installed Inside Fire Alarm Control Panel Cabinets Remote Battery Cabinets are Available for Larger Battery Requirements Battery Details (Continued) Shipping. Sealed lead-acid batteries are shipped via ground or sea transportation only. They are not shipped via air. Disposal. Battery chemicals and materials can be recycled. Refer to information shipped with the battery or on its case. Return to the battery manufacturer or to a similarly qualified battery processing facility for proper disposal. * Refer to details on page 4 and to the referenced individual product data sheets for agency listing status of battery cabinets and chargers. The batteries detailed in this document meet the requirements of UL, ULC, and Factory Mutual for use with respective equipment battery chargers as listed on page 3. Contact your local Simplex product supplier for proper battery selection per system requirements. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. S /2012

56 Battery Construction Reference Actual appearance will vary with battery size. Sealed outer cover Quick connect or post type terminal (type varies with battery size) Vent hole Potting material, black for negative, red for positive (polarity is also clearly marked with + and -) Inner cover Pressure relief valve Absorbent separator used to immobilize electrolyte Lead-calcium grids Cell group Semi-permeable membrane separator Cell case (high impact polystyrene) Battery Size Specifications Battery Model 20 Hour Discharge Rate Width* Depth* Height with Terminals Approximate Weight* Ah 6-1/8 (156 mm) 2-5/8 (67 mm) 4 (102 mm) 5.75 lbs (2.6 kg) Ah 6 (153 mm) 4-1/16 (103 mm) 4 (102 mm) 9.2 lbs (4.2 kg) Ah 6 (153 mm) 4 (102 mm) 4 (102 mm) 9 lbs (4.1 kg) Ah 7-1/4 (184 mm) 3-3/8 (86 mm) 6-5/8 (168 mm) 14.3 lbs (6.5 kg) Ah 6-5/8 (168 mm) 5 (127 mm) 7 (178 mm) 19.4 lbs (8.8 kg) (rectangular case, 33 Ah 12-1/2 (318 mm) 3-3/8 (86 mm) 7-1/16 (179 mm) 26.6 lbs (12.1 kg) typically for service) ( square case, 33 Ah 7-3/4 (197 mm) 5-1/4 (133 mm) 6-3/4 (171 mm) 26.5 lbs (12 kg) use for new) Ah 9 (229 mm) 5-1/2 (140 mm) 8-7/8 (225 mm) 41.8 lbs (19 kg) Ah 11-3/16 (284 mm) 10-1/2 (267 mm) 9 (230 mm) 82 Lbs (37 kg) * Dimensions and weight are per battery and are for reference only. Exact size may vary. Refer to the tables on page 3 for mounting compatibility. These batteries are 12 V each and series connected for 24 V system use. NOTE: When wired in series for 24 V output, these batteries are to be of identical voltage, appearance, model number, and approximately the same date of manufacture. General Battery Specifications Nominal Voltage Rating 12 Volts per battery Discharge Rating 20 Hour Rate Typical Charge/Discharge Cycles 100 to 150 Preferred Charge Temperature Range 60 F to 90 F (15.6 C to 32.2 C) 2 S /2012

57 Battery Compatibility for Fire Alarm Control Panel Mounting NOTE: Refer to individual fire alarm control panel product data sheets for additional battery application information Battery Model Capacity Ah Ah 4003EC 4004R 4005 Simplex Control Panel Model Series (see legend and notes below) 4006 & (all models) Ah Ah Ext Note 3 Ext Ext Note 2 Battery Cabinets without Chargers (connects to charger in panel) ES 4100ES/ 4100U 4100 & 4120 (2, 4 or 6-Unit) 4020 (2, 4 or 6-Unit) Ah Ext Note 3 Ext Ext NA Ext rectangular 33 Ah Ext Note 3 Ext NA NA Note 3 Ext Note square 33 Ah Ext Note 3 Ext NA NA Note 3 Ext Ah NA Note 3 NA NA NA Note 3 Note 6 2 or 3 bay Ext Ext Ah Requires external battery cabinet, compatible with 4100ES, 4010ES, 4100, and 4120 Series only = Can be placed in the respective equipment cabinet Ext = External battery cabinet is required, refer to selection chart on page 4 NA = Not applicable/not compatible NOTES: 1. These batteries meet the requirements of UL, ULC, and Factory Mutual for use with respective equipment battery chargers listed above. Contact your local Simplex product supplier for proper battery selection per system requirements Cabinets will accommodate , 18 Ah batteries, but will not allow bottom entry conduit. 3. Use 4081 series companion cabinet and charger, refer to page Cabinets will accommodate , 33 Ah batteries, but will not allow bottom entry conduit. 5. Some control panel models are listed for battery replacement reference only. 6. For 2 bay international applications only, 50 Ah batteries will fit in the cabinet. External Battery Cabinet Compatibility Reference Battery Cabinet Panel Compatibility Ah* Ah Rectangular 33 Ah Square 33 Ah Ah Ah ES, 4010ES, 4100U, and NA NA NA NA NA multiple NA multiple ** NA NA NA NA multiple NA NA NA NA Battery Cabinets with Chargers Cabinet Panel Compatibility Ah* Ah Rectangular 33 Ah Square 33 Ah Ah Ah R and 4010 NA ES, 4010ES, and 4100U NA NA NA NA * Batteries smaller than those listed are normally mounted in the product cabinet ** 25 Ah capacity was effective as of 7/2005. = Can be placed in the respective equipment cabinet NA = Not applicable/not compatible 3 S /2012

58 External Battery Cabinet Specification Reference Battery Cabinets Without Chargers; Shallow Design with Front Door Model Color Listings Description Dimensions Beige Red UL and FM Beige Multiple * Beige UL and FM Beige UL 2-Unit, 4100 style cabinet without charger; with locking solid door and battery shelf, primarily for use with 50 Ah batteries Intended for use with 4003EC systems, for up to 33 Ah batteries (refer to 4003EC data sheet S ) For up to 25 Ah batteries* For up to 33 Ah batteries * Depth increased for 25 Ah batteries effective 7/2005. External battery cabinet without charger, with locking solid door and battery harness; for close-nippled mounting to fire alarm control panel cabinet 25-3/4 W x 20-3/4 H x 6-3/4 D (654 mm x 527 mm x 171 mm) 9-1/2 H x 24 W x 9 D (241 mm x 610 mm x 229 mm) 16-1/4 W x 13-1/2 H x 5-3/4 D (413 mm x 343 mm x 146 mm)* 25-3/4 W x 20-3/4 H x 4-1/8 D (654 mm x 527 mm x 105 mm) Chargers for use with 4010 Fire Alarm Control Panels and 4004R Suppression Release Systems (refer to data sheet S ) Model Color Input Voltage Description Dimensions Beige Red 120 VAC Battery cabinet with charger for the 4010 and 4004R fire alarm control panel; for up to 50 Ah batteries; with front door Listings include: UL, ULC, FM, CSFM, and MEA (NYC), see data sheet for details 22-1/2 W x16-3/4 H x 8-3/8 D (572 mm x 425 mm x 213 mm) Battery Cabinet Without Charger for 110 Ah Batteries; for use with compatible panel mounted chargers (refer to data sheet S ) Model & Listings Listings include: UL and CSFM Color Red Cabinet Description Battery cabinet for , 110 Ah batteries; includes 80 A battery fuse, terminals and battery connection cables; see data sheet for details Compatible Chargers xxx Series xxx Series Charger Description 4010ES Main System Supply (MSS) 4100ES/4100U System Power Supplies (SPS) 4100ES/4100U Additional SPS 4100ES/4100U Remote Power Supply (RPS) 4100ES/4100U TrueAlert Addressable Power Supply (TPS) 4100 Legacy power supplies Dimensions 26-1/2 W x 12 H x 12 D (673 mm x 305 mm x 305 mm) 4100ES/4010ES/4100U Compatible Battery Cabinet With Charger for 110 Ah Batteries (for ULC listed systems and for other applications unable to use panel mounted power supply charger; refer to data sheet S ) Model Color Input Voltage Description Dimensions Red 120 VAC Red 220/230/240 VAC, multi-tapped Battery cabinet with charger for up to 110 Ah batteries; NOTE: Required for ULC listed charging of 110 Ah batteries; Listings include: UL, ULC, FM, CSFM, and MEA (NYC), see data sheet for details 27-7/8 W x 13-1/2 H x 14-5/8 D (708 mm x 343 mm x 371 mm) Green LED Power-on Indicator Kit, required for ULC listing, mounts above access panel using knockout provided TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

59 CAUTION DISCONNECT BATTERY AND A.C. POWER BEFORE SERVICING ATTE NTION DÉBRANCHER L'ALIMENTATION EN C.A. ET LA BATTERIE AVANT D'EFFECTUER L 'ENTRETIEN TrueAlert Addressable Notification UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved* Features 4009 IDNAC Repeaters provide enhanced power delivery to TrueAlert/TrueAlert ES addressable notification appliances controlled by IDNAC SLCs: Output voltage is maintained by efficient switching regulator at 29 VRMS during both AC and battery backup conditions allowing strobes to operate at lower current With lower current strobes and regulated output voltage, wiring distance can be extended 2 to 3 times that of conventional notification, appliance loading can be increased, or smaller wire gauge can be used, all resulting in installation savings with high assurance that appliances that operate during normal system testing will operate during worst case alarm conditions 4009 IDNAC Repeaters receives an IDNAC SLC input and provide a repeated 3 A SLC output to extend SLC distance and power: Appliance control remains with the host IDNAC control panel and Repeater operation is essentially transparent; Repeater status is communicated to the control panel for system diagnostics and also locally indicated Input SLC connection can be Class B or Class A Repeater output can be a Class A loop or a Class B output with internal connections for up to four (4) T-tapped output branches (Class A output requires Class A Adapter) Operation requires one IDNAC SLC address; Repeaters can be connected as one in series, or up to five (5) in parallel AC power input is 120 VAC or VAC, 50/60 Hz, auto-select An on-board battery charger is provided with low AC battery disconnect selectable per Repeater (required for ULC listed applications) Operation is compatible with TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert addressable notification appliances and accessories Available with platinum or red cabinet Listed to UL 864 and ULC S527 Multiple wiring options are available: Wiring options include Class B multiple branch (up to 4) output, Class A loop extension, and Class A riser to Class B branches or a Class A loop output When the Repeater is part of a Class A loop from the IDNAC SLC source panel, up to twice the distance for the loop is available; (Class A loop repeating requires Class A Adapter) Class A Adapter : Required when extending a Class A loop or to provide a Class A local loop SLC output Operation provides short circuit isolation between input and output terminals for improved IDNAC SLC survivability Repeated IDNAC SLC IDNAC SLC 4100ES with EPS Power Supply Extended distance and current 4009 IDNAC Repeater 4009 IDNAC Repeater Extends Distance and Current of IDNAC SLC Features (Continued) 4009 IDNAC Repeater; Power and Distance Extender Built-in battery Charger Power supply charges up to 12.7 Ah batteries for in cabinet mounting and up to 25 Ah batteries with model external battery cabinet Available auxiliary output: A 200 ma, 29 VDC constant auxiliary output is available; operation is maintained during battery backup * This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :0375 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. S /2013

60 Introduction Repeating IDNAC SLCs. 4100ES fire alarm control panels with an EPS or EPS+ (enhanced power supply) provide individual address and control of TrueAlert and TrueAlert ES addressable notification appliances using IDNAC SLCs. When an IDNAC SLC reaches the current limit or the distance limit of the source IDNAC SLC, use of 4009 IDNAC Repeaters extends the IDNAC SLC with an additional 3 A of SLC current. With IDNAC SLCs, a constant 29 VRMS source voltage is maintained, even during battery standby, allowing strobes to operate at higher voltage with lower current and ensuring a consistent current draw and voltage drop margin under both primary power and secondary battery standby. Efficiencies include wiring distances up to 2 to 3 times farther than with conventional notification, or support for more appliances per IDNAC SLC, or use of smaller gauge wiring, or combinations of these benefits, all providing installation and maintenance savings with high assurance that appliances that operate during normal system testing will operate during worst case alarm conditions. Description Three wiring configurations are available to provide a variety of system solutions: Class B branch extension, Class A loop extension, and Class A riser to Class B branch extension or Class A loop output. Description (Continued) Class B branch input wiring allows T-tapped connections to up to five (5) parallel connected 4009 IDNAC Repeaters. Each Repeater has on-board output terminal connections for up to four (4) output branch circuits, and additional branch circuits can be externally T-tapped as required. (Refer to diagram on page 3 for additional details.) Class A loop extensions use a single 4009 IDNAC Repeater to extend the current and distance of a single Class A loop allowing the loop distance to be doubled. The Repeater communicates and repeats bi-directionally allowing Class A loop operation to be maintained in the event of an open circuit. This wiring connection requires use of the Class A adapter. (Refer to diagram on page 4 for additional details.) Class A Riser to Class B Branches or Class A Loops. For applications requiring a combination of wiring types, a Class A riser can drive up to five (5) 4009 IDNAC Repeaters with each Repeater capable of driving either single or multiple Class B branch output(s) or a Class A loop output. In this wiring application, the Repeater does not repeat in the Class A riser loop, it is connected as an appliance with Class A in/out wiring. To create a Class A loop output, the Repeater must be equipped with a Class A Adapter. (Refer to diagram on page 5 for additional details.) Product Selection Model* Cabinet Color Description (BA) Platinum 4009 IDNAC Repeater with cabinet; provides a single 3 A IDNAC SLC output, 200 ma auxiliary (BA) Red power output, and battery charger; 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz input, auto-select * Add suffix BA to select 4009 IDNAC Repeaters assembled in the USA. Aftermarket Accessories (installed on-site, select per system requirements) Model Description Class A Adapter Module, mounts on repeater controller board; required for Class A output Platinum semi-flush box trim (37 mm) wide, four corners and trim pieces for top, bottom, and sides; (will Red semi-flush box trim need to be cut to fit 4009 IDNAC Repeater cabinet) External Accessories (select per system requirements) Model Description Comments Remote TrueAlert Communications Isolator Refer to data sheet S for details External Battery Cabinet for 25 Ah batteries 16 ¼ W x 13 ½ H x 5 ¾ D (413 mm x 343 mm x 146 mm); refer to data sheet S for details Battery Selection (select battery size per system requirements; two batteries are required for 24 VDC operation) Model Description Model Description Ah Battery, 12 VDC Ah Battery, 12 VDC Requires External Battery Cabinet Ah Battery, 12 VDC Ah Battery, 12 VDC Ah Battery, 12 VDC 2 S /2013

61 CAUTION DISCONNECT BATTERY AND A. C. POWER BEFORE SERVICING ATTENTION DÉBRANCHER L'ALIMENTATION EN C.A. ET LA BATTERIE AVANT D'EFFECTUER L 'ENTRETIEN CAUTION DISCONNECT BATTERY AND A. C. POWER BEFORE SERVICING ATTENTION DÉBRANCHER L'ALIMENTATION EN C.A. ET LA BATTERIE AVANT D'EFFECTUER L 'ENTRETIEN CAUTION DISCONNECT BATTERY AND A. C. POWER BEFORE SERVICING ATTENTION DÉBRANCHER L'ALIMENTATION EN C.A. ET LA BATTERIE AVANT D'EFFECTUER L 'ENTRETIEN CAUTION DISCONNECT BATTERY AND A. C. POWER BEFORE SERVICING ATTENTION DÉBRANCHER L'ALIMENTATION EN C.A. ET LA BATTERIE AVANT D'EFFECTUER L 'ENTRETIEN CAUTION DISCONNECT BATTERY AND A. C. POWER BEFORE SERVICING ATTENTION DÉBRANCHER L'ALIMENTATION EN C.A. ET LA BATTERIE AVANT D'EFFECTUER L 'ENTRETIEN Wiring Reference, Class B Input with Class B Branch Circuit Outputs IDNAC SLC input 4009 IDNAC Repeaters (5 maximum) Class B Branch Extensions IDNAC SLC output Class B IDNAC SLC Class B IDNAC SLC 4100ES with EPS Power Supply Class B wiring can be "T-tapped" Class B IDNAC SLC Wiring Notes: 1. Up to five (5) 4009 IDNAC Repeaters can be wired in parallel as shown on this diagram. 2. IDNAC SLC communications can be repeated only once between the source and the addressable appliance. Class B IDNAC SLC 3. The 4009 IDNAC Repeater extends distance and current of the input IDNAC SLC; it requires one address and consumes four (4) unit loads Class B IDNAC SLC Each 4009 IDNAC Repeater has duplicate output terminals rated for two wires each, allowing up to four (4) Class B branch circuit T-taps to be made in the cabinet; additional T-taps may be made in external wiring junction cabinets or boxes Class B IDNAC SLC Branch Circuits 3 S /2013

62 CAUTION DISCONNECT BATTERY AND A.C. POWER BEFORE SERVICING ATTENTION DÉBRANCHER L 'ALIM ENT ATION EN C.A. ET LA BATTERIE AVANT D'EFFECTUER L'ENTRETIEN Wiring Reference, Class A Loop Extension Class A IDNAC SLC Loop with 4009 IDNAC Repeater Extending Loop Range and Power 4009 IDNAC Repeater Requires optional Class A Adapter Module set for Loop mode Class A loop secondary direction Class A loop primary direction Class A loop secondary direction 4100ES with EPS Power Supply, requires optional Dual Class A IDNAC Isolator (DCAI) Notes: 1. Only one 4009 IDNAC Repeater can be wired in a Class A loop. (IDNAC SLC communications can be repeated only once between the source and the addressable appliance.) 2. The 4009 IDNAC Repeater extends distance and current of the Class A IDNAC SLC loop; it requires one address and consumes four (4) unit loads. 3. Under normal operating conditions (no open circuit wiring), appliances 1 through 4 are powered by the 4100ES EPS Power Supply and appliances 5 through 9 are powered from the 4009 IDNAC Repeater. 4. Under open circuit conditions, an open circuit in the panel side of the primary path will result in the 4100ES EPS Power Supply powering appliances 5 through 9 and the 4009 IDNAC Repeater will receive IDNAC SLC input from the return path and then power appliances 1 through 4, or as many as remain connected. 4 S /2013

63 CAUTION DISCONNECT BATTERY AND A.C. POWER BEFORE SERVICING ATTENTION DÉBRANCHER L'ALIMENTATION EN C.A. ET LA BATTERIE AVANT D'EFFECTUER L'ENTRETIEN CAUTION DISCONNECT BATTERY AND A.C. POWER BEFORE SERVICING ATTENTION DÉBRANCHER L'ALIMENTATION EN C.A. ET LA BATTERIE AVANT D'EFFECTUER L'ENTRETIEN Wiring Reference, Class A Riser Input with Class A Loop and Class B Branch Outputs 4100ES with EPS Power Supply, requires optional Dual Class A IDNAC Isolator (DCAI) Requires optional Class A Adapter Module set for Branch Mode to create a local Class A loop circuit output Class A Loop Extension IDNAC SLC input Class A Loop 4009 IDNAC Repeaters Class B Branch Extension IDNAC SLC shown as a Class A Riser with each IDNAC Repeater wired in/out (not T-tapped); only two (2) are shown, maximum is five (5) OUT IN + - Wiring detail reference (repeaters are wired same as appliances) 4009 IDNAC Repeater Mounting and Module Placement Reference 16-1/4" (413 mm) Cabinet depth 4-1/8" (105 mm) 10-29/32" (277 mm) Door, 5/8" (16 mm) thick Optional Class A Adapter Module Exposed cabinet dimension for semi-flush mount 1" (25.4 mm), 1-3/8" (35 mm) with semi-flush trim 13-1/2" (343 mm) Knockouts for screw or nail mounting holes 12" (305 mm) Battery location (dotted line) no conduit entry or wiring in this area, 12.7 Ah maximum Shaded Area is Non-power limited Optional Semi-Flush Trim Kit 1-3/16" wide (30 mm), 3/8" (9.5 mm) thick Wall surface reference for semi-flush mount 5 S /2013

64 4009 IDNAC Repeater Specifications Input Ratings AC Input Ratings 24 VDC Requirements for Battery Calculations Voltage Range 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, or 220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, +10%, -15%, auto-select 120 VAC Current 2.5 A 220/230/240 VAC Current 1.25 A Panel IDNAC Appliances Auxiliary Load Standby Currents 70 ma 0.8 ma each Alarm Currents 96 ma 4.5 A maximum with 3 A IDNAC SLC load and 200 ma Auxiliary output load (actual alarm current depends on connected and activated appliances and devices) Output current (voltage is from battery) 1.37 x output current (voltage converter is on when in Alarm) IDNAC Input Ratings 17 VRMS minimum 1 address, 4 unit loads Output Ratings IDNAC SLC Output 3 A 29 VRMS for Special Application appliances Simplex TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert addressable notification appliances; contact your Compatible Special Application Appliances Simplex product representative for compatible appliances Up to 62 total addressable appliances; one address is required for the Repeater Up to 75 total unit loads (appliances are 1 unit load, Repeater and Isolators are 4 unit IDNAC SLC Ratings and Loading loads) Up to 62 compatible strobes can be synchronized per IDNAC SLC Current 200 ma maximum Auxiliary Output 29 VDC nominal with AC present or when Repeater is on battery standby and in Alarm Voltage 24 VDC nominal when on battery standby and not in Alarm IDNAC SLC Wiring Specifications (refer to installation instructions for more information) Recommended wire type UTP, unshielded twisted pair Maximum wire length allowed with 10,000 ft (3048 m) T-Taps for class B wiring Maximum wire length to any appliance 4000 ft (1219 m) Maximum wiring resistance between 26 Ω appliances Wiring Connections Terminal blocks for 18 to 12 AWG Repeater Status Indicators Green AC Power LED On with AC present, off during brownout or no AC condition Red Communications LED (COMM) Blinks when Repeater is communicating with the host control panel 4 LEDs provide up to 16 different trouble status indications; an on-board trouble scroll Yellow System Status LEDs button allows review should multiple troubles occur Class A Adapter Module Option (required for Class A loop extension or for Class A output) 3 A 29 VRMS for Special Application appliances IDNAC SLC Output Voltage Two connections, Port A and Port B, function varies by application (loop extension or local loop), Port A and Port B are isolated from each other Status LEDs Two yellow trouble LED indicators, one per Port Environmental and Technical Publications Reference Operating Temperature 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) Operating Humidity Range Up to 93% RH at 90 F (32 C) Installation Instructions 4009 IDNAC Repeater Class A Adapter Module TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

65 System Accessories, LCD Annunciators UL, ULC Listed; FM, CSFM, and MEA (NYC) Approved* Features Remote LCD annunciator for use with Simplex model: 4100ES and 4100U fire alarm control panels Legacy products 4100, 4120, and 4020 fire alarm control panels, and 4100/4120 Universal Transponders Information display features: Maintained display of first alarm is available with 4100ES and with 4100U at software revision or higher Wide viewing angle, super-twist LCD technology with green LED backlighting Two lines of 40 characters each LED status indicators During battery backup, backlighting is disabled until there is switch activity Controls include: Switches for system acknowledge, alarm silence, and system reset Four programmable control switches Lamp/LCD test Wiring information: RUI (Remote Unit Interface) communications require a single twisted wire pair (see p. 3 for more information) Separate wiring is required for 24 VDC control panel power Flush mount on standard electrical boxes Options: , Surface mount box , Brushed stainless steel trim UL Listed to Standard 864 Description Remote Control and Annunciation is provided using an 80 character, back-lit, alphanumeric display. Information is presented in clear, descriptive English language and includes: Point Status (alarm, trouble, etc.); Alarm Type (smoke detector, manual station, etc.); Number of System Alarms, Supervisory Conditions, and Trouble Conditions; and a Custom Location Label. Wiring. A single twisted wire pair provides serial RUI communications that also supports other Simplex serial annunciators on the same wire pair. Multiple Indications. Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble conditions are also indicated by dedicated LEDs and a tone-alert audible sounder. Each condition has a dedicated acknowledge push-button switch that silences the tone-alert but leaves the LED on until all conditions in that category are restored to normal. Switch operation is either globally or individually acknowledgeable, determined by the control panel operation LCD Annunciator for 4100ES and 4100U Fire Alarm Control Panels LCD Annunciator Description (Continued) Repeated operation of the appropriate acknowledge switch will scroll the LCD display showing activity in the sequence of occurrence. The tone-alert also pulses to indicate the operation of any of the push-button switches. Consult local code requirements for guidance in determining applications and location of the LCD annunciator. Operation System Controls. Notification appliances can be deactivated by pressing the ALARM SILENCE switch. (Exact operation is determined by the host control panel such as visible appliances remaining on until system is reset.) Pressing the SYSTEM RESET switch restores the system to normal operation. When system activity is normal, the LCD displays the time, date, and SYSTEM IS NORMAL. Control Switches. Four programmable CONTROL switches and associated LEDs are included. Typical applications include manual evacuation, door holder release bypass, and elevator capture bypass. Keyswitch Enable. All switches on the annunciator are controlled by the ENABLE keyswitch with a key that is removable only in the disabled position. A brief lamp/lcd test is performed whenever the keyswitch is changed from enabled to disabled. Battery Backup Operation. During battery backup, the LED backlighting is disabled to conserve battery power. When an annunciator switch is activated, the backlighting is automatically enabled. After approximately 30 seconds of inactivity, the backlighting will again be disabled. * This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :0179 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. S /2012

66 Product Selection Model Description Remote LCD Annunciator with beige trim CF Remote LCD Annunciator with beige trim, with French keypad for Canada Brushed stainless steel trim option Matching surface mount box; ivory finish Refer to specifications on page 3 for additional details Overvoltage protector; required where annunciator communications and power wiring exits and enters a building; refer to data sheet S for details Operator Information FOUR PROGRAMMABLE (Yellow) LEDs, each with pushbutton switch and custom labeling pocket 2 X 40 LCD READOUT, green LED backlighted during normal conditions and abnormal operating conditions SIX STATUS INDICATOR LEDs provide system status indications in addition to LCD information; LEDs flash to indicate the condition and then when acknowledged, remain on steady until reset; Fire Alarm and Priority 2 Alarm are red; System Supervisory, System Trouble, and Alarm Silenced are yellow; Power On is green FIRE ALARM ALARM ACK PRIORITY 2 ALARM ALARM ACK SYSTEM SUPERVISORY SUPV ACK SYSTEM TROUBLE TBL ACK POWER ON ALARM SILENCED ALARM SILENCE DISPLAY TIME SYSTEM RESET DISPLAY TIME displays time of last occurrence of event list being displayed; or displays current time when viewing system status information ALARM ACK/FIRE ALARM acknowledges a Fire Alarm condition and silences the panel and all annunciator tone-alerts ALARM ACK/PRIORITY 2 acknowledges a Priority 2 Alarm condition and silences the panel and all annunciator tone-alerts SUPV ACK acknowledges System Supervisory conditions and silences the panel and all annunciator tone-alerts TROUBLE ACK acknowledges System Troubles and silences the panel and all annunciator tone-alerts CONTROL ENABLE KEYSWITCH controls all switch functions; key is removable only in disabled position SYSTEM RESET restores control panel to normal when all alarmed inputs are returned to normal ALARM SILENCE causes audible notification appliances to be silenced; used after evacuation is complete and while alarm source is being investigated 2 S /2012

67 LCD Annunciator Specifications For additional information, refer to Installation Instructions General Operating Specifications Voltage Normal Operating Current Battery Standby Current Alarm Current 18 to 32 VDC, system supplied 110 ma (with LED backlighting on) 65 ma (during battery backup, LED backlighting is turned off after 30 seconds without switch activity) 140 ma maximum (LED backlighting is on and tone-alert is sounding) Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) Operating Humidity Range Up to 93% RH, non-condensing at 100 F (38 C) Communications 4100ES/4100U Capacity, Per RUI Output Wiring Requirements RUI Data Power Wiring Earth Wiring Mounting Information Type Capacity RUI (Remote Unit Interface) external annunciator communications line SLC (signaling line circuit) Up to 31 remote annunciators/miniplex transponders per channel including the LCD Annunciator, the Status Command Unit (SCU), and Remote Command Unit (RCU); refer to data sheet S for additional 4100ES information Standard Wiring Type Unshielded twisted pair (UTP), 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ) for most applications, see below Wiring Characteristics Wiring Applications Requiring Shielded, Twisted Pair (STP) 0.58 µf (580 nf) maximum capacitance between conductors; 35 maximum total line resistance 1. Wiring that leaves the building. Also requires Isolated Loop Circuit Protectors on each end, refer to data sheet S for (200 ma), or S for (5 A) 2. Wiring run in 500 ft (152 m) or more of conduit. 3. Wiring closely bundled with standard IDNet communications or TrueAlert addressable communications (not required when run with IDNet+ communications). Class B T-Tap wiring Up to 10,000 ft (3048 m) total wiring; up to 2500 ft (762 m) to farthest device distance Class X wiring distance Up to 2500 ft (762 m) NOTE: General Conduit Entrance Requirement Trim Dimensions Standard Trim Finish , Optional Trim Boxes for Flush Mounting (supplied by others) , Surface Mount Box Option (ordered separately) Dimensions Finish 18 to 12 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 3.31 mm 2 ) wires for 24 VDC system power A dedicated earth ground connection to the electrical box is required for proper ESD and EMI protection; wire in accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) Article 250 Conduit entrance must be located a minimum of 2 ¾ (70 mm) from the front of the box to clear assembly 4 ½ H x W (114 mm x 300 mm) Steel, painted beige Brushed stainless steel (ordered separately); supplied with both slotted and tamper resistant screws 6-Gang, 3 ½ (89 mm) deep: RACO 965, 6-gang masonry box; RACO 590, gangable switch box, 6 required; or equal W x 4 ⅝ H x 2 ¾ D (304 mm x 117 mm x 70 mm) Painted steel, ivory finish 3 S /2012

68 FIRE PRIORITY 2 SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER ALARM DISPLAY ALARM ALARM SUPERVISORY TROUBLE ON SILENCED TIME ALARM ALARM SUPV TBL ALARM SYSTEM ACK ACK ACK ACK SILENCE RESET FIRE PRIORITY 2 SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER ALARM DISPLAY ALARM ALARM SUPERVISORY TROUBLE ON SILENCED TIME ALARM ALARM SUPV TBL ALARM SYSTEM ACK ACK ACK ACK SILENCE RESET Mounting Information Flush Mount Ganged Boxes: Requires 6-gang box, 3-1/2" (89 mm) min. depth, use (6) RACO # 590 or equal (supplied separately) Flush Mount Masonry Box: Use RACO # 965, 3-1/2" (89 mm) deep or equal (supplied separately) Note: Review box choice with assembly layout before selecting conduit entrance location to allow easy access to terminals Surface Mount Box: Simplex model /4 deep (70 mm) (ordered separately) LCD Annunciator Assembly Trim plate FIRE ALARM PRIORITY 2 SYSTEM ALARM SUPERVISORY SYSTEM TROUBLE POWER ON ALARM SILENCED DISPLAY TIME Terminal block access at rear of assembly, this side ALARM ACK ALARM ACK SUPV ACK TBL ACK ALARM SILENCE SYSTEM RESET Wiring Reference Wiring Notes: 1. Communications require a single 18 AWG twisted pair. 2. Power requires two, 18 to 12 AWG wires for 24 VDC system power, plus Earth Ground to each electrical box. 3. Refer to Installation Instructions for additional wiring specifications LCD Annunciators Fire Alarm Control Panel (4100ES shown) TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. National Electrical Code and NFPA are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

69 Multi-Application Peripherals UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Features Individually addressable manual fire alarm stations with: Power and data supplied via IDNet or MAPNET II addressable communications using a single wire pair Operation that complies with ADA requirements The NO GRIP Single Action Station and Retrofit Kit are available with a more easily operated pull lever for applications where anticipated users may find the standard station lever difficult to activate Pull lever that protrudes when alarmed Break-rod supplied (use is optional) Models are available with single or double action (breakglass or push) operation UL listed to Standard 38 Compatible with the following Simplex control panels: Model Series 4100ES, 4010ES, 4008, 4010, 4100U, 4020, 4100, and 4120 fire alarm control panels equipped with either IDNet or MAPNET II communications Model Series 2120 Communicating Device Transponders (CDTs) equipped with MAPNET II communications Compact construction: Electronics module enclosure minimizes dust infiltration Allows mounting in standard electrical boxes Screw terminals for wiring connections Tamper resistant reset key lock (keyed same as Simplex fire alarm cabinets) Multiple mounting options: Surface or semi-flush with standard boxes or matching Simplex boxes Flush mount adapter kit Adapters are available for retrofitting to commonly available existing boxes Description The Simplex addressable manual station combines the familiar Simplex manual station housing with a compact communication module that is easily installed to satisfy demanding applications. Its integral individual addressable module (IAM) constantly monitors status and communicates changes to the connected control panel via IDNet or MAPNET II communications wiring. * Refer to page 2 for specific model listings. This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :224 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. IDNet or MAPNET II Communicating Devices Addressable Manual Stations Single action FIRE ALARM NO GRIP Single action BREAK GLASS PUSH Breakglass Operation Push NO GRIP Retrofit kit FIRE KEY OPERATED ONLY ALARM With Institutional Cover kit Activation of the single action manual station requires a firm downward pull to activate the alarm switch. Completing the action breaks an internal plastic break-rod (visible below the pull lever, use is optional). The use of a break-rod can be a deterrent to vandalism without interfering with the minimum pull requirements needed for easy activation. The pull lever latches into the alarm position and remains extended out of the housing to provide a visible indication. Single Action NO GRIP Station For applications such as California Building Code, Title 24, which requires Controls and operating mechanisms shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching or twisting of the wrist the model station provides a more easily operated pull lever compared to standard stations. Retrofit of existing stations is available using the Retrofit kit. Double Action Stations (Breakglass) require the operator to strike the front mounted hammer to break the glass and expose the recessed pull lever. The pull lever then operates as a single action station. Double Action Stations (Push Type) require that a spring loaded interference plate (marked PUSH) be pushed back to access the pull lever of the single action station. Station reset requires the use of a key to reset the manual station lever and deactivate the alarm switch. (If the breakrod is used, it must be replaced.) Station testing is performed by physical activation of the pull lever. Electrical testing can be also performed by unlocking the station housing to activate the alarm switch. S /2012

70 Addressable Manual Station Product Selection Addressable Manual Stations, Red Housing with White Letters and White Pull Lever Model Description Housing Pull Lever Listings Single action, English FIRE ALARM PULL DOWN UL, ULC, FM, CSFM, MEA CB Single action, Bilingual English and French FEU FIRE TIREZ PULL CF Single action, French ALARME FEU ABAISSEZ ULC, FM Double action, Breakglass operation, English Double action, Push operation, English FIRE ALARM PULL DOWN UL, ULC, FM, CSFM, MEA Single action NO GRIP operation, English FIRE ALARM PULL DOWN UL, ULC, FM, CSFM Accessories Model Description Surface mount steel box, red Cast aluminum surface mount box, red Semi-flush trim plate for double gang switch box, red Surface trim plate for Wiremold box V5744-2, red Flush mount adapter kit, black Flush mount adapter kit, beige Refer to page 3 for dimensions Typically for retrofit, refer to page 4 Refer to page 4 for details Replacement breakglass Replacement break-rod Institutional cover kit for field installation on Retrofit Kit for field conversion of a single action station to a NO GRIP station; refer to Installation Instructions for details Specifications (refer to Installation Instructions for additional information) Power and Communications IDNet or MAPNET II communications, 1 address per station Address Means DIP switch, 8 position Wire Connections Screw terminal for in/out wiring, for 18 to 14 AWG wire UL Listed Temperature Range 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) intended for indoor operation Humidity Range Up to 93% RH at 100 F (38 F) Housing Color Red with white raised lettering Material Housing and pull lever are Lexan polycarbonate or equal Pull Lever Color White with red raised lettering Housing Dimensions 5 H x 3-3/4 W x 1 D (127 mm x 95 mm x 25 mm) Addressable Manual Station Semi-Flush Mounting Single Gang Box Mount Single gang box, 2-1/2" deep (64 mm), RACO #500 or equal (supplied by others) 4" Square Box Mount 4" (102 mm) square box, 2-1/8" (54 mm) minimum depth, RACO #231 or equal (supplied by others) Mount flush or with 1/16" (2 mm) maximum extension DO NOT RECESS 4" Square box with cover plate FIRE ALARM Station side view PULL DOWN Single gang cover plate, 3/4" (19 mm) extension, RACO #773 or equal (supplied by others) Wall surface Single gang box outline Semi-Flush Mount Side View 2 S /2012

71 Addressable Manual Stations Surface Mounting Preferred Mounting. For surface mounting of these addressable manual stations, the preferred electrical boxes are shown in the illustration to the right Box 5-3/16" H x 4" W x 2-3/16" D (132 mm x 102 mm x 56 mm) (ordered separately) Cast Box 5" H x 3-7/8" W x 2-3/16" D (127 mm x 98 mm x 56 mm) (ordered separately) Additional Mounting Reference. Refer to page 4 for Wiremold box mounting compatibility. Knockouts located top and bottom FIR FIRE E ALARM PULL DOWN 5" (127 mm) Access for 3/4" threaded conduit located top and bottom 1" (25.4 mm) 3-3/4" (95 mm) 4099 Series Addressable Manual Station Surface Mount Side View with Internal Detail Field wiring (shown for reference) Address setting under resealable label (accessible with cover open) Station cover hinges open for installation access 1-1/4" (32 mm) Simplex box (shown for reference) 2-5/8" (67 mm) Switch wiring (prewired) Application Reference Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, and all applicable local codes for complete requirements for manual stations. The following summarizes the basic requirements. 1. Stations shall be located in the normal path of exit and distributed in the protected area such that they are unobstructed and readily accessible. 2. Mounting shall be with the operable part not less than 42 in (1.07 m) and not more than 48 in (1.22 m) above floor level. 3. At least one station shall be provided on each floor. Additional stations shall be provided to obtain a travel distance not more than 200 ft (61 m) to the nearest station from any point in the building. 4. When manual station coverage appears limited in any way, additional stations should be installed. 3 S /2012

72 Addressable Manual Station, Additional Mounting Information For retrofit and new installations, additional compatible mounting boxes and the required adapter plates are shown in the illustration to the right Surface trim for Wiremold box 5-1/8" H x 5" W (130 mm x 127 mm) Wiremold receptacle box model V (supplied by others) Two gang switch box, each 3" H x 2" W x 2-3/4" D (76 mm x 51 mm x 70 mm) (supplied by others) IDNet addressable station Semi-flush trim for 2 gang switch box, 6" H x 4-1/2" W (152 mm x 114 mm) Addressable Manual Station, Flush Mounting Information Flush mount adapter kit , Black , Beige Box must be recessed into wall 1" to 1-1/8" (25.4 mm to 29 mm) 8" (203 mm) 6" (152 mm) Hole cutout must be a minimum of 6" H by 5" W (152 mm by 127 mm) 4-3/4" (121 mm) 6-3/4" (171 mm) Wall surface 4-11/16" (119 mm) square box, 2-1/8" (54 mm) minimum depth (by others) Front View Side View TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Lexan is a trademark of the General Electric Co. Wiremold is a trademark of the Wiremold Company. Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

73 UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Features TrueAlarm analog sensing provides: Digital transmission of analog sensor values via IDNet or MAPNET II two-wire communications For use with the following Simplex products: 4100ES, 4100U, 4010ES, and 4010 Series control panels; and 4008 Series control panels with reduced feature set (refer to data sheet S for details) 4020, 4100, and 4120 Series control panels, Universal Transponders, and 2120 TrueAlarm CDTs equipped for MAPNET II operation Fire alarm control panel provides: Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis of each sensor for individual sensitivity selection Sensitivity monitoring satisfying NFPA 72 sensitivity testing requirements; automatic individual sensor calibration check verifies sensor integrity Automatic environmental compensation, multi-stage alarm operation, and display of sensitivity directly in percent per foot Ability to display and print detailed sensor information in plain English language Photoelectric smoke sensors provide: Seven levels of sensitivity from 0.2% to 3.7% (refer to additional information on page 3) Heat sensors provide: Fixed temperature sensing Rate-of-rise temperature sensing Utility temperature sensing Listed to UL 521 and ULC-S530 General features: Listed to UL 268 and ULC-S529 Louvered smoke sensor design enhances smoke capture by directing flow to chamber; entrance areas are minimally visible when ceiling mounted Designed for EMI compatibility Magnetic test feature is provided Optional accessories include remote LED alarm indicator and output relays Additional base reference: For isolator bases, refer to data sheet S For sounder bases, refer to data sheet S For photo/heat sensors, refer to data sheet S (single address) and S (dual address) * These products have been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listings :218, :231, :216, and :217 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. Description TrueAlarm Analog Sensing TrueAlarm Analog Sensors Photoelectric and Heat; Standard Bases and Accessories TrueAlarm Photoelectric Sensor Mounted in Base Digital Communication of Analog Sensing. TrueAlarm analog sensors provide an analog measurement digitally communicated to the host control panel using Simplex addressable communications. At the control panel, the data is analyzed and an average value is determined and stored. An alarm or other abnormal condition is determined by comparing the sensor s present value against its average value and time. Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each sensor s average value provides a continuously shifting reference point. This software filtering process compensates for environmental factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component aging, providing an accurate reference for evaluating new activity. With this filtering, there is a significant reduction in the probability of false or nuisance alarms caused by shifts in sensitivity, either up or down. Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm set point for each TrueAlarm sensor is determined at the host control panel, selectable as more or less sensitive as the individual application requires. Timed/Multi-Stage Selection. Sensor alarm set points can be programmed for timed automatic sensitivity selection (such as more sensitive at night, less sensitive during day). Control panel programming can also provide multi-stage operation per sensor. For example, a 0.2% level may cause a warning to prompt investigation while a 2.5% level may initiate an alarm. Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indication. Each sensor base s LED pulses to indicate communications with the panel. If the control panel determines a sensor is in alarm, or is dirty or has some other type of trouble, the details are annunciated at the control panel and that sensor base s LED will be turned on steadily. During a system alarm, the control panel will control the LEDs such that an LED indicating a trouble will return to pulsing to help identify the alarmed sensors. S /2013

74 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases and Accessories Sensor Base Features Base mounted address selection: Address remains with its programmed location Accessible from front (DIP switch under sensor) General features: Automatic identification provides default sensitivity when substituting sensor types Integral red LED for power-on (pulsing), or alarm or trouble (steady on) Locking anti-tamper design mounts on standard outlet box Magnetically operated functional test Sensor Bases , Standard sensor base , Sensor base with wired connections for: Remote LED alarm indicator or relay (unsupervised) , Sensor base with supervised relay driver output (not compatible with 2120 CDT): Relay operation is programmable and can be manually operated from control panel Use with remote mount relay Also includes wired connections for remote LED alarm indicator or relay Sensor Base Options , Remote or local mount supervised relay: DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power limited rating of 3 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of VAC (requires external 24 VDC coil power) , LED Annunciation Relay: Activates when base LED is on steady, indicating local alarm or trouble DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power limited rating of 2 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of 1/2 120 VAC, (requires external 24 VDC coil power) , Adapter plate: Required for surface or semi-flush mounting to 4 square electrical box and for surface mounting to 4 octagonal box Can be used for cosmetic retrofitting to existing 6-3/8 diameter base product , Remote red LED Alarm Indicator: Mounts on single gang box ALARM (shown in illustration to right) Description TrueAlarm sensor bases contain integral addressable electronics that constantly monitor the status of the detachable photoelectric or heat sensors. Each sensor s output is digitized and transmitted to the system fire alarm control panel every four seconds. Since TrueAlarm sensors use the same base, different sensor types can be easily interchanged to meet specific location requirements. This feature also allows intentional sensor substitution during building construction. When conditions are temporarily dusty, instead of covering the smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors may be installed without reprogramming the control panel. Although the control panel will indicate an incorrect sensor type, the heat sensor will operate at a default sensitivity providing heat detection for building protection at that location. Mounting Reference Electrical Box Requirements: (boxes are by others) Without relay: 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep; single gang, 2" deep With relay : 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep, with 1-1/2" extension ring 4" (102 mm) Square Box 4" (102 mm) Octagonal Box Surface mount reference 1-1/2" (38 mm) minimum box depth Flush mount reference, mount even with final surface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess Relay (mounts in base electrical box or remotely) 1/4" (6.4 mm) 15/16" (24 mm) 6-3/8" (162 mm) Adapter Plate, required for mounting to surface mounted boxes and 4" square flush box 4-7/8" (124 mm) Relay (mounts in base electrical box) Relay Size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1" (3.75 cubic inches) (64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm) NOTE: Review total wire count, wire size, and accessories being wired to determine required box volume. TrueAlarm Bases , -9791, & S /2013

75 TrueAlarm Sensors Features Sealed against rear air flow entry Interchangeable mounting EMI/RFI shielded electronics Heat sensors: Selectable rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing with or without rate-of-rise operation Rated spacing distance between sensors: Fixed Temp. Setting 135 F (57.2 C) 155 F (68 C) UL & ULC Spacing 60 ft x 60 ft (18.3 m) 40 ft x 40 ft (12.2 m) FM Spacing, Either Fixed Temperature Setting 20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m) for fixed temperature only; RTI = Quick 50 ft x 50 ft (15.2 m) for fixed temperature with either rate-of-rise selection; RTI = Ultra Fast Smoke Sensors: Photoelectric technology sensing 360 smoke entry for optimum response Built-in insect screens Photoelectric Sensor TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivities of 0.2%, 0.5%, and 1% are for special applications in clean areas. Standard sensitivities are 1.5%, 2.0%, 2.5%, and 3.7%. Sensitivity is selected and monitored at the fire alarm control panel.* The sensor head design provides 360 smoke entry for optimum response to smoke from any direction. Due to its photoelectric operation, air velocity is not normally a factor, except for impact on area smoke flow Heat Sensor TrueAlarm heat sensors are self-restoring and provide rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Due to its small thermal mass, the sensor accurately and quickly measures the local temperature for analysis at the fire alarm control panel. Rate-of-rise temperature detection is selectable at the control panel for either 15 F (8.3 C) or 20 F (11.1 C) per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of rate-of-rise sensing and programmable to operate at 135 F (57.2 C) or 155 F (68 C). In a slow developing fire, the temperature may not increase rapidly enough to operate the rate-of-rise feature. However, an alarm will be initiated when the temperature reaches its rated fixed temperature setting. TrueAlarm heat sensors can be programmed as a utility device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range from 32 F to 155 F (0 C to 68 C). This feature can provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system problems. Refer to specific panels for availability. 2-3/8" (60 mm) 4-7/8" (124 mm) LED status indicator Heat Sensor with Base WARNING: In most fires, hazardous levels of smoke and toxic gas can build up before a heat detection device would initiate an alarm. In cases where Life Safety is a factor, the use of smoke detection is highly recommended. 4-7/8" (124 mm) 2-1/8" (54 mm) LED status indicator Photoelectric Sensor with Base Application Reference Sensor locations should be determined only after careful consideration of the physical layout and contents of the area to be protected. Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. On smooth ceilings, smoke sensor spacing of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide.* * For detailed application information including sensitivity selection, refer to Installation Instructions S /2013

76 TrueAlarm Analog Sensing Product Selection Chart TrueAlarm Sensor Bases (Refer to Application Manual and Installation Instructions for additional information) Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements Standard Sensor Base, no options Sensors and ** Sensor Base with connections for Remote LED Alarm Indicator or Unsupervised Relay Sensor Base with connections for Supervised Remote Relay and connections for Remote Alarm Indicator or Unsupervised Relay Sensors and remote LED alarm indicator or relay Sensors and remote relay (supervised) remote alarm indicator or relay (unsupervised) 4 octagonal or 4 square box, 1-1/2 min. depth; or single gang box, 2 min. depth 4 octagonal or 4 square box Note: Box depth requirements depend on total wire count and wire size, refer to accessories list below for reference. ** NOTE: is NOT compatible with the 2120 CDT TrueAlarm Sensors Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements Photoelectric Smoke Sensor Bases , , Heat Sensor and Refer to base requirements TrueAlarm Sensor/Base Accessories Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements Supervised Relay, mounts remote or in base electrical box Remote Red LED Alarm Indicator on single gang stainless steel plate Relay, tracks base LED status (unsupervised, mounts only in base electrical box) For use with base Bases and Adapter Plate Bases , -9789, & Specifications Remote Mounting requires 4 octagonal or 4 square box, 1-1/2 minimum depth Base Mounting requires 4 octagonal box, 2-1/8 deep with 1-1/2 extension ring Single gang box, 1-1/2 minimum depth 4 octagonal box, 2-1/8 deep with 1-1/2 extension ring Required for surface or semi-flush mounted 4 square box and for surface mounted 4 octagonal box General Operating Specifications Communications and Sensor Supervisory Power MAPNET II or IDNet, auto-select, VDC w/data, 400 A typical, 1 address per base Communications Connections Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 2.08 mm 2 ) Remote LED Alarm Indicator Current 1 ma typical, no impact to alarm current Remote LED Alarm Indicator and Relay Connections Color coded wire leads, 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ) UL Listed Temperature Range 32 to 100 F (0 to 38 C) Operating Temperature Range with to 122 F (0 to 50 C) with to 122 F (-9 to 50 C) Humidity Range 10 to 95% RH Smoke Sensor Ambient Ratings , Photoelectric Sensor Air velocity = ft/min ( m/min) Housing Color Frost White Base With Supervised Remote Relay (see page 2 for contact ratings) Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage VDC (nominal 24 VDC) Supervisory Current 270 A, from 24 VDC supply Alarm Current with Relay 28 ma, from 24 VDC supply Unsupervised Relay, Requirements for Bases and (see page 2 for contact ratings) Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage VDC (nominal 24 VDC) Supervisory Current Supplied from communications Alarm Current 13 ma from separate 24 VDC supply TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

77 TrueAlarm Analog Sensing UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Sounder Base for use with TrueAlarm Photoelectric and Heat Sensors Features Modular TrueAlarm sensor base with built-in electronic alarm sounder: Piezoelectric sounder provides high output (88 dba) with low current requirements (20 ma) For use with interchangeable TrueAlarm photoelectric or heat sensors (ordered separately) Sounder operation details: Powered from 24 VDC or from a compatible Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Synchronized via communications or by the NAC, if NAC powered** Sounder can be manually activated from the control panel Sensor and sounder operation is listed to UL Standard 268 Sounder operation is also listed to UL Standard 464 as an audible notification appliance TrueAlarm analog sensing operation: Analog sensor information is digitally communicated to the control panel via IDNet or MAPNET II two-wire communications Sensor information is processed by the control panel to determine sensor status For use with the following Simplex products: 4100ES, 4010ES, 4010, and 4100U Series control panels; and 4008 Series control panels with reduced feature set (refer to data sheet S for details) 4020, 4100, and 4120 Series control panels, and Universal Transponders equipped for MAPNET II operation General features: Louvered smoke sensor design enhances smoke capture by directing flow to chamber; entrance areas are minimally visible when ceiling mounted Designed for EMI compatibility Magnetic test feature is provided Optional accessories include remote LED alarm indicator and output relays Additional base reference: For standard bases, refer to data sheet S For isolator bases, refer to data sheet S For photo/heat sensors, refer to data sheet S (single address) and S (dual address) * This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listings :217 and :231 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. ** Total quantity of sounder bases available for coding on the same communications channel may vary with panel application and availability of NAC power. Refer to specific control panel requirements. TrueAlarm Photoelectric Sensor Mounted in Sounder Base TrueAlarm Analog Sensing Description Sounder bases combine an audible notification appliance and a TrueAlarm analog sensor to provide: Digital Communication of Analog Sensing. Sensors provide an analog measurement that is digitally communicated to the control panel where it is analyzed and an average value is determined and stored. An alarm or other abnormal condition is determined by comparing the sensor s present value against its average value. Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each sensor s average value provides a software filtering averaging process that compensates for environmental factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component aging, providing an accurate reference for evaluating new activity. The result is a significant reduction in the probability of false or nuisance alarms caused by shifts in sensitivity, either up or down. Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm set point for each TrueAlarm sensor is determined at the control panel, selectable as more or less sensitive as the individual application requires. Timed/Multi-Stage Selection. Alarm set points can be programmed for timed automatic sensitivity selection (such as more sensitive at night, less sensitive during day). Control panel programming can also provide multi-stage operation per sensor. For example, a 0.2% level may cause a warning to prompt investigation while a 2.5% level may initiate an alarm. Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indication. Each sensor base s LED pulses to indicate communications with the panel. If the control panel determines that a sensor is in alarm, or that it is dirty or has some other type of trouble, the details are annunciated at the control panel and that sensor base s LED will be turned on steadily. During a system alarm, the control panel will control the LEDs such that an LED indicating a trouble will return to pulsing to help identify the alarmed sensors. S /2013

78 Additional Sounder Base Features Base mounted address selection allows the address to remain with its programmed location when the sensor is removed for service or type change. Access is from the front under the removable sensor. Automatic sensor type identification provides default sensitivity when substituting sensor types. Different sensor types can be easily interchanged to meet specific location requirements. This feature also allows intentional sensor substitution during building construction. When conditions are temporarily dusty, instead of covering the smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors may be installed without reprogramming the control panel. Integral red LED indicates power-on by pulsing, or alarm or trouble when steady on. The exact status is annunciated at the fire alarm control panel. Fire alarm control panel provides: Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis of each sensor for individual sensitivity selection Sensitivity monitoring satisfying NFPA 72 sensitivity testing requirements; automatic individual sensor calibration check verifies sensor integrity Automatic environmental compensation, multi-stage alarm operation, and display of sensitivity directly in percent per foot Ability to display and print detailed sensor information in plain English language Accessories , LED Annunciation Relay activates when base LED is on steady, indicating a local alarm or trouble. Contacts are DPDT, rated 2 30 VDC; 1/2 120 VAC for transient suppressed loads (requires external 24 VDC coil power) , Remote red LED Alarm Indicator mounts on a single gang box to provide status indications where the sensor location may not be readily visible. ALARM Mounting Reference Electrical Box Requirements: (boxes are by others) Without relay: 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep; single gang, 2" deep With relay : 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep, with 1-1/2" extension ring 4" (102 mm) Square Box 4" (102 mm) Octagonal Box Surface mount reference 1-1/2" (38 mm) minimum box depth Note: Single gang adapter plate (RACO No. 787 or equal) is required when using 4" square box (by others) 6-3/8" Dia. x 1/4" thick 1-1/8" (29 mm) Flush mount reference, mount even with final surface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess Adapter Plate, required for mounting to surface mounted boxes (mounts inverted) LED status indicator 6-7/16" (164 mm) Optional Relay (Mounts in base electrical box and requires additional volume, see notes below) Relay size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1" (64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm), 3.75 cubic inches Sound output louvers extend from front to side (Photoelectric sensor shown for reference) NOTES: 1. Review actual wire size, wire count, box type, and whether relay is used before determining box size. 2. Mounting to flush mounted box also fits single gang handy box, 2-1/8" (51 mm) deep if wiring allows. (Not applicable if relay is used.) 3. For surface mounted boxes, use 4" square box with single gang adapter plate (RACO No. 787 or equal, by others) or 4" octagonal box, both require Adapter Plate. 4. When relay is used, mount relay in electrical box and use 1-1/2" extension ring (by others) on 4" square or octagonal box of 1-1/2" or 2-1/8" depth as required. 5. Refer to Installation Instructions for additional information Remote LED Alarm Indicator 2 S /2013

79 TrueAlarm Analog Sensor Features Sealed against rear air flow entry Electronics are EMI/RFI shielded Heat sensors: Selectable rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing with or without rate-of-rise operation Rated spacing distance between sensors: Fixed Temp. Setting 135 F (57.2 C) 155 F (68 C) UL & ULC Spacing 60 ft x 60 ft (18.3 m) 40 ft x 40 ft (12.2 m) FM Spacing, Either Fixed Temperature Setting 20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m) for fixed temperature only; RTI = Quick 50 ft x 50 ft (15.2 m) for fixed temperature with either rate-of-rise selection; RTI = Ultra Fast Smoke Sensors: Photoelectric technology sensing 360 smoke entry for optimum response Built-in insect screens Photoelectric Sensor TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivities of 0.2%, 0.5%, and 1% are for special applications in clean areas. Standard sensitivities are 1.5%, 2.0%, 2.5%, and 3.7%. Sensitivity is selected and monitored at the fire alarm control panel.* The sensor head design provides 360 smoke entry for optimum smoke response. Due to its photoelectric operation, air velocity is not normally a factor, except for impact on area smoke flow. 6-7/16" (164 mm) Heat Sensor TrueAlarm heat sensors are self-restoring and provide rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Due to its small thermal mass, the sensor accurately and quickly measures the local temperature for analysis at the fire alarm control panel. Rate-of-rise temperature detection is selectable at the control panel for either 15 F (8.3 C) or 20 F (11.1 C) per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of rate-of-rise sensing and programmable to operate at 135 F (57.2 C) or 155 F (68 C). In a slow developing fire, the temperature may not increase rapidly enough to operate the rate-of-rise feature. However, an alarm will be initiated when the temperature reaches its rated fixed temperature setting. TrueAlarm heat sensors can be programmed as a utility device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range from 32 F to 155 F (0 C to 68 C). This feature can provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system problems. Refer to specific panels for availability. 2-9/16" (65 mm) 6-7/16" (164 mm) Heat Sensor with Sounder Base WARNING: In most fires, hazardous levels of smoke and toxic gas can build up before a heat detection device would initiate an alarm. In cases where Life Safety is a factor, the use of smoke detection is highly recommended. Application Reference 2-5/16" (58 mm) Photoelectric Sensor with Sounder Base Sensor locations should be determined after careful consideration of the physical layout and contents of the area to be protected. Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. On smooth ceilings, smoke sensor spacing of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide. For detailed application information, refer to 4098 Detectors, Sensors, and Bases Application Manual, Part Number * * For detailed application information including sensitivity selection, refer to Installation Instructions S /2013

80 TrueAlarm Analog Sensing Product Selection Chart TrueAlarm Sounder Base* Model Description Compatibility Mounting Requirements Sounder Base with connections for Remote LED Alarm Indicator or Unsupervised Relay TrueAlarm Sensors (ordered separately) Sensors: and Options: remote LED alarm indicator or relay Refer to page 2, mounting reference Model Description Mounting Requirements Photoelectric Smoke Sensor Heat Sensor Refer to page 2, mounting reference Sounder Base Accessories (ordered separately if required) Model Description Mounting Requirements Adapter Plate, required for surface mounted 4 electrical boxes Refer to page 2, mounting reference Choose one if required Remote red LED Alarm Indicator on single gang stainless steel plate Relay, tracks base LED status (unsupervised, to be mounted only in base electrical box) Single gang box, 1-1/2 minimum depth Mounts in base electrical box (requires 1-1/2 extension on 4 square or octagonal box) * Refer to data sheet S for other compatible bases. Refer to Installation Instructions and Application Manual for additional information. Specifications General Operating Specifications Communications and Sensor Supervisory Power MAPNET II or IDNet, auto-select, VDC w/data, 400 A typical, 1 address per base, supplied by control panel Communications and Sounder Power Connections Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 2.08 mm 2 ) Remote LED Alarm Indicator Current 1 ma typical supplied from communications, no impact to alarm current LED Connections Color coded wire leads, 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ) UL Listed Temperature Range 32 F to 100 F (0 C to 38 C) Operating Temperature Range Humidity Range With F to 122 F (0 C to 50 C) With F to 122 F (-9 C to 50 C) 10 to 95% RH Smoke Sensor Ambient Ratings Housing Color Sounder Operation Sounder Voltage Alarm Current (Sounder On) Sounder Output Sounder Power Supervision (Selectable) , Photoelectric Sensor Supervised Unsupervised Air velocity is ft/min ( m/min) Frost White 18 to 32 VDC from steady external source or from NAC VDC, 24 ma 32 VDC 88 dba 10 ft (3 m) per UL Standard 464, Audible Signaling Appliances and UL Standard 268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems Select for continuous 24 VDC power, loss of power is communicated to panel Select when connected to NAC for sounder power, NAC provides supervision NAC Powered Operation Unsupervised Relay Option Externally Supplied Relay Voltage Alarm Current Contact Ratings, DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads Relay Operation When in alarm, will sound when NAC is in alarm, allowing synchronized pattern (Temporal or March Time, etc.) controlled by the NAC VDC, steady source recommended (wires to remote LED leads) 13 ma from separate 24 VDC supply Power limited rating: 2 30 VDC Non-power limited rating: 1/2 120 VAC Tracks base LED status, relay is on with trouble or alarm at the base TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

81 Multi-Point Peripherals UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved* TrueAlarm CO Sensor Bases for Smoke, Heat, and Photo/Heat Sensors using IDNet Communications Features TrueAlarm addressable CO sensor bases contain a carbon monoxide (CO) sensing module providing both CO toxic gas monitoring and enhanced fire detection: For use with 4100ES, 4010ES, or 4100U fire alarm control panels (4100U requires software revision or higher) CO sensor bases support (and require) a TrueAlarm photoelectric, photo/heat or heat sensor (ordered separately) Model provides standard features, model also provides a piezoelectric sounder CO sensor bases are multi-point devices, consume only one IDNet address, and receive both communications and sensor power from the IDNet channel (the sounder base requires separate 24 VDC system power or NAC connection) Listed to UL 268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems and UL 2075, Gas and Vapor Detectors and Sensors; allowing systems to be listed to Standard 2034, Single and Multiple Station Carbon Monoxide Alarms Listed by ULC to CSA Residential Carbon Monoxide Alarming Devices Three types of CO influenced operation are available; UL 2034 CO alarm detection; UL 2075 CO (OSHA) level monitoring for ventilation control; and multi-criteria fire sensor analysis with algorithms that combines optical and CO gas monitoring information Operation of a CO sensor base with a photoelectric or a photo/heat sensor allows: Independent sensor operation or selectable multi-sensor modes of False Alarm Reduction or Faster Detection False Alarm Reduction analyzes CO and photoelectric sensor information together to provide a sophisticated rejection of non-fire conditions normally troublesome as false alarms (steam, dust, aerosols, etc.) Faster Detection (increased sensitivity) algorithm analyzes CO and photoelectric sensor information to allow the presence of CO to implement an increased photoelectric sensitivity for high value locations (museums, electrical equipment rooms, etc.) Sounder base operation details: When connected to a panel NAC through the Temporal Code Module, the sounder base can provide temporal code 3 (TC3) for fire, or temporal code 4 (TC4) for toxic carbon monoxide alarms module may also be used to code other (non-fire) dedicated carbon monoxide notification appliances (refer to data sheet S ) Sounder can be manually activated from the panel Sounder operation is also listed to UL 464 as an audible notification appliance TrueAlarm CO Sensor Base with Sounder (shown with Photo/Heat Sensor) Features (Continued) 4100ES/4100U/4010ES Control Panel operation summary: CO sensor data is stored and analyzed at the panel; a new CO Service Report provides easy information access (see sample on page 3) Five (5) year end of life status indication with CO sensor expiration notices occurring within 12 months and within 6 months, allowing service replacement planning Analog sensor information is digitally transmitted to the host control panel via IDNet communications for processing to evaluate and track status Carbon monoxide concentration in ppm (parts per million) is available for viewing from the panel user interface For OSHA compliant CO gas sensing, CO condition level may be programmed by concentration (must be above 30 ppm) 4100ES Audio Control Panels can provide a CO Relocation Message with Temporal Code 4 tone and Voice Evacuation (reference UCSET1393, see S ) General features: Operation of a CO sensor base with heat sensor provides dual independent sensor operation New CO test mode allows functional testing of each sensor technology including the CO sensor Optional accessories include remote alarm LED, alarm relay, and mounting adapter plate Designed for EMI compatibility Provides magnetic test CO sensor element is easily replaced when end of service life is reached: Access to CO sensor replacement cartridge (CORC, ) requires removal of interchangeable sensor head providing tamper monitoring (sensor removal causes a trouble condition) * This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :330 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of SimplexGrinnell LP, Westminster. S /2013

82 CO Sensor Base Description Carbon monoxide (CO) is an odorless, colorless, tasteless gas produced by the incomplete combustion of heating fuels such as wood, coal, heating oil, and natural gas. CO is also a byproduct of many materials experiencing unintentional fire or even incipient fire conditions. Monitoring of CO levels can warn of physically harmful concentrations, however, sensing of CO levels below the harmful level can also provide improved understanding of incipient fire conditions when evaluated in combination with photoelectric fire sensor information from the same location. Simplex CO sensor bases combine an electrolytic CO sensing module with a TrueAlarm analog sensor to provide a single multiple sensing assembly using one system address. The CO sensor can be enabled/disabled, used in LED/Switch modes and custom control, and can be made public for communication across a fire alarm Network. CO sensor operation is similar to other TrueAlarm sensors (photoelectric or heat). It provides current analog values, average analog value, No Answer troubles, Wrong Device troubles, over threshold, concentration in ppm, and monitors for the presence of the CO sensor. Base mounted address selection allows the address to remain with its location when the sensor is removed for service or type change. Address access is from the front, under the removable sensor. An integral red LED indicates power-on by pulsing, or alarm or trouble when steady on, and also provides test mode status (see page 3). Detailed status is available at the fire alarm control panel. CO Sensing, Detailed Operation Toxic Gas Sensing, UL 2034/UL For CO toxic gas detection, the bases provide toxic gas sensing to the UL 2034 and UL 2075 standards. Toxic gas sensing may be selected at the same time as any of the combined CO photo fire detection modes are selected. Toxic Gas Sensing, OSHA Compliant. For OSHA compliant gas sensing, the desired threshold level (above 30 ppm) is selected at the control panel as required for the application, typically for ventilation control. Refer to page 3 for additional OSHA CO monitoring information. Enhanced Fire Sensing. Each sensor provides an analog measurement digitally communicated to the control panel for analysis. At the panel, these analog values are used separately, or combined, to evaluate for conditions indicative of fire, incipient fire, excessive heat, and freeze warning. For fire, the addition of a CO sensor provides two new selectable modes of operation: Nuisance Alarm Reduction Mode and Faster Fire Detection. These two modes were developed using the results of extensive testing of actual fires performed under a wide variety of conditions. (Refer to page 4 for additional operation mode options.) Nuisance Alarm Reduction Mode allows the host control panel to combine photoelectric sensor input and CO sensor level input to reduce false alarms caused by non-fire conditions. Non-fire conditions can be steam from bathroom showers, particles from dusty environments, aerosols from personal care products, tobacco smoke, cooking smoke, or other similar conditions. CO Sensing, Detailed Operation (Continued) Nuisance Alarm Reduction Details. For applications of anticipated nuisance alarm conditions, photoelectric sensitivity is normally selected for 3.7%/ft smoke obscuration. However, the addition of CO sensing allows the host control panel to apply software verification similar to the timed alarm verification feature often used with conventional smoke detection. Faster Fire Detection. For applications where faster response to incipient or slow building fires is desired and environment appropriate, the Faster Fire Detection mode correlates the outputs of the CO sensor and the photoelectric sensor to provide increased sensitivity. This mode provides earlier detection compared to a standard sensitive photoelectric sensor setting, and also provides more false alarm reduction compared to using a sensitive setting in an area not normally considered appropriate. Faster Fire Detection Details. TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors can be selected to be as sensitive as 0.2%/ft obscuration for applications evaluated as appropriate to that level. However, if the environment is not suitable for that sensitivity level, the Faster Fire Detection mode allows the photoelectric sensor to be selected as a standard 2.5%/ft obscuration, but with the presence of a significant level of CO, the combination of CO and photo sensing input can allow an equivalent sensitivity approaching 0.5%/ft obscuration. The host control panel tracks two photoelectric sensitivities, the one selected for photoelectric operation only (typically 2.5%), and the CO correlation sensitivity that it adjusts depending on the amount of CO present. Control Panel Operations Smoke sensor features include: sensitivity monitoring satisfying NFPA 72 sensitivity testing requirements, automatic individual sensor calibration checking to verify sensor integrity, automatic environmental compensation, available multi-stage alarm operation, display of sensitivity directly in percent per foot, monitoring of peak activity per sensor, alarm set point, and time of day or multi-stage alarm selection. Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indications. The sensor base LED pulses to indicate communications with the panel. If a sensor is in alarm, or has a trouble condition, the status is annunciated at the control panel and that base LED will turn on steady. During a system alarm, the panel will control LEDs such that a trouble indication will return to pulsing to help identify the sensors in alarm. Reported CO Sensor troubles are: Disabled, Almost Expired 12 Months, Almost Expired 6 Months, Expired (End of Life), Short, and Sensor Missing/Failed. Trouble Details. Almost Expired is similar to the Almost Dirty trouble for a photoelectric sensor. Expired trouble is similar to the Dirty trouble for a TrueAlarm photoelectric sensor. CO sensor technology does not support automatic sensitivity testing and drift compensation as is available with a photoelectric sensor. End of useful CO sensor life is based upon a set 5 year operational lifetime, tracked by date code built into the CO sensor module electronics. Although the CO sensor will continue to function after the 5 year expired trouble is indicated, replacement is required to ensure proper detection accuracy. 2 S /2013

83 Control Panel Operations (Continued) Panel Test Mode. To facilitate functional testing of the CO sensor, a new test mode is available in the host control panel. In this mode, the CO sensor, and installed heat or smoke sensor can be easily functionally tested. Panel Test Mode Details. When in the CO test mode, the internal multiple sensor analysis algorithms are disabled allowing each sensor to be quickly tested either individually or simultaneously, depending on the test equipment used. CO testing can be performed using a Solo Model 332 aerosol dispenser (or equal). (Testing is available through your local authorized Simplex product supplier.) The base LED will display steady ON when individual sensors are activated during test. Refer to the Application Reference section for more information. OSHA CO monitoring. For OSHA compliant gas sensing, control panel software supports custom programming based upon CO concentration levels. For example, turn on ventilation if the CO level is above X ppm and then turn off ventilation when the level drops below Y ppm (or select either value as a range if desired). This is separate from alarm set points. Multi-Point Allocation. 4100ES and 4010ES control panels require only one (1) point at the host panel per CO sensor base. For 4100U control panels, the requirement is three (3) points at the host panel per CO sensor base with the multi-sensor, and two (2) points for the other sensors. Depending on CO sensor base and sensor choice, up to seven (7) points can be made public to a connected Simplex Fire Alarm Network. Each CO sensor base uses a single address with sub-points layered underneath (such as 1-1-0, 1-1-1, 1-1-2,.1-1-6). (Additional multi-point allocation detail is described in reference data sheet S ) CO Sensor Base Power Requirements. Power for the standard CO sensor base is provided by IDNet communications. No additional wiring is required for upgrading of existing installed TrueAlarm sensor bases. CO sensor sounder bases do require system supplied separate 24 VDC (or NAC) wiring, the same as the standard sounder base. Accessories , Remote red LED Alarm Indicator mounts on a single gang box to provide status indications where the sensor location may not be readily visible. (See illustration to right.) , LED Annunciation Relay activates when base LED is on steady, indicating a local alarm or trouble. Contacts are DPDT, rated 2 30 VDC; 1/2 120 VAC for transient suppressed loads (requires external 24 VDC coil power). Application Reference ALARM Determine sensor locations after careful consideration of the physical layout and contents of the area to be protected. For fire alarm applications: Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code On smooth ceilings, smoke sensor spacing of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide. For detailed application information: Refer to 4098 Detectors, Sensors, and Bases Application Manual, Part Number For toxic gas sensor placement and mounting: Refer to NFPA 720, Standard for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Warning Equipment in Dwelling Units Sensors may be either wall or ceiling mounted Per NFPA 720, Section 5.1 (2005 edition): A carbon monoxide alarm or detector shall be centrally located outside of each separate sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms Each alarm or detector shall be located on the wall, ceiling, or other location as specified in the installation instructions that accompany the unit. TrueAlarm CO Service Reports TrueAlarm CO Service Reports (sample below) contain information on the CO sensors programmed in the panel displaying pertinent data such as current concentration value in ppm, End of Life date, and current state. This report allows determination of which sensors will require attention. Service Port Page 1 REPORT 6 : TrueAlarm CO Report 12:34:56am FRI 31-MAY-13 Channel 1 (M1) Zone Name CUSTOM LABEL Current Value End of Life Date State M1-1-2 Conference Room 17 CO Toxic Gas 457PPM 01-APR-18 PRI M1-2-2 Boiler Room CO Toxic Gas 0PPM 01-APR-18 NOR TRUE ALARM CO REPORT COMPLETED Press RETURN for next Screen OR CTRL-X to abort 3 S /2013

84 TrueAlarm Analog Sensing Product Selection Chart TrueAlarm CO Sensor Base Model Description CO Base, Standard operation CO Base with Sounder TrueAlarm Sensors, select one per CO Sensor Base Model Description Photoelectric Smoke Sensor Multi-Sensor Photoelectric and Heat Sensing Heat Sensor Select TrueAlarm sensor from list below Refer to selection table below for available operation modes CO Base Replacement CO Cartridge and Accessories (ordered separately as required) Model Description CO Replacement Cartridge (CORC) Solo 332 Aerosol Dispenser, suitable for larger diameter detectors; can be used for CO or smoke testing Solo C3 CO Aerosol Canister (case of 12) Model Description Mounting Requirements Adapter Plate, required for surface mounted 4 electrical boxes Refer to page 6, mounting reference Choose one if required Remote red LED Alarm Indicator on single gang stainless steel plate Relay, tracks base LED status (unsupervised, to be mounted only in base electrical box) Single gang box, 1-1/2 minimum depth Mounts in base electrical box (requires 1-1/2 extension on 4 square or octagonal box) CO Sensor Base Operation Options with Sensor Choice Sensor Choice Photoelectric Smoke Sensor Photo/Heat Multi-Sensor Heat Sensor M o d e Operational Mode Choices* ( = operation selected) False Alarm Reduction Faster Detection TrueSense Photo/Heat Photo Fire Heat Fire** Utility Temp. Ion Fire CO Toxic Gas CO Fire 1 option option 2 option option option 3 option option option option 4 option option option option option 5 option option option option option 6 option option 7 option option * NOTE: Duct detection modes are not applicable and are not available. Refer to the Multi-Point Allocation discussion on page 3 for panel point requirement information. ** Heat Fire Mode is 135 F or 155 F, fixed or rate-of-rise. CO Toxic Gas operation is selectable as: Supervisory (which is NOT recommended if communicated off-site), Priority 2 (preferred if communicated off-site), or Utility. CO fire detection mode can be selected only when used with a photoelectric smoke detection sensor set for fire detection mode. 4 S /2013

85 TrueAlarm Analog Sensor Features Sealed against rear air flow entry Electronics are EMI/RFI shielded Heat sensing: Selectable rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing with or without rate-of-rise operation Rated spacing distance between sensors: Fixed Temp. Setting 135 F (57.2 C) 155 F (68 C) UL& ULC Spacing 60 ft x 60 ft (18.3 m) 40 ft x 40 ft (12.2 m) FM Spacing, Either Fixed Temperature Setting 20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m) for fixed temperature only; RTI = Quick 50 ft x 50 ft (15.2 m) for fixed temperature with either rate-of-rise selection; RTI = Ultra Fast Smoke Sensors: Photoelectric technology sensing 360 smoke entry for optimum response Built-in insect screens Photoelectric Sensor TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivities of 0.2%, 0.5%, and 1% are for special applications in clean areas. Standard sensitivities are 1.5%, 2.0%, 2.5%, and 3.7%. Sensitivity is selected and monitored at the fire alarm control panel. (For detailed application information about sensitivity selection, refer to Installation Instructions ) The sensor head design provides 360 smoke entry for optimum smoke response. Due to its photoelectric operation, air velocity is not normally a factor, except for impact on area smoke flow. 6-7/16" (164 mm) Multi-Sensor TrueAlarm multi-sensors combines the performances of TrueAlarm photoelectric smoke sensing with TrueAlarm thermal sensing to provide both features in a single assembly. Each sensing element provides data for evaluation at the fire alarm control panel where the following four independent detection modes are evaluated: Fixed temperature heat detection Rate-of-rise heat detection TrueAlarm photoelectric smoke detection And TrueSense correlation detection TrueSense analysis correlates both thermal activity and smoke activity at a single multi-sensor location using an extensively tested covariance relationship. As a result, TrueSense detection improves response to conditions indicative of faster acting, hot flaming fires when compared to the response of either photoelectric smoke activity or thermal activity alone Heat Sensor TrueAlarm heat sensors are self-restoring and provide rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Due to its small thermal mass, the sensor accurately and quickly measures the local temperature for analysis at the fire alarm control panel. Rate-of-rise temperature detection is selectable at the control panel for either 15 F (8.3 C) or 20 F (11.1 C) per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of rate-of-rise sensing and programmable to operate at 135 F (57.2 C) or 155 F (68 C). In a slow developing fire, the temperature may not increase rapidly enough to operate the rate-of-rise feature. However, an alarm will be initiated when the temperature reaches its rated fixed temperature setting. TrueAlarm heat sensors can be programmed as a utility device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range from 32 F to 155 F (0 C to 68 C). This feature can provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system problems. 2-5/16" (58 mm) LED status indicator 6-7/16" (164 mm) 2-7/16" (62 mm) CO sensor housing Thermistor guard (Multi-Sensor only) Output louvers on Sounder Base extend from front and side 2-9/16" (65 mm) Dimension and Feature Reference, Photoelectric or Multi-Sensor on CO Sensor Base Heat Sensor with CO Sensor Base (with CO Sensor Housing facing forward) WARNING: In most fires, hazardous levels of smoke and toxic gas can build up before a heat detection device would initiate an alarm. In cases where Life Safety is a factor, the use of smoke detection is highly recommended. 5 S /2013

86 Installation Reference Electrical Box Requirements: (boxes are by others) Without relay: 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep; single gang, 2" deep With relay : 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep, with 1-1/2" extension ring 4" (102 mm) Square Box 4" (102 mm) Octagonal Box Surface mount reference 1-1/2" (38 mm) minimum box depth Flush mount reference, mount even with final surface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess Note: Single gang adapter plate (RACO No. 787 or equal) is required when using 4" square box (by others) Optional Relay (Mounts in base electrical box and requires additional volume, see notes below) Relay size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1" (64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm), 3.75 cubic inches 6-3/8" Dia. x 1/4" thick Adapter Plate, required for mounting to surface mounted boxes (mounts inverted) 6-7/16" (164 mm) 1-1/8" (29 mm) CO sensor assembly (CORC) shaded for reference LED status indicator (Photoelectric sensor shown for reference) NOTES: 1. Review actual wire size, wire count, box type, and whether relay is used before determining box size. 2. Mounting to flush mounted box also fits single gang handy box, 2-1/8" (51 mm) deep if wiring allows. (Not applicable if relay is used.) 3. For surface mounted boxes, use 4" square box with single gang adapter plate (RACO No. 787 or equal, by others) or 4" octagonal box, both require Adapter Plate. 4. When relay is used, mount relay in electrical box and use 1-1/2" extension ring (by others) on 4" square or octagonal box of 1-1/2" or 2-1/8" depth as required. 5. Refer to sensor base Installation Instructions for additional information. 6. Refer to CORC Replacement Instructions for CO cartridge installation and replacement. 6 S /2013

87 Specifications General Operating Specifications IDNet Communications and Sensor Supervisory Power VDC w/data, 400 A typical, 1 address per base, supplied by control panel Communications and Sounder Power Connections Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 2.08 mm 2 ) Remote LED Alarm Indicator Current 1 ma typical supplied from communications, no impact to alarm current LED Connections Color coded wire leads, 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ) UL Listed Temperature Range 32 F to 100 F (0 C to 38 C) Operating with F to 122 F (0 C to 50 C) Temperature Range with or F to 122 F (-9 C to 50 C) Humidity Range 15 to 95% RH CO Sensor Base Air Velocity Ratings per Sensor Housing Color Sounder Operation Sounder Voltage Alarm Current (Sounder On) Sounder Output Sounder Power Supervision (Selectable) NAC Powered Operation Reference for CO Monitoring Photoelectric Sensor and Multi-Sensor Air velocity = ft/min (0-305 m/min) Frost White 18 to 32 VDC from steady external source or from NAC VDC, 24 ma 32 VDC 88 dba 10 ft (3 m) per UL Standard 464, Audible Signaling Appliance; UL Standard 268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems and CSA Select for continuous 24 VDC power, loss of power is communicated to Supervised panel Select when connected to NAC for sounder power, NAC provides Unsupervised supervision When in alarm, will sound when NAC is in alarm, allowing synchronized pattern (Temporal or March Time, etc.) controlled by the NAC control Concentration Alarm Window Requirements Reference for UL 2034 and CSA Response Time False Alarm Resistance Additional UL 2034 CO Sensor Toxic Gas Monitoring Details UL 2075 Reference, Commercial OSHA Type Operation; Utility Point Mode Unsupervised Relay Option Externally Supplied Relay Voltage Alarm Current Contact Ratings, DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads Relay Operation 70 ±5 ppm 60 to 240 minutes 150 ±5 ppm 10 to 50 minutes 400 ±10 ppm 4 to 15 minutes 30 ±3 ppm No Alarm for 30 days 70 ±5 ppm No Alarm for 60 minutes 1. For CO levels above 40 ppm, the CO alarm level per sensor is determined by calculations performed at the panel based on the time integrated CO levels measured at the sensor. (Levels below 40 ppm are not tracked.) 2. While tracking levels above 40 ppm, if the concentration dips below 40 ppm for periods of time, the time to alarm is extended accordingly. With custom control at the fire alarm control panel, Utility Point operations can be performed at lower CO concentration levels than those of UL 2034 Example: Start ventilation after 5 minutes at 25 to 35 ppm and also alarm at a reading higher than that range, but lower than UL 2034 allows VDC, steady source recommended (wires to remote LED leads) 13 ma from separate 24 VDC supply Power limited rating: 2 30 VDC Non-power limited rating: 1/2 120 VAC Tracks base LED status, relay is on with trouble or alarm at the base 7 S /2013

88 Additional Information Reference Product Data Sheet Product Data Sheet Temporal Code 4 Module S ES Control Panels with EPS Power Standard Bases S Supplies S Isolator Bases S ES Audio Control Reference S Standard Sounder Base S ES Standard Control Panels S TrueSense Multi-Sensor S ES Control Panels S Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

89

90

91 This device is a duct smoke housing. When provided with detector, it is designed to sample the air flow passing by it in the air duct to determine whether it contains unacceptable levels of smoke. The effectiveness of a duct smoke detector is highly dependent upon: the design and operating conditions of the air handling system in which it is installed, variables such as smoke dilution and stratification over which even the best designed systems have no control, and proper placement and positioning of the duct smoke detector, which is often compromised for practical reasons. For the reasons stated above, the effectiveness of this duct smoke detector cannot be warranted or guaranteed. Under no circumstances should this duct smoke detector be used or regarded to be a substitute for the building's Fire alarm and detection system to which this device is attached as a secondary detection device. DO NOT REMOVE THIS NOTICE! TrueAlarm Analog Sensing UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Addressable Duct Sensor Housings with TrueAlarm Photoelectric Sensor; Available with Multiple Relay Control Features Compact air duct sensor housing with clear cover to monitor for the presence of smoke** Includes factory installed TrueAlarm photoelectric smoke sensor and features: Individual sensor information processed by the host control panel to determine sensor status Digital transmission of analog sensor values via IDNet or MAPNET II, 2-wire communications Programmable sensitivity, consistent accuracy, environmental compensation, status testing, and monitoring of sensor dirt accumulation Model : Basic duct sensor housing (no relay output) powered by IDNet/MAPNET II communications Model : Duct sensor housing with supervised output for multiple remote relays; requires separate 24 VDC; includes one relay Relay output is under panel control At the panel, relay output can be activated manually or in response to a separate alarm or other input General features: UL listed to Standard 268A Clear cover allows visual inspection Test ports provide functional smoke testing access with cover in place Mounts to rectangular ducts or round ducts; minimum size is 8 (203 mm) square or 18 (457 mm) diameter Magnetic test feature for alarm initiation at housing Optional weatherproof enclosure is available separately (refer to data sheet S ) Diagnostic LEDs (on interface board): Red Alarm/Trouble LED for sensor status and communications polling display Yellow LED for open or shorted trouble indication of supervised relay control ( only) Sampling tubes (ordered separately): Available in multiple lengths to match duct size Installed and serviced with housing in place Remote module options (ordered separately): Remote red status/alarm LED ( ) Remote test station with LED ( ) remote relays (refer to page 2 for details) * These products have been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. Duct Sensor Housing, Front and Bottom View ALARM Remote Status/Alarm Indicator and Test Station Introduction Operation. Simplex compact air duct smoke sensor housings provide TrueAlarm operation for the detection of smoke in air conditioning or ventilating ducts. Sampling tubes are installed into the duct allowing air to be directed to the smoke sensor mounted in the housing. TrueAlarm Sensor Operation Digital Communication of Analog Sensing. Analog information from the sensor is digitally communicated to the control panel where it is analyzed. Sensor input is stored and tracked as an average value with an alarm or abnormal condition being determined by comparing the sensor s present value against its average. Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each photoelectric sensor s average value provides a software filtering process that compensates for environmental factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component aging, providing an accurate reference for evaluating new activity. The result is a significant reduction in the probability of false or nuisance alarms caused by shifts in sensitivity, either up or down. ** Please note that smoke detection in air ducts is intended to provide notification of the presence of smoke in the duct. It is not intended to, and will not, replace smoke detection requirements for open areas or other non-duct applications. TEST NORM ALARM S /2012

92 TrueAlarm Sensor Operation (Continued) Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm set point for each sensor is determined at the control panel, selectable as the individual application requires. Sensor Status LED. Each sensor housing s red status LED (located on the electrical interface board) pulses to indicate communications with the panel. If the control panel determines that a sensor is in alarm, or that it is dirty or has some other type of trouble, the details are annunciated at the control panel and that sensor housing s status LED will be turned on steadily. During a system alarm, the control panel will control the LEDs such that an LED indicating a trouble will return to pulsing to help identify any alarmed sensors. (Remote Status/Alarm LEDs track the operation of the sensor housing LED.) Photoelectric Sensing TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power smoke sensing. Duct Sensor Selection Chart Duct Smoke Sensor Housing with Photoelectric Sensor* Model Description Compatibility Basic Duct Sensor Housing; operating power is supplied by either IDNet or MAPNET II communications (no relay output) Duct Sensor Housing with supervised multiple relay output, requires separate 24 VDC fire alarm power and end-of-line resistor harness; includes one relay Remote LED Indicator and Test Station, Select One if Required Photoelectric Sensing (Continued) Typically duct sensor applications require less sensitive settings (such as 2.5% per foot obscuration) due to the ducts being a relative dirty environment. However, the standard seven levels of TrueAlarm sensor sensitivity are available for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivity is selected and monitored at the fire alarm control panel. Fire Alarm Control Panel Features Individual smoke sensitivity selection Sensitivity monitoring that satisfies NFPA 72 sensitivity testing requirements Peak value logging allows accurate analysis for sensitivity selection Automatic, once per minute individual sensor calibration check verifies sensor integrity Automatic environmental compensation Smoke sensitivity is displayed in percent per foot Ability to display and print detailed sensor information in plain English language Relays of model are under panel control for ON, OFF, or override Simplex fire alarm control panel models: 4100ES, 4010ES, 4008, 4010, 4100U, and legacy products 4020, 4100/4100+, and Also 2120 CDT if configured for MAPNET II, TrueAlarm operation Same as above except relay operation is not compatible with 2120 CDT; Relay output is for up to 15 total Relays (additional relays are ordered separately) Model Description Compatibility Mounting Red LED status indicator on single-gang stainless steel plate Test Station with keyswitch and red LED status indicator, on single-gang stainless steel plate; (turning switch to TEST initiates alarm for system testing) Epoxy Encapsulated Remote Relay and End-of-Line Resistor Use single gang box, 3 H x 2 W x 2 D (76 mm x 51 mm x 51 mm) Model Description Compatibility Location Relay; single Form C (7 120 VAC); refer to pages 3 and 4 for additional relay information; one included with ; wiring is 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ) color coded wire leads End-of-Line Resistor Harness; 10 k, 1/2 W; (ref ); required to supervise remote relay coil connection only; connect up to 15 Locate relays within 3 ft (1 m) of device being controlled per NFPA At last relay location * Each duct housing includes an internally mounted model TrueAlarm photoelectric sensor and an exhaust tube. A correctly sized sampling tube (ordered per application) is required, refer to chart below. Sampling Tube Selection Chart, Ordered Separately Per Duct Width, Select One Overall Duct Width Tube Required Suggested Cut Length 12 (305 mm) /2 (12.7 mm) longer than duct width 13 to 23 (330 mm to 584 mm) /2 (12.7 mm) longer than duct width 24 to 46 (610 mm to 1168 mm) in (76 mm) longer than duct width 46 to 71 (1168 mm to 1803 mm) in (76 mm) longer than duct width 71 to 95 (1803 mm to 2413 mm) in (76 mm) longer than duct width 2 S /2012

93 This device is a duct smoke housing. When provided with detector, it is designed to sample the air flow passing by it in the air duct to determine whether it contains unacceptable levels of smoke. The effectiveness of a duct smoke detector is highly dependent upon: the design and operating conditions of the air handling system in which it is installed, variables such as smoke dilution and stratification over which even the best designed systems have no control, and proper placement and positioning of the duct smoke detector, which is often compromised for practical reasons. For the reasons stated above, the effectiveness of this duct smoke detector cannot be warranted or guaranteed. Under no circumstances should this duct smoke detector be used or regarded to be a substitute for the building's Fire alarm and detection system to which this device is attached as a secondary detection device. DO NOT REMOVE THIS NOTICE! effectiveness of a duct smoke detector is highly dependent upon: the design and operating conditions of the Duct Sensor Housing Detail Reference NOTE: Refer to Installation Instructions for additional installation detail and maintenance information. 11-3/8" (289 mm) Exhaust tube access hole Conduit (by others) 6-3/4" (171 mm ) Smoke sensor, mounted in special interface base (supplied) This device is a duct smoke housing. When provided with detector, it is designed to sample the air flow passing by it in the air duct to determine whether it contains unacceptable levels of smoke. The effectiveness of a duct smoke detector is highly dependent upon: the design and operating conditions of the air handling system in which it is installed, variables such as smoke dilution and stratification over which even the best designed systems have no control, and proper placement and positioning of the duct smoke detector, which is often compromised for practical reasons. For the reasons stated above, the effectiveness of this duct smoke detector cannot be warranted or guaranteed. Under no circumstances should this duct smoke detector be used or regarded to be a substitute for the building's Fire alarm and detection system to which this device is attached as a secondary detection device. DO NOT REMOVE THIS NOTICE! Metal plate with dual holes for 3/4" (19 mm) conduit, plug supplied for unused hole Front View Sampling tube access hole Yellow LED, relay control trouble indicator ( only) Red sensor status LED Side of duct Stationary baffle (built-in) Captive fastening screws (4) Transparent cover Magnetic test area Gasketed sensor area Wiring terminals NOTE: Orientation shown is for reference only, refer to General Location Notes and End View illustration below for alternate mounting reference. 3-3/8" (86 mm) Bottom view Duct wall 13/16" (21 mm) Exhaust tube (supplied) Remote Relay (7 120 VAC, for use with only) NOTE: Mount in separate electrical box within 3 ft (1 m) of device being controlled per NFPA /16" (30 mm) Test ports (2) provided for measuring airflow and for aerosol injection Square duct reference outline Sampling tube, ordered separately per duct width Gaskets (supplied) Alternate location (if appropriate) 1-1/2" (38 mm) AP&C-PAM SD BLU YEL ORG 13/16" (21 mm) WHT RED 18" Round duct outline (minimum diameter) Sampling tube, keyed for proper hole alignment with holes facing into airflow (template is provided for proper tube installation). (Housing is shown as position 2 per note 2 below.) Duct housing End View with Ducts and Tubes General Location Notes: 1. Testing performed under the auspices of the Fire Detection Institute (FDI) recommended when sampling tubes are not located vertically, that they be positioned horizontally in the upper half of the duct to account for possible stratification. 2. Three duct side mounting options are available as shown below. Mount housing at 90 to airflow for all orientations. Arrows indicate allowed airflow directions. 8" Square duct outline (minimum width) Exhaust tube 1 2 This device is a duct smoke housing. When provided with detector, it is designed to sample the air flow passing by it in the air duct to determine whether it contains unacceptable levels of smoke. The air handling system in which it is installed, variables such as smoke dilution and stratificationover which even the best designed systems have no control, and proper placement and positioning of the duct smoke detector, which is often compromised for practical reasons. For the reasons stated above, the effectiveness of this duct smoke detector cannot be warranted or guaranteed. Under no circumstances should this duct smoke detector be used or regarded to be a substitute for the building's Fire alarm and detection system to which this device is attached as a secondary detection device. DO NOT REMOVE THIS NOTICE! 3 This device is a duct smoke housing. When provided with detector, it is designed to sample the air flow passing by it in the air duct to determine whether it contains unacceptable levels of smoke. The effectiveness of a duct smoke detector is highly dependent upon: the design and operating conditions of the air handling system in which it is installed, variables such as smoke dilution and stratification over which even the best designed systems have no control, and proper placement and positioning of the duct smoke detector, which is often compromised for practical reasons. For the reasons stated above, the effectiveness of this duct smoke detector cannot be warranted or guaranteed. Under no circumstances should this duct smoke detector be used or regarded to be a substitute for the building's Fire alarm and detection system to which this device is attached as a secondary detection device. DO NOT REMOVE THIS NOTICE! DO NOT MOUNT ON BOTTOM OF DUCT 3 S /2012

94 Duct Sensor Location Reference Exhaust Fresh air Exhaust Damper Return air damper Do not locate sensor here Filter bank Do not locate sensor here Sensor OK Sensor OK Return Air Supply Air Additional Information. Refer to NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; and the NEMA Guide for Proper Use of Smoke Detectors in Duct Applications, and Installation Instructions Duct Sensor Location Considerations: 1. Proper duct smoke detection location must ensure adequate airflow within the duct housing. 2. Duct air velocity rating is 300 to 4000 ft/min (91 to 1220 m/min). Pressure differential between intake and exhaust tubes is required to be between to 1.55 inches of water (0.381 to mm). 3. Ensure accessibility for test and service. 4. Proper Locations: downstream side of filters to detect fires in the filters; in return ducts, ahead of mixing areas; upstream of air humidifier and cooling coil. 5. Other locations and orientations may be required for proper duct smoke detection depending on duct access, system design, and duct airflow testing. Contact your local Simplex product supplier for assistance. Locations to Avoid: 1. Where dampers closed for comfort control would interfere with airflow. 2. Next to outside air inlets (unless the intent is to monitor smoke entry from that area). 3. In return air damper branch ducts and mixing areas where airflow may be restricted. Specifications General Mechanical and Environmental Air Velocity Range (linear ft/min) 300 to 4000 ft/min (91 to 1220 m/min) Sensor Sensitivity Range 0.2% to 3.7% per foot of obscuration, selectable at host control panel UL Listed Temperature Range 32 F to 100 F (0 C to 38 C) Operating Temperature Range 32 F to 122 F (0 C to 50 C) Storage Temperature Range 0 F to 140 F (-18 C to 60 C) Humidity Range 10% to 95% RH, non-condensing Wiring Connections Terminal blocks, 18 to 12 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 3.31 mm 2 ) Housing Color Black base with clear cover Remote Status/Alarm LED and Test Station with Remote Status/Alarm LED Remote Alarm LED Current 1.2 ma, no impact to 24 VDC alarm current ( or ) Test Station Keyswitch Current 3.3 ma, no impact to 24 VDC alarm current ( ) Remote Alarm LED and Test Station Distance 250 ft (76 m) maximum Addressable Operation Data Communications IDNet or MAPNET II communications, auto-select, one address per housing; provides operating power to model Model with Supervised Multiple Relay Control, Requires Separate Fused 24 VDC from Fire Alarm Power Supply Input Voltage Standby Current Alarm Current Supervised Remote Relay Control Output VDC (24 VDC nominal) 3 24 VDC VDC; add 15 ma for each relay For use with relay only, quantity of 15 maximum; distance of 500 ft (152 m) maximum; requires (ref ) 10 k, 1/2 W end-of-line resistor Relay Output Ratings, Single Form C, use with Model Only Coil Current Relay Contacts Location Distance VDC, up to 15 maximum per relay control output 7 A at VDC & 120 VAC; VDC 500 ft (152 m) maximum to relay coils; locate relays within 3 ft (1 m) of device being controlled per NFPA 72 TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

95 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIRE DOOR HOLDERS DH SERIES Features Extremely low current draw. Only 20mA at 24V saves on power supplies and backup batteries New recessed mount for lowest profile look Dual voltage inputs in each units reduces stocking requirements Self-adjusting swivel catch-plate reduces installation time and adjusts to door alignment changes Optional extension rods make installation faster Low residual magnetism easily releases even on new ADA low pressure door closers Built-in transient protection Floor mount units available Description The DH Series Electromagnetic Fire Door Holders are constructed of the finest materials and workmanship available. Each door holder is made of durable diecast metal and offered in a powdercoated finish. Installation is easy with DH Series installation technique - an adhesive template assures alignment without secondary adjustments. No brackets are required for recessed, flush or surface mounting (the surface mounting box has three conduit ready entries). Plus, the new catch plate features two pivot points and two way adjustability to further ensure perfect alignment. Optional extension rods are also available for providing the proper gap distance between the door and wall. Dual Voltage Terminal Diagram LOW VOLTAGE Extension Rod Applications HIGH VOLTAGE The basic units offer superior reliability with built-in transient protection and low residual magnetism so they release easily even on new ADA low pressure door closers. S2985 R :100 MEA approved E CATALOG NUMBER 7905 NOT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES. Mircom reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice in prices, colours, materials, components, equipment, specifications and models and also to discontinue models. APPROVED

96 Specifications Model Voltage DC/mA AC/mA Terminals Holding Force 24V C&L 40 lbs. (18.1 kg) V - 20 C&L 35 lbs. (15.8 kg) Note: Holding forces listed in the aboce table correspond with shaded values. Non-shaded values are slightly less. Ordering Information Model DH24120SPC DH24120RPC DH24120FPC DH24120GPC1 DH24120GPC2 DHE1PC DHE2PC DHE3PC DHE4APC DHSBPC Description 24V AC/DC, 120 VAC Surface Mount, Electromagnetic Door Holder 24V AC/DC, 120 VAC Recess Mount, Electromagnetic Door Holder 24V AC/DC, 120 VAC Semi-Flush Mount, Electromagnetic Door Holder 24V AC/DC, 120 VAC Floor Mount Electromagnetic Door Holder, Single Coil 24V AC/DC, 120 VAC Floor Mount Electromagnetic Door Holder, Double Coil 1 Extension Rod 2 Extension Rod 3 Extension Rod 4 Adjustable Extension Rod Swivel Base NOT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES. Distributed by: Canada 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Telephone: (905) Fax: (905) U.S.A Witmer Industrial Estates Niagara Falls, NY Toll Free: (888) Fax Toll Free: (888) Web page: mail@mircom.com ISO 9001: 2000 REGISTERED CAT Rev. 5

97 System Accessories UL, CSFM Listed; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Fire Alarm Control Relays, Track Mount and Encapsulated; Model and 2088 Series Features UL listed under Standard 864 as Control Unit Accessory (UOXX) Track mount package availability: Single relay module or four relay module, with or without cover, with SPDT or DPDT contacts LED indicates relay module status Cover provide status LED viewing ports Multiple coil voltage inputs, diode polarized for DC Modules are track mounted with snap-apart feature design allowing the four relay module to be separated Single encapsulated SPDT relay package with color coded 18 AWG wire leads, available in two versions: (PAM-1) Provides diode polarized multiple input voltage ability and LED indication (PAM-SD) Provides a diode polarized 24 VDC coil with in/out wiring Description These multi-purpose control relays offer SPDT or DPDT, 10 A (or 7 A) contacts in a variety of mechanical packages. Models are available for coil operation by one of four input voltages allowing a single relay to be energized from a voltage source of VDC or VAC, 120 VAC, or 230 VAC (not available with ). Voltage selection is made by wiring to the appropriate input terminals or wire leads. Each relay model (except model ) contains a red LED which indicates that the relay is energized. Mounting options are varied for application flexibility. Track mounted relays may be snapped apart from a standard four-module assembly and used independently if desired. Specifications Track Mount Relays, see page 2 for dimensions Coil Voltage VAC/VDC, 120, or 230 VAC Coil Current SPDT models = 18 ma DPDT models = 40 ma Terminal Blocks Up to 14 AWG (2.08 mm 2 ) VAC Contact Ratings N.O. rated 1/6 HP, N.C. rated 1/8 HP 28 VDC 230 VAC Temperature Ratings UL Listed Range 32 F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) Operating Range -58 F to 185 F (-50 C to 85 C) Humidity 85% RH Non-condensing C1 NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO ON + T1 D2 R2 R1 0 18/ C1 NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO ON + T1 D2 R2 R1 0 18/ C1 NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO ON + T1 D2 R2 R1 0 18/ C1 NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO ON + T1 D2 R2 R1 0 18/ , MR204/C, Four DPDT Relay Package with Enclosure (shown with cover removed) WHT RED AP&C-PAM SD BLU YEL ORG Encapsulated Relay Package (typical of , PAM-1 and , PAM-SD) Specifications Continued Encapsulated Relays, see page 2 for dimensions 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ) color-coded Connections wire leads Relay Contact Ratings VAC, resistive Voltage VAC/VDC, 120, or 240 VAC Coil Ratings VAC/VDC, Current 120 or 230 VAC Relay VDC input, polarized, 15 ma Coil 24 VDC 7 A at VDC & Contact Ratings 120 VAC VDC Temperature Ratings UL Listed Range 32 F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) Operating Range -58 F to 185 F (-50 C to 85 C) Humidity 85% RH Non-condensing * Product listings are by Air Products & Controls Inc. ( per model numbers shown on page 2. These products are also available through Space Age Electronics Inc. ( with an SSU- prefix. S /2006 date

98 Relay Selection Chart Module Positions One Reference Number Air Products Model Relay Type MR-101/T SPDT MR-201/T DPDT MR-101/C SPDT MR-201/C DPDT Packaging Track mount, without cover Track mount with cover Dimensions 3-1/4 H x 2-1/8 W x 1-1/2 D (83 mm x 54 mm x 38 mm) 5-1/8 H x 3-1/8 W x 2-1/2 D (131 mm x 79 mm x 64 mm) Four MR-104/T SPDT MR-204/T DPDT MR-104/C SPDT MR-204/C DPDT Track mount, without cover Track mount with cover 3-1/4 H x 8-1/2 W x 1-1/2 D (83 mm x 216 mm x 38 mm) 5-1/8 H x 9-1/2 W x 2-1/2 D (131 mm x 241 mm x 64 mm) NA PAM PAM-SD SPDT Encapsulated, multi-voltage coil, color coded 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ) wire leads, with coil status LED Encapsulated, 24 VDC coil, color coded 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ) wire leads (no LED) 1-1/2 H x 1 W x 7/8 D (38 mm x 25.4 mm x 22 mm) 1-1/2 H x 1-3/16 W x 13/16 D (38 mm x 30 mm x 21 mm) Track Mount Relay Wiring Reference SPDT contacts rated VAC, resistive DPDT contacts rated VAC, resistive NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO Relay energized LED 0 18/ / Coil voltage (note polarity for DC) (18-35) VDC (18-35) VAC 120 VAC (-) (+) AC AC N V Coil voltage (note polarity for DC) (18-35) VDC (18-35) VAC 120 VAC (-) (+) AC AC N V 230 VAC V V 230 VAC V V Terminal strip connections SPDT models Terminal strip connections DPDT models Tyco, Simplex, and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco International Services AG or its affiliates in the U.S. and/or other countries. Include any other pertinent trademark information here. i.e.: NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Tyco Safety Products Westminster Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

99 Multi-Application Peripherals UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* IDNet and MAPNET II Communicating Devices, Individual Addressable Modules (IAMs) Features IDNet or MAPNET II addressable communications supply both data and power over a single wire pair to provide**: Supervised Class B monitoring of normally open, dry contacts Total wiring distance from IAM to supervision resistor(s) of up to 500 ft (152 m) Monitored connection is compatible with Simplex Overvoltage Protectors for outdoor wiring or electrically noisy applications For use in indoor locations up to 158 F (70 C) such as attic spaces or similar applications For use with following Simplex control panels: Model Series 4008, 4010, 4010ES, 4100U and 4100ES fire alarm control panels for IDNet communications Model Series 4100/4100U/4100ES, 4120, 4020, and 2120 Communicating Device Transponders (CDTs) equipped with MAPNET II communications Model : Enclosed design minimizes dust infiltration Mounts in standard single gang electrical box Screw terminals for wiring connections Visible LED flashes to indicate communications Optional covers are available to allow LED to be viewed after installation (requires mounting bracket, ordered separately) Model : Encapsulated design for extended exposure to high humidity (LED is not present on this model) Color coded 18 AWG leads for wiring IDNet communications provides current limited monitoring: Provides monitoring of tamper switch (supervisory) and waterflow switch (alarm) on same circuit using one point Available with IDNet communications only Multiple operation modes are available and are selectable at the control panel: Contact closure status can be tracked Momentary contact closure conditions can be selected at the panel to be latched or tracked (not available with the 2120 CDT) UL listed to Standard 864 Description - IDNET IN + +IDNET IN Supervised IAM (shown approximately 3/4 size) LISTED SIGNALING DEVICE ISSUE NO Supervised IAM (shown approximately 3/4 size) Individual addressable modules (IAMs) receive both power and communications from a two-wire MAPNET II or IDNet circuit. They provide location specific addressability to a single initiating device (such as single station smoke detector alarm contacts or heat detector contacts) or multiple devices at the same location by monitoring normally open dry contacts and the wiring to an end-of-line resistor. Model is packaged in a thermoplastic housing and provides screw terminal connections and a status indicating LED. Model is an encapsulated package with wire leads. It does not provide a status indicating LED. * These products have been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :223 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. S

100 Operation Contact Closure. Closure of the monitored contact(s) initiates an alarm or other response as programmed at the fire alarm control panel. An open in the monitored circuit wiring will cause a trouble to be reported. Panel Selections. Selections can be made at the control panel to maintain the alarm condition if the initiating device contacts are momentary, such as from a rate-of-rise heat detector, or to track the device contact status (not available with the 2120 CDT). Current Limited Operation Applications For use with IDNet communications only, these IAMs can provide quad-state sensing of normal, open circuit, short circuit, and current limited conditions. (Program type is T-sense. ) With the proper end-of-line and current limiting resistors, dual functions such as tamper switch and waterflow switch monitoring can be determined and communicated by a single addressable point. IAM Product Selection Model Description Supervised IAM, mounted in thermoplastic housing with screw terminals; see applicable options below Supervised IAM, encapsulated with wire leads Optional Trim Plates and Mounting Bracket for Model Model Description For semi-flush mounted box Trim plate with LED viewing window, requires mounting bracket, For surface mounted box includes mounting screws; galvanized steel Mounting bracket, mounts IAM to electrical box and provides screw holes for trim plate, required for optional trim plates End-of-Line Resistor Harnesses (ordered separately as required) Model Reference No. Description k, 1/2 W; Standard end-of-line resistor harness for N.O. contact supervision k, 1/2 W k, 1/2 W Use for current limited monitoring applications Specifications Electrical Power and Communications Input Requirements Wire Connections Reference Documents Wiring Distances Distance from IAM to Contacts MAPNET II or IDNet, auto selected, 1 address per IAM Normally open, dry contacts Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG wire (0.82 mm 2 to 2.08 mm 2 ) Color coded wire leads, 18 AWG (0.82 mm 2 ), 8 long (203 mm) Installation Instructions for ; for Field Wiring Diagrams for IDNet operation; for MAPNET II operation 500 ft (152 m) maximum without protectors 400 ft (122 m) maximum with Overvoltage Protectors Wiring Distance Reference per channel, MAPNET II or IDNet Communications 2500 ft (762 m) maximum from fire alarm control panel 10,000 ft (3048 m) maximum total wiring distance (including T-Taps) Mechanical Dimensions /16 W x 1-3/4 H x 1-1/4 D (40 mm x 44 mm x 32 mm) /16 W x 1-9/16 H x 9/16 D (40 mm x 40 mm x 14 mm) Housing Material, Black thermoplastic Encapsulation Material, Epoxy, beige Temperature Range 32 to 158 F (0 to 70 C); intended for indoor operation Humidity Range Up to 93% RH at 100 F (38 C) 2 S

101 Mounting Information IDNet supervised IAM Field wiring shown for reference - IDNET IN + +IDNET IN - LED viewing port Single gang electrical box 2-1/2" (64mm) minimum depth (supplied by others) Address setting under resealable label Single gang blank cover plate and mounting screws, for use when LED is not required to be externally viewed (supplied by others) Mounting Reference, Single Gang Blank Cover Plate Light pipe for LED viewing 4-1/4" (108 mm) 4-1/2" (114 mm) 2-1/2" (64 mm) , Trim plate for semi-flush mounted box 2-13/16" (72 mm) , Trim plate for surface mounted box Mounting bracket, ordered separately NOTE: These mounting plates require mounting bracket Optional Trim Plates and Mounting Bracket for Visible LED 3 S

102 SIGNALING DEVICE Mounting Information Address setting is at rear of housing Encapsulated Supervised IAM LISTED ISSUE NO. Single gang electrical box 2-1/2" (64mm) minimum depth (supplied by others) Single gang blank cover plate and mounting screws (supplied by others) Tyco is a registered trademark of Tyco International Services GmbH and is used under license. Simplex, the Simplex logo, IDNet, and MAPNET II are trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its affiliates and are used under license. SimplexGrinnell LP Westminster Westminster, MA USA S Tyco. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

103 Multi-Application Peripherals UL, ULC Listed; FM, CSFM, and MEA (NYC) Approved* IDNet Communicating Devices Model Relay IAM Features Individual Addressable Relay Module (Relay IAM): IDNet addressable control for use with Simplex fire alarm control panel models 4100ES/4100U, 4010ES, 4008, and 4010 A single addressable point provides control and status tracking of a Form C contact Low power latching relay design allows IDNet communications to supply both data and module power Compact, sealed construction: Enclosed design minimizes dust infiltration Mounts in standard 4 (102 mm) square electrical box Screw terminals for wiring connections Visible LED flashes to indicate communications Optional covers are available to allow LED to be viewed after installation UL listed to Standard 864 Description IDNet Relay IAMs allow fire alarm control panels to control a remotely located Form C contact using IDNet addressable communications for both data and module power. Typical applications would be for switching local power for control functions such as elevator capture, or control of HVAC components, pressurization fans, dampers, etc. Relay status is also communicated requiring only one device address. Product Selection Model Description Relay IAM Optional Trim Plates Model Description For semi-flush mounted box For surface mounted box Trim plate, galvanized steel, with LED viewing window; includes mounting screws * This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :223 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. Specifications Communications Relay IAM Power IDNet Relay IAM Package (shown approximately 1/2 size) IDNet communications, 1 address per device Supplied by IDNet communications Contact Ratings* (not rated for incandescent switching) Type Power-Limited Form C, SPDT 2 24 VDC, resistive from listed fire alarm 1 24 VDC, inductive supply Nonpower-Limited VAC, resistive * Provide circuit fusing and transient suppression as required per application. DC inductive loads can typically be diode suppressed; 120 VAC loads may require RC networks or varistors, depending on device type. Refer to Installation Instructions for additional information. Wire Connections IDNet Communications Wiring Reference Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG wire (0.82 to 2.08 mm 2 ) Up to 2500 ft (762 m) from control panel Up to 10,000 ft (3048 m) total wiring distance (including T-Taps) Compatible with Simplex Overvoltage Protectors Dimensions 4 ⅛ H x 4 ⅛ W x 1 ⅜ D (105 mm x 105 mm x 35 mm) Housing Material Black thermoplastic Mounting Plate Sheet metal, galvanized Temperature Range 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C), intended for indoor operation Humidity Range Up to 93% RH at 100 F (38 C) S /2012

104 Relay IAM Mounting Information Address setting under resealable label 4" (102 mm) square box, 2-1/8" (54 mm) minimum depth, RACO 232 or equal (supplied by others) Relay IAM Double gang blank cover plate and mounting screws, for use when LED is not required to be externally viewed (supplied by others) Mounting Reference, Double Gang Blank Cover Plate Light pipe for LED viewing 4-9/16" (116 mm) 4-5/16" (109 mm) 4-9/16" (116 mm) , Trim plate for semi-flush mounted box 4-5/16" (109 mm) , Trim plate for surface mounted box Optional Trim Plates for Visible LED TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

105 Tru ealer t Isola tor TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RE LAY CONTACT S MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MA X 24 VD C INDOOR DRY AP PLIC AT ION MADE IN CL FL SI MPLEX TIM E R EC ORDER CO. ON WESTMINSTER, MA TrueAlert Isolator TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RE LAY CONTACT S MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MA X 24 VD C INDOOR DRY AP PLIC AT ION MADE IN CL FL SI MPLEX TIM E R EC ORDER CO. ON WESTMINSTER, MA E ADDRE SS MS B E ADDRE SS MS B Tr u eale rt I solato r TRUEALERT ISOLATO R INST. INS TR R EV DA TE CODE: RE LAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. ON WEST MINSTER, M A TrueAlert Isolator TRUEALERT ISOLATO R INST. INS TR R EV DA TE CODE: RE LAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. ON WEST MINSTER, M A E ADDRESS MS B E ADDRESS MS B SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. WESTMINSTER, MA TrueAlert Addressable Notification Appliances UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; TrueAlert Addressable Isolator+ MEA (NYC) Approved* Module, Model Features Isolator+ modules provide short circuit isolation for TrueAlert addressable notification appliance wiring:** Power and communications are supplied by advanced addressable notification controlled by IDNAC Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs) from Simplex 4100ES fire alarm control panel EPS/EPS+ power supplies (and 4009 IDNAC Repeaters)** Operation is also compatible with legacy TrueAlert SLCs from TrueAlert Power Supplies (TPS) or TrueAlert Addressable Controllers (4009T) Dual port design accepts communications and power from either port and automatically isolates one port from the other when a short circuit occurs Mounts in standard 4 (102 mm) square electrical box, 2 ⅛ (54 mm) deep UL listed to Standard 864 Status diagnostics: On-board yellow LED provides module status, can indicate communications poll or be activated from panel Isolators report faults to the host control panel (method varies with system connection type) Information received at the control panel allows identification of the short circuit location: 4100ES control panels with EPS Power Supplies will be advised of individual appliances disabled due to activated isolators; (also true of legacy panels with TPS or when connected to TrueAlert Addressable Controller using RUI communications) Other control panels controlling TrueAlert Addressable Controllers do not recognize appliance addresses but will receive a report of an open circuit channel trouble due to activated isolators Class B (Style 4) IDNAC SLC wiring: Up to 12 Isolator+ modules can be connected per IDNAC SLC and up to 6 Isolator+ modules can be connected directly together in series on the same branch Class A (Style 6) IDNAC SLC wiring: For Class A operation, up to 6 Isolator+ modules can be connected per SLC loop General channel loading rules: Isolator+ modules require one address and are rated as 4 unit loads TrueAlert addressable notification appliances are a single unit load ** Use of TrueAlert in this document refers to both TrueAlert and TrueAlert ES notification appliances. Use of IDNAC SLCs also refers to operation of TrueAlert SLCs. 4100ES Control Panel with EPS Power Supply PO RT PO RT PORT PORT PO RT PO RT PORT PORT TrueAlert Isolator+ PORT PORT TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS ON Typical TrueAlert Isolator+ Module Application One-Line Drawing Including Module Detail Introduction IDNAC Addressable Notification SLCs (and legacy TrueAlert SLCs) are internally isolated from each other. In the event of a channel wiring short circuit, the channel will safely shut down and then monitor the wiring for restoration to normal when the short is repaired. However, within the branch and T tap wiring of an IDNAC channel, the use of TrueAlert Isolator+ Modules can provide additional isolation that can reduce the quantity of TrueAlert addressable appliances impacted by a short circuit. Short Circuit Isolation. An internal isolation relay allows the Isolator+ module to separate shorted and/or disabled wiring from functioning wiring to optimize the available appliances. Isolator+ module status is communicated to the control panel providing assistance in identifying the shorted wiring location. Convenient Location. The Isolator+ Module mounts in a standard 4 square, 2 ⅛ deep electrical box, allowing isolators to be conveniently located on the IDNAC SLC channel where the local wiring could most benefit. * This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :214 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster E MSB S /2013

106 TrueAlert Isolator TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL AD DRES S S IM PLE X T IME RE CO RDE R CO. ON MSB WESTMINSTER, MA True Alert Iso lator TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL AD DRES S S IM PLE X T IME RE CO RDE R CO. ON WESTMINSTER, MA MSB True Alert Iso lator TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTACTS 3 AMP 30 VDC IN DOO R DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. WESTMINSTER, MA True Alert Iso lator TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: MODULE 15 ma MAX 24 VDC ADDRESS ON MSB RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC IN DOO R DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. ON WESTMINSTER, MA MSB TrueAlert Isolator+ Example 1 Branch Protection. The diagram below illustrates the addition of Isolator+ Modules to IDNAC SLC wiring located at the start of each branch. With Isolator+ modules added in these locations, there will be an increase in overall system operation in the event of a short circuit. Branch Short Circuits. Without Isolator+ modules, if a short circuit occurred on a branch connection, the entire channel would be inoperative, the same as occurs with conventional Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) operation. With the addition of Isolator+ modules, short circuits would only disable those appliances connected electrically beyond the Isolator+ module. Since short circuits are sometimes encountered during initial wiring installations, the use of Isolator+ modules can also assist in finding those wiring faults, allowing a decrease in the total installation and checkout time. Address Allocation. For the example shown below, there are 18 notification appliances which would occupy a total of 18 addresses at the 4100ES control panel. There are also 4 Isolator+ modules, each requiring an address. The total addresses count on this IDNAC SLC would be = 22 addresses. SLC Loading. Isolator+ modules are powered from the IDNAC SLC and they require an additional loading factor with each Isolator+ designated as four unit loads. Each TrueAlert addressable appliance, whether strobe, horn, or combination unit, is only one address and only one unit load. The total unit loads for this example is 18 appliances + 4 Isolator+ modules (4 unit loads each) = = 34 unit loads. Channel Capacity. Capacity may vary with IDNAC SLC control, but typically is up to 63 addresses and up to 75 unit loads. This example is not fully loaded and could probably accommodate additional appliances. However, the appliance currents also need to be considered. (EPS IDNAC SLCs and legacy TPS SLCs are rated 3 A full load. TrueAlert Addressable Controller channels are rated 2.5 A full load.) TrueAlert Isolator+ Example 1, One-Line Diagram Showing Individual Branch Protection TrueAlert Isolator+ Module PORT PORT E Branch 4 Terminal cabinet, located within 10 ft (3 m) of 4100ES Control Panel Branch 3 PORT PORT E Branch 2 PORT PORT E TrueAlert Isolator+ Module PORT PORT E Branch 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel ES Control Panel with EPS Power Supply providing IDNAC SLCs TrueAlert addressable notification appliances shown wired as Class B, "T" tapped 2 S /2013

107 T rue Alert Iso lator TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS S IM PL EX T IM E RE COR DE R CO. ON MSB WESTMINSTER, MA TrueAle rt Isola tor TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DA TE CODE: RE LAY CO NTA CT S MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDO OR D RY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADD RESS S IMPLEX TIME RECOR DE R CO. ON MS B WESTMINSTER, MA TRUEALERT IS OLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS S IMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. ON MSB W ESTMI NSTER, MA TRUEALERT IS OLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS S IMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. ON MSB W ESTMI NSTER, MA TrueAle rt Isola tor TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE : RELAY CONTACTS MO DULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VD C INDOOR DRY APPLIC ATION MAD E IN CL FL ADDRESS SIMP LE X TIME REC ORDER CO. ON MSB WESTMINSTER, MA TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: TrueAle rt Isola tor TRUEALER T ISOLATOR INST. INSTR R EV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTA CTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY A PPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS SIMPLEX TIME REC ORDER CO. ON MSB WESTMINSTER, M A TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTA CTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY A PPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS SIMPLEX TIME REC ORDER CO. ON MSB WESTMINSTER, M A RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VD C 15 ma MA X 24 VD C INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. ON MSB WES TMINS TE R, M A TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL S IMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. ON W ESTMI NSTER, MA TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: ADDRESS MSB RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS S IMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. ON MSB W ESTMI NSTER, MA TrueAlert Isolator+ Example 2 T Tap Level Isolation. The one-line diagram directly below shows Isolator+ modules located at the start of each T tap on a single branch of a single IDNAC SLC, all wired Class B (Style 4). With this approach, each tap is isolated from short circuits that may occur out on the other taps. Channel Loading. Total addresses: 15. Total unit loads: 11 appliances + 4 Isolator+ modules (4 unit loads each) = = 27 unit loads. TrueAlert Isolator+ Example 3 Class A Wiring Isolation. Example 3 (at the bottom of this page) illustrates an optimized Class A (Style 6) IDNAC SLC with each notification appliance connected between an Isolator+ module. With this connection, a single short circuit between Isolator+ modules would only disable one TrueAlert notification appliance. (Please note that Isolator+ modules can be applied as desired, the configuration shown is to illustrate operation and is not required.) Channel Loading. Total addresses = 11. Total unit loads = 5 appliances + 6 Isolator+ modules (4 units loads each) = = 29 unit loads. TrueAlert Isolator+ Example 2, One-Line Diagram Showing Individual T Tap Protection TrueAlert Isolator+ Modules PORT PORT E To additional addressable notification appliances PORT PORT E PORT PORT E PORT PORT E To IDNAC SLC branch termination cabinet TrueAlert addressable notification appliances shown wired as Class B, "T" tapped To additional addressable notification appliances TrueAlert Isolator+ Example 3, One-Line Diagram Showing Class A/Style 6 with Isolators Single IDNAC channel shown for reference TrueAlert Isolator+ Modules True Alert Iso lator+ TrueAlert Isolator+ True Alert Iso lator+ PORT PORT E PORT PORT PORT PORT E E 4100ES Control Panel with EPS Power Supply and Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) True Alert Iso lator+ PORT PORT E TrueAlert Isolator+ PORT PORT E True Alert Iso lator+ PORT PORT E TrueAlert addressable notification appliances 3 S /2013

108 TrueAlert Isolator+ Mounting Information 4" (102 mm) square box, 2-1/8" (54 mm) minimum depth, RACO 232 or equal (by others) TrueAlert Isolator+ PORT PORT TRUEALERT ISOLATOR INST. INSTR REV DATE CODE: RELAY CONTACTS MODULE 3 AMP 30 VDC 15 ma MAX 24 VDC INDOOR DRY APPLICATION MADE IN CL FL ADDRESS SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO. ON WESTMINSTER, MA E MSB TrueAlert Isolator Module Address setting dipswitch TrueAlert Isolator+ Module Front View 4" square cover plate, RACO 752 or equal (by others) Specifications Electrical Isolated Circuit Wire Resistance Voltage Range Current, Isolated Mode Address Requirements Unit Load Requirements IDNAC SLC Loading Class B Class A Mechanical Dimensions Housing Material Mounting Plate Material Temperature Range 1.5 maximum, measured from any Isolator+ port to the farthest appliance in the protected segment 18 to 32 VDC, provided from TrueAlert channel VDC 1 Address per Isolator+ Module 4 Unit loads per Isolator+ Module Up to 12 Isolator+ modules total with up to 6 being connected directly together in series on the same branch Up to 6 Isolator+ modules total on the loop 4 ⅛ H x 4 ⅛ W x 1 ⅜ D (105 mm x 105 mm x 35 mm) Black thermoplastic Sheet metal, galvanized 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) intended for indoor operation Humidity Range Up to 93% RH at 100 F (38 C) Wiring Connections Screw terminals for 18 to 12 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 3.31 mm 2 ) Reference Installation Instructions Panel Data Sheets 4100ES S IDNAC Repeater S TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

109 Multi-Application Peripherals UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Audible Notification Appliances Speakers, 25 or 70.7 VRMS, Wall or Ceiling Mount Features Fire alarm speakers with models for ceiling or wall mount: Four inch cone (102 mm) provides high quality tone and voice reproduction Multi-tapped design provides output power of 1/4, 1/2, 1, or 2 W with either 25 or 70.7 VRMS input In/out wiring terminals for 18 AWG to 12 AWG Mounts to 4 square outlet box, 1-1/2 deep with 1-1/2 deep box extension Capacitor input for connection to supervised notification appliance circuits Rugged, high impact, flame retardant thermoplastic housings UL listed to Standard 1480 ULC listed to Standard S541, refer to page 4 for required minimum wattage tap per housing type Rectangular housing models feature: Appearance that complements TrueAlert strobes and speaker/strobes Red or white housings with FIRE lettering for surface or semi-flush wall mount Optional matching adapter skirts for covering surface mounted electrical boxes* Optional red wire guard Round housing models feature: Off-white color (no lettering) for flush mount on ceiling or wall Compatible with optional tile bridge Introduction Simplex 4902 Series speakers provide high quality sound for emergency fire alarm use as well as for background music. The moisture-repellent speaker is designed for smooth frequency response with minimal distortion. The multi-tapped speaker transformer accommodates either 25 or 70.7 VRMS and provides an output of from 1/4 to 2 W to provide flexibility for satisfying the requirements of the installed conditions. Rectangular housing models are for surface or semi-flush wall mount applications. Round housing models are typically for ceiling applications but can be wall mounted if desired. The rectangular housing speakers are designed to compliment the TrueAlert family of strobes and speaker/strobes, providing conventional, non-addressable speaker operation. * Refer to page 2 for guard and adapter skirt listing. This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :242 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. Rectangular Wall Mount Speakers are Available as Red with White Fire Lettering and White with Red Fire Lettering Round Speakers are Available in Off-White (no lettering) Specifications Dimensions, Rectangular Wall Mount Housings Housing Dimensions 5-1/8 H x 5 W x 1-1/2 D (130 mm x 127 mm x 38 mm) Depth into Box 2-3/4 (70 mm) Dimensions, Round Housings Housing Dimensions 7-1/2 Diameter, 1/2 D (191 mm x 13 mm) Depth into Box 2-3/4 (70 mm) General Specifications Input Voltage 25 or 70.7 VRMS Power Taps 1/4, 1/2, 1, and 2 W Input Terminal Ratings 18 to 12 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 3.31 mm 2 ) Frequency Response Fire Alarm 400 to 4000 Hz General Signaling 125 to 12 khz Sound Output See information on page 4 Temperature Range 32 to 100 F (0 to 38 C) Humidity Range 10% to 95% RH from 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) S /2009

110 Product Selection Speakers Model* Description Dimensions (CA) Rectangular housing, wall mount Red with white FIRE lettering (CA) speaker White with red FIRE lettering (CA) Round housing speaker, ceiling or wall mount Off-white (no lettering) 5-1/8 H x 5 W x 1-1/2 D (130 mm x 127 mm x 38 mm) 7-1/2 Diameter x 1/2 D (191 mm x 13 mm) * ULC listed model are designated with a CA suffix ( CA). Refer to Installation Instructions for non-suffix model numbers and to Installation Instructions for CA suffix model numbers. Mounting Adapters Model Description Dimensions Red White Surface mount adapter skirt; (not ULC listed) Use to cover surface mounted 1-1/2 deep box with 1-1/2 deep extension external to wall (see diagram on page 3) 5-3/8 H x 5-1/4 W x 3-3/16 D (136 mm x 133 mm x 81 mm) Total surface depth with speaker = 4-5/8 (117 mm) Tile bridge for Speaker See diagram on page Adapter Plate, red, for mounting to box (typically for retrofit, may be mounted vertical or horizontal) Red mounting box, requires Adapter Plate Covers and Guard 8-5/16 x 5-3/4 x Thick (211 mm x 146 mm x 1.5 mm) 7-7/8" x 5-1/8" x 2-3/4" D (200 mm x 130 mm x 70 mm) Model Description Dimensions Red speaker cover with white FIRE lettering Interchangeable with 5-1/8 H x 5 W x 1-1/2 D White speaker cover with red FIRE lettering TrueAlert horns (130 mm x 127 mm x 38 mm) Red wire guard with mounting plate; compatible with semi-flush or surface mounted boxes; for use with 4 square electrical box mounting hole patterns only (UL listed by Space Age Electronics Inc.) Wall Mount Speakers, Installation Reference 6-1/16 H x 6-1/16 W x 3-1/8 D (154 mm x 154 mm x 79 mm) Mounting requires a 4" (102 mm) square box, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, with a 4" box extension, 1-1/2" deep, by others Speaker assembly Wiring input terminals and speaker tap selection are accessible from rear of speaker housing Transparent speaker housing Removable cover (tool required) 2 S /2009

111 Round Speaker Installation Reference (typically ceiling mount, can be wall mounted) 4" square, 1-1/2" deep box with 1-1/2" extension (by others) Wiring input terminals and speaker tap selection are accessible from rear of speaker housing Front View Tile Bridge Dimensions 3-3/4" (95 mm) square cutout, centered on plate 0.024" thick sheet metal, folded with 1/2" lip each side 1/2" (13 mm) 13-3/8" (340 mm) 1/4" diameter (6 mm) holes, 4 places 6-11/16" (170 mm) 23-11/16" (602 mm) Surface Mounted Speaker Reference (Adapter Skirts are Not ULC listed) 4" (102 mm) square box, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep with conduit shown for reference 4" (102 mm) square box extension, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep Optional Wire Guard Speaker assembly Surface mount adapter skirt, 3-3/16" deep: , Red; , White Conduit knockouts are provided on all four sides Wall surface 3 S /2009

112 Speaker Sound Output Specifications Sound Output 10 ft (~3 m) per UL 1480 Reverberant Chamber Testing Selected Tap Model Type Input Voltage 1/4 W 1/2 W 1 W 2 W VRMS 80 dba 83 dba 85 dba 88 dba Rectangular Housing VRMS 79 dba 82 dba 85 dba 88 dba Round Housing 25 or 70.7 VRMS 79 dba 82 dba 85 dba 88 dba Sound Output 3 m (~10 ft) per ULC S541 Anechoic Chamber Testing Model Type Input Voltage Selected Tap 1 W* 1/4 W 1/2 W (see note) 2 W* (see note) CA CA Rectangular Housing* 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS 77 dba 80 dba 83 dba 86 dba CA Round Housing* 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS 79 dba 82 dba 85 dba 89 dba * NOTE: ULC Fire Alarm applications require use of 1 W or 2 W tap for Round Housing speakers; and 2 W tap for Rectangular Housing speakers. Speaker Polar Dispersion Reference (per ULC S541 Anechoic Chamber Testing) Attenuation Angle -3 db 30 off-axis -6 db 55 off-axis Adapter Plate Installation Reference Adapter Plate Box Optional Wire Guard (shown here for reference only, can be used on other mounting options) Speaker assembly Adapter Plate Tyco is a registered trademark of Tyco International Services GmbH and is used under license. Simplex, the Simplex logo, and TrueAlert are trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its affiliates and are used under license. Tyco Safety Products Westminster Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

113 TrueAlert Addressable Notification Appliances UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Multi-Candela Speaker/Visible (S/V) Appliances Features Individually addressed and controlled multi-candela S/V (speaker/visible) notification appliances provide: Multi-candela xenon strobe with synchronized 1 Hz flash rate and with intensity programmable from the control panel or jumper selected as 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Advanced addressable notification controlled by IDNAC SLCs from Simplex 4100ES fire alarm control panels with EPS/EPS+ power supplies (and 4009 IDNAC Repeaters) providing regulated 29 VRMS allowing strobes to operate with lower current even under battery backup Wiring supervision to each strobe allowing T-tapped connections for Class B circuits to simplify wiring (Class A circuits require in/out wiring) TrueAlert Device Reports at the control panel detailing appliance point ID, custom label, type, and candela setting (see sample on page 2) Magnet test diagnostics to assist checkout and testing of appliances and wiring Compatibility with ADA requirements; (refer to important installation information on page 3) Compatibility with legacy TrueAlert addressable systems for upgrade and replacement (see page 4) UL listed to Standard 1971 and ULC-S526* LED indicator and magnet test feature: Appliance LED can be selected to display each polling cycle to indicate appliance supervision In diagnostic mode, the magnet test pulses the LED to indicate appliance address AND pulses to indicate the intensity selection; a brief output of the strobe is also selectable to confirm operation Mechanical design features: Rugged, high impact, flame retardant thermoplastic housings are available for wall or ceiling mount Wall mount housings are available in red or white Wall mount options include electrical box adapters, separate covers to convert color, and red wire guards Ceiling mount housing is white Audible notification appliance (speaker): High quality voice and tone reproduction with taps for 1/4, 1/2, 1, or 2 W, at 25 or 70.7 VRMS Speakers have capacitor input for connection to DC supervised NACs and are wired separately from strobes UL listed to Standard 1480 and ULC-S541* * See page 2 for additional listing details and wire guard listings. This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :322 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. Wall and Ceiling Mount S/Vs with Addressable Strobes Description Multi-Candela TrueAlert S/Vs with speaker and addressable strobe provide convenient installation to standard electrical boxes with extensions. The strobe is individually addressed and individually controlled with power, supervision, and control supplied from a Simplex fire alarm control panel providing IDNAC Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). (See compatibility list on page 4.) Speakers are wired separately. Strobe Application Reference Proper selection of visible notification is dependent on occupancy, location, local codes, and proper applications of: the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72), ANSI A117.1; the appropriate model building code: BOCA, ICBO, or SBCCI; and the application guidelines of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). IDNAC SLC Operation Advantage TrueAlert S/V Appliances with Addressable Strobes on IDNAC SLCs provide visible notification using a single two-wire circuit that also confirms connection to the individual notification appliance s electronic circuit. This operation increases circuit supervision integrity by providing supervision that extends beyond the appliance wiring connections. S /2013

114 IDNAC SLC Operation Advantage (Cont d) Reduced current allows efficient IDNAC SLC operation. With IDNAC SLCs, a constant 29 VRMS source voltage is maintained, even during battery standby, allowing strobes to operate at higher voltage with lower current and ensuring a consistent current draw and voltage drop margin under both primary power and secondary battery standby. Efficiencies include wiring distances up to 2 to 3 times farther than with conventional notification, or support for more appliances per IDNAC SLC, or use of smaller gauge wiring, or combinations of these benefits, all providing installation and maintenance savings with high assurance that appliances that operate during normal system testing will operate during worst case alarm conditions. Reducing Installation and Testing Time. With separate controls on the same two-wire SLC, installation time and expense for both retrofit and new construction can be significantly reduced. When Class B wiring is used, wiring can be T tapped, allowing more savings in distance, wire, conduit (size and utilization), and overall installation efficiency. Use of the magnet test feature improves installation efficiency. TrueAlert device reports conveniently identify information about each connected appliance. Product Selection TrueAlert Addressable Wiring Isolator Isolator Model is available for remote mounting on TrueAlert addressable circuits to isolate short circuited wiring from functioning wiring. (Refer to data sheet S for additional information.) TrueAlert Addressable Diagnostics Test Features. Controllers can be selected to pulse each appliance s LED when it receives a supervision poll. When the controller is selected for diagnostic mode, the appliance magnet test feature provides a response at the individual appliance being tested. Silent Appliance Magnet Test. In this test mode, in response to the magnet test, the appliance LED pulses sequentially to conveniently indicate the appliance s address. Operational Appliance Testing. In this test mode, after the address is indicated by pulsing the appliance LED, the strobe will briefly flash to indicate proper operation. TrueStart Instrument Two (TSIT). The 2nd generation of the Simplex TrueStart Test Instrument adds testing of IDNAC SLC wiring and TrueAlert (and TrueAlert ES) appliances to its ability to test IDCs, NACs, and IDNet communications before connection to the control panel. Please contact your local Simplex representative for additional information. Multi-Candela Addressable S/Vs Model Lettering Listings Housing Color Mounting Dimensions Description White FIRE Red 7 ¼ H x 5 W x 2 ⅝ D UL & ULC Wall Red FIRE White (184 mm x 127 mm x 67 mm) Red FIRE Blank Red ALERT UL Red FIRE ULC White Ceiling 7 ½ (191 mm) diameter speaker housing, ½ (13 mm) deep; lens extends 2 ⅝ (67 mm) above housing; extension into box = 2 ¾ (70 mm) Multi-Tapped Speaker with Multi-Candela Addressable Strobe; intensity selectable as: 15, 30, 75, or 110 candela Wall Mount S/V Adapters, Replacement Covers, Wire Guard; Ceiling Mount Tile Bridge Model Description Dimensions Surface Mount Red Adapter Skirt Required when mounting to surface 7 ¾ H x 5 ⅜ W x D mounted electrical box, 4 square, 1 ½ (197 mm x 137 mm x 81 mm) Surface Mount White Adapter Skirt deep with 1 ½ deep extension depth with S/V = 5 ⅞ (149 mm) Adapter Plate, red, required to mount S/V on mounting box (typically for retrofit) Mounting Box, red, for surface or flush mount, requires adapter plate (this box may be available for retrofit applications) " H x 5 ¾" W x Thick (211 mm x 146 mm x 1.5 mm) 7 ⅞" H x 5 ⅛" W x 2 ¾" D (200 mm x 130 mm x 70 mm) Red Wall Mount S/V Replacement Cover with white FIRE lettering 7 ¼ H x 5 W x 1 ⅜ D White Wall Mount S/V Replacement Cover with red FIRE lettering (184 mm x 127 mm x 35 mm) Red Wire Guard for Wall Mount S/V; with mounting plate, compatible with surface and semi-flush boxes (UL listed by Space Age Electronics Inc.) 8 ⅜ H x W x 3 ¼ D (213 mm x 154 mm x 79 mm) Tile Bridge for Ceiling Mount S/Vs See diagram on page 3 TrueAlert Device Reports Reference Service Port Page 1 REPORT 5 : TrueAlert Device Report 12:34:56am MON 20-May-13 POINT ID CUSTOM LABEL DEVICE TYPE CANDELA T Location Label... up to 40 characters V/O 15 T Break Room 5 S/V 110 T Boiler Room S/V 75 T Elec. Room 7 S/V 30 2 S /2013

115 Wall Mount Installation Reference Adapter Plate Wiring input terminals and speaker tap selection are accessible from rear Mounting to Box Box Standard Electrical Box Mounting 4" (102 mm) square box, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, with a 4" square box extension, 1-1/2" deep, by others Speaker Directional Characteristics; NOTE: Applicable for Wall Mount or Ceiling Mount S/V Sound Pressure Level (db) at 10 ft (3 m) khz 4 khz Angular Displacement (Degrees) on Horizontal Axis Removable cover (tool required) Address DIPswitch LED indicator Magnetic test location Intensity selection plug, accessible only from rear of housing; factory setting is FACP, controlled by panel Strobe intensity viewing slot Strobe assembly Transparent housing and lens assembly Speaker assembly FACP Surface Mounting Reference Showing Optional Wire Guard Surface mount conduit and box shown for reference 4" (102 mm) square box profile, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep with 1-1/2" extension Optional Wire Guard S/V Surface mount adapter skirt, 3-3/16" (81 mm) deep, required for this mounting method: , Red; , White (conduit knockouts are provided on all four sides) IMPORTANT! INSTALLATION MOUNTING HEIGHT REFERENCE box outline C L 82" (2.1 m) minimum 78-1/2" (2 m) minimum 4" square box outline 4" (102 mm) 1-1/2" (38 mm) NFPA 72 requires that the entire lens be not less than 80" and not greater than 96" above the finished floor. Ceiling Mount S/V Install Reference and Tile Bridge Dimensions 4" (102 mm) square, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep box with 1-1/2" extension (by others) Wiring input terminals and speaker tap selection are accessible from rear of speaker housing 1/2" (13 mm) 0.024" thick sheet metal, folded with 1/2" lip each side Tile Bridge 3-3/4" (95 mm) square cutout, centered on plate Magnetic test location Magnet test location LED indicator Bottom view 23-11/16" (602 mm) Address DIPswitch is behind strobe assembly; select address before inserting into housing 15 FACP Strobe intensity viewing slot Intensity selection plug, accessible only from rear of lens housing; factory setting is FACP, controlled by panel 1/4" diameter (6 mm) holes, 4 places 13-3/8" (340 mm) 6-11/16" (170 mm) 3 S /2013

116 TrueAlert Strobe and IDNAC SLC Controller Compatibility Reference Compatible Controller Data Sheet Reference Controller Output IDNAC SLC Output Voltage Appliance Voltage Design Reference 4100ES with EPS+ or EPS Power Supply S IDNAC Repeater S IDNAC SLC 29 VRMS (regulated) 23 VRMS (with 6 VRMS drop) S/V Specifications Common Specifications (see page 2 for appliance dimensions) Environmental 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C); 10% to 93%, non-condensing at 100 F (38 C) Connections Terminal blocks for 18 AWG to 12 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 3.31 mm 2 ); two wires per terminal for in/out wiring Installation Instructions Speaker General Specifications Input Voltage Power Taps Frequency Response 25 or 70.7 VRMS, see Note 1 below ¼, ½, 1, and 2 W Fire Alarm 400 to 4000 Hz General Signaling 125 to 12 khz Speaker Output 10 ft (3 m) (see Note below) Wattage Tap ¼ W ½ W 1 W 2 W UL Listed Models, Reverberant Chamber Test, per UL dba 79 dba 82 dba 85 dba Wall Mount Models and , Anechoic Chamber Test, per ULC-S dba 80 dba 83 dba 86 dba* Ceiling Mount Model , Anechoic Chamber Test per ULC-S VRMS Input 81.6 dba 84.3 dba 87.1 dba* 89.7 dba* 70.7 VRMS Input 80.9 dba 84.1 dba 87.3 dba* 90.2 dba* * NOTE: Select taps as indicated to satisfy the ULC fire alarm applications requirement of 85 dba minimum Polar Dispersion Reference (per ULC-S541 Anechoic Chamber Testing) Strobe Specifications Typical Operating Voltage Range Attenuation Angle Attenuation Angle -3 db +/- 30 off-axis -6 db +/- 55 off-axis 23 VRMS to 31 VRMS, Special Application (see below for 17 VRMS rating) 1 Hz; with up to 46 synchronized strobes maximum per NAC; maximum 30 Ω resistance between appliances Candela Setting 15 cd 30 cd 75 cd 110 cd 23 VRMS Current Ratings, for connection to IDNAC Addressable SLCs 50 ma 75 ma 137 ma 190 ma 23 VRMS Current Ratings, for connection to IDNAC Addressable SLCs 60 ma 92 ma 180 ma 240 ma Flash Rate and Synchronized SLC Loading Wall Mount Appliances Ceiling Mount Appliances Note: Speakers are for connection to conventional fire alarm audio circuits. Anechoic speaker output ratings are typically more representative of actual installed sound output. TrueAlert Strobe LEGACY Compatibility Reference Compatible Controller Data Sheet Reference Controller Output Available Strobe Intensity Appliance Voltage Minimum 4100ES or 4100U with TrueAlert Power Supply S TPS, Remote TrueAlert Power Supply S TrueAlert Addressable Controller (4009T) S TrueAlert Addressable SLC 15, 30, 75, and 110 cd 17 VRMS Electrical Ratings Difference for Retrofit Applications 17 VRMS Current Ratings, use when connected to TrueAlert Addressable SLCs per above Voltage Range 17 VRMS to 31 VRMS, Special Application Candela Setting 15 cd 30 cd 75 cd 110 cd Wall Mount Appliances 64 ma 98 ma 187 ma 253 ma Ceiling Mount Appliances 76 ma 128 ma 242 ma 328 ma TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

117 UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved* TrueAlert Addressable Notification Appliances Visible Notification Appliances, Wall Mount Multi-Candela Strobes, Model Series 49VO Features Individually addressed and controlled multi-candela TrueAlert ES V/O (visible only) notification appliances provide: Multi-candela xenon strobe with synchronized 1 Hz flash rate and with intensity programmable from the control panel or jumper selected as 15, 30, 75, 110, 135, or 185 cd Advanced addressable notification controlled by IDNAC SLCs from Simplex 4100ES fire alarm control panels with EPS/EPS+ power supplies (and 4009 IDNAC Repeaters) providing regulated 29 VRMS allowing strobes to operate with lower current even under battery backup Wiring supervision to each appliance allowing T-tapped connections for Class B circuits to simplify wiring (Class A circuits require in/out wiring) TrueAlert Device Reports at the control panel detailing appliance point ID, custom label, type, and candela setting (see sample on page 3) Magnet test diagnostics to assist checkout and testing of appliances and wiring and Electrical test point access without removing cover Compatibility with ADA requirements; (refer to important installation information on page 3) Compatibility with legacy TrueAlert addressable systems for upgrade and replacement (see page 4) Listed to UL Standard 1971 and ULC Standard S526 LED Indicator and magnet test feature: Appliance LED can be selected to display each polling cycle to indicate appliance supervision When the controller is in diagnostic mode, the magnet test pulses the LED to indicate appliance address and can be set to also briefly flash the strobe Mechanical design features include: Rugged, high impact, flame retardant thermoplastic housing in red with white letters or white with red letters, with clear lens, available with FIRE, ALERT, FEU, FIRE/FEU, or blank lettering Separate covers are available to change appliance type on-site or for replacement; covers can be easily removed without disturbing the connected housing and avoiding trouble conditions A separate mounting plate allows wiring to be completed before appliance is mounted; use with single gang, double gang, or 4-inch square box, flush or surface mount In/out wiring terminals for 18 AWG to 12 AWG Optional mounting adapters are available to cover surface mounted electrical boxes and to adapt to Simplex boxes * These products have been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :0373 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. TrueAlert ES Addressable Strobes are Available in Red with White Lettering and White with Red Lettering Description TrueAlert ES addressable strobes are individually addressed visible notification appliances that receive power, supervision, and control signals from a Simplex fire alarm control panel providing IDNAC Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). (See compatibility list on page 4.) Strobe Application Reference Proper selection of visible notification is dependent on occupancy, location, local codes, and proper applications of: the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72), ANSI A117.1; the appropriate model building code: BOCA, ICBO, or SBCCI; and the application guidelines of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). TrueAlert ES Operation Advantage TrueAlert ES addressable appliances on IDNAC SLCs provide separate visible (and audible) notification using a single two-wire circuit that also confirms connection to the individual notification appliance s electronic circuit. This operation increases circuit supervision integrity by providing supervision that extends beyond the appliance wiring connections. Reduced current allows efficient IDNAC SLC operation. With IDNAC SLCs, a constant 29 VRMS source voltage is maintained, even during battery standby, allowing strobes to operate at higher voltage with lower current and ensuring a consistent current draw and voltage drop margin under both primary power and secondary battery standby. Efficiencies include wiring distances up to 2 to 3 times farther than with conventional notification, or support for more appliances per IDNAC SLC, or use of smaller gauge wiring, or combinations of these benefits, all providing installation and maintenance savings with high assurance that appliances that operate during normal system testing will operate during worst case alarm conditions. S49VO /2013

118 TrueAlert ES Operation Advantage (Cont d) Reducing Installation and Testing Time. With separate controls on the same two-wire SLC, installation time and expense for both retrofit and new construction can be significantly reduced. When Class B wiring is used, wiring can be T tapped, allowing more savings in distance, wire, conduit (size and utilization), and overall installation efficiency. Use of the magnet test feature improves installation efficiency. TrueAlert device reports conveniently identify information about each connected appliance. TrueAlert ES Diagnostics Test Features. Controllers can be selected to pulse each appliance s LED when it receives a supervision poll. When the controller is selected for diagnostic mode, the appliance magnet test feature provides a response at the individual appliance being tested. Product Selection TrueAlert ES Diagnostics (Continued) Silent Appliance Magnet Test. In this test mode, in response to the magnet test, the appliance LED pulses sequentially to conveniently indicate the appliance s address. Operational Appliance Testing. In this test mode, after the address is indicated by pulsing the appliance LED, the strobe will briefly flash to indicate proper operation. TrueStart Instrument Two (TSIT). The 2nd generation of the Simplex TrueStart Test Instrument adds testing of IDNAC SLC wiring and TrueAlert ES appliances to its ability to test IDCs, NACs, and IDNet communications before connection to the control panel. Please contact your local Simplex representative for additional information. TrueAlert Addressable Wiring Isolator Isolator Model is available for remote mounting on TrueAlert addressable circuits to isolate short circuited wiring from functioning wiring. (Refer to data sheet S for additional information.) TrueAlert ES Wall Mount Addressable Strobes TrueAlert ES addressable VO (strobe) appliances include cover and matching mounting plate except as noted; Dimensions with Cover = 5 ⅛ H x 5 W x 1 ½ D (130 mm x 127 mm x 38 mm) Model* Cover Color Wording Lens Color Model* Cover Color Wording Lens Color 49VO-WRF(-BA) Red FIRE 49VO-WRS-BA Red 49VO-WWF(-BA) White Clear Blank Clear 49VO-WRA-BA Red ALERT 49VO-WWS-BA White 49VO-WWA-BA White 49VO-APPLW Select cover and mounting plate separately Separate Mounting Plate Model Color Note 49MP-AVVOWR Red 49MP-AVVOWW White Mounting Plate is required when ordering model 49VO-APPLW Separate Covers (Required when ordering model 49VO-APPLW) Model* Color Wording Model* Color Wording 49VOC-WRFIRE Red 49VOC-WRFEU Red FIRE 49VOC-WWFIRE White 49VOC-WWFEU White FEU 49VOC-WRALT Red 49VOC-WRBLNG Red ALERT 49VOC-WWALT White 49VOC-WWBLNG White FIRE/FEU 49VOC-WRS Red Blank 49VOC-WWS White Blank * Note: (-BA) indicates model is available either with or without the -BA suffix. Model numbers ending in -BA, APPLW models, and separate mounting plates are assembled in the USA. Mounting Adapters Model Color Description Dimensions Red 5 ⅜ H x 5 ¼ W x 1 ⅝ D (136 mm x 133 mm x 41 mm) Surface Mount Adapter Skirt White Total depth with strobe = 4 ⅜ (111 mm) Red Adapter Plate for mounting to Simplex Box (typically for retrofit, mount vertical or horizontal) 16 x 5 ¾ x Thick (211 mm x 146 mm x 1.5 mm) Red Mounting Box, requires Adapter Plate 7 ⅞" x 5 ⅛" x 2 ¾" D (200 mm x 130 mm x 70 mm) 2 S49VO /2013

119 TrueAlert Device Reports Reference Service Port Page 1 REPORT 5 : TrueAlert Device Report 12:34:56am MON 20-May-13 POINT ID CUSTOM LABEL DEVICE TYPE CANDELA T Location Label... up to 40 characters V/O 15 T Break Room 5 A/V 110 T Boiler Room A/V 75 T Elec. Room 7 A/V 135 Installation Reference Mounting is compatible with single gang, double gang, and 4" (102 mm) square boxes, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, supplied separately IMPORTANT! WALL MOUNT INSTALLATION HEIGHT REFERENCE Transparent housing assembly Removable cover (use bladed screwdriver to release latch on left side) Wiring terminals and connection clips Bottom of lens is either even with, or slightly above bottom of compatible boxes Electrical box outline Address setting DIP switch, accessible from rear of housing Magnetic test location (bottom of housing) Electrical test point access holes (on bottom) LED indicator location Strobe intensity viewing slot on side of appliance (not to scale) FACP Wiring access hole Mounting plate Mounting Holes: Single gang (2) Double gang (4) 4" square (4) Intensity selection plug, accessible from rear of housing; factory setting is FACP, controlled by panel 80" (2.03 m) minimum NFPA 72 requires that the entire lens be not less than 80" and not greater than 96" above the finished floor (confirm with your local codes) Adapter Plate and Surface Mount Installation Reference Adapter Plate Box Mounting Reference Box Surface Mount Side View Reference (Surface mount conduit and box shown for reference) TrueAlert ES Addressable Strobe 4" square box profile, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep TrueAlert ES Addressable Strobe Adapter Plate Optional surface mount adapter skirt, 1-1/2" deep: , Red; , White (conduit knockouts are provided on all four sides) 3 S49VO /2013

120 TrueAlert ES Appliance and IDNAC SLC Controller Compatibility Reference Compatible Controller and additional TrueAlert ES Appliances Data Sheet Reference Controller Output IDNAC SLC Output Voltage Appliance Voltage Design Reference 4100ES with EPS+ or EPS Power Supply S IDNAC Repeater S TrueAlert ES Audible Only (Horns) TrueAlert ES Audible/Visible S49AO-0001 S49AV-0001 IDNAC SLC 29 VRMS (regulated) 23 VRMS (with 6 VRMS drop) TrueAlert ES Weatherproof Appliances UL Listed S49WP-0001 ULC Listed S49WP-0002 TrueAlert ES Strobe Specifications Electrical Ratings Typical Operating Voltage Range Supervisory Requirements SLC Loading 23 VRMS to 31 VRMS, Special Application (see below for 17 VRMS rating) 1 unit load Maximum of 63 addresses per SLC, 75 unit loads Candela Setting 15 cd 30 cd 75 cd 110 cd 135 cd 185 cd 23 VRMS Current Ratings, for typical design of IDNAC Addressable SLCs (6 VRMS drop) 47 ma 57 ma 100 ma 132 ma 160 ma 208 ma General Specifications Temperature Range 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) Humidity Range 10% to 93%, 104 F (40 C) IDNAC SLC Wiring Specifications (refer to control panel installation instructions for more information) Connections Installation Instructions UTP, unshielded twisted pair recommended Maximum wire length allowed with T-Taps for Class B wiring per SLC = 10,000 ft (3048 m) Maximum wire length to any appliance = 4000 ft (1219 m) Maximum wiring resistance between compatible appliances = 26 Ω Terminal blocks on mounting plate for 18 AWG to 12 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 3.31 mm 2 ); two wires per terminal for in/out wiring Notes: Refer to compatibility table above for fire alarm control panel and power supply operation type. TrueAlert ES Strobe LEGACY Compatibility Reference Compatible Controller Data Sheet Reference Controller Output Available Strobe Intensity Appliance Voltage Minimum 4100ES or 4100U with TrueAlert Power Supply S TPS, Remote TrueAlert Power Supply S TrueAlert Addressable SLC 15, 30, 75, and 110 cd 17 VRMS TrueAlert Addressable Controller (4009T) S Electrical Ratings Reference for Retrofit Applications Voltage Range 17 VRMS to 31 VRMS, Special Application Candela Setting 15 cd 30 cd 75 cd 110 cd 17 VRMS Current Ratings, use when connected to TrueAlert Addressable SLCs per above 62 ma 75 ma 133 ma 178 ma TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S49VO / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

121 TrueAlert Addressable Notification Appliances UL, CSFM Listed; FM Approved* Features Individually addressed and controlled multi-candela TrueAlert ES weatherproof notification appliances for extended temperature and humidity range provide: Multi-candela xenon strobe with synchronized 1 Hz flash rate and with intensity programmable from the control panel or jumper selected as 15, 75, WP 75, or WP 185 cd Advanced addressable notification controlled by IDNAC SLCs from Simplex 4100ES fire alarm control panels with EPS/EPS+ power supplies (and 4009 IDNAC Repeaters) providing regulated 29 VRMS allowing strobes to operate with lower current even under battery backup Wiring supervision to each appliance allowing T-tapped connections for Class B circuits to simplify wiring (Class A circuits require in/out wiring) Self-Test Mode allows on-board sensors to detect the strobe and horn output and then report their status to the control panel TrueAlert Device Reports at the control panel detailing appliance point ID, custom label, type, and candela setting (see sample on page 3) Magnet Test diagnostics to assist checkout and testing of appliances and wiring Electrical test point access without removing cover LED Indicator and Magnet Test feature: Appliance LED can be selected to display each polling cycle to indicate appliance supervision When the controller is in diagnostic mode, the Magnet Test pulses the LED to indicate appliance address and can be set to also briefly flash the strobe and sound the A/V horn Mechanical design features include: Rugged, high impact, flame retardant thermoplastic housing in red with white letters or white with red letters, with clear lens Standard models are available with FIRE lettering or blank; configured models are available with additional lettering of FEU, FEU/FIRE, ALERT, and blank Mounting is to matching weatherproof boxes (required), ordered separately Separate covers are available to change application type on-site or for replacement In/out wiring terminals for 18 AWG to 12 AWG Enclosure is rated NEMA 3R Convenient wiring terminal access at front of housing Agency listings reference: UL 1638 listed for outdoor applications with strobe rated at 75 cd (WP75) or 185 cd (WP185) UL 1971 listed for indoor applications with strobe intensity selectable as 15 or 75 cd; indoor applications are compatible with ADA requirements (refer to important mounting information on page 3) Horn operation is listed to UL Standard 464 Refer to data sheet S49WP-0002 for ULC listed models Wall Mount Weatherproof Notification Appliances Visible Only (V/O) and Audible/Visible (A/V) Weatherproof A/V (top) and Strobe (bottom), side view of A/V on Weatherproof Mounting Boxes (right) For A/V Models with horn: Harmonically rich output sound for either coded or steady operation Horns sound as Temporal Code 3, March Time pattern, continuous; or Temporal Code 4, controlled separately from visible appliances on the same two-wire circuit Selectable March Time rates of 20, 60, or 120 beats per minute Output is high or low (~5 dba difference) selectable at the appliance or from the controller with FACP mode selected at the appliance Description TrueAlert ES weatherproof addressable appliances provide visible and audible/visible notification for indoor and outdoor, extended temperature and extended humidity applications. They are individually addressed and receive power, supervision, and control signals from a Simplex fire alarm control panel providing IDNAC Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). (See compatibility list on page 4.) Strobe Application Reference Proper selection of visible notification is dependent on occupancy, location, local codes, and proper applications of: the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72), ANSI A117.1; the appropriate model building code: BOCA, ICBO, or SBCCI; and the application guidelines of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). * This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing :0371 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. S49WP /2014

122 TrueAlert ES Operation Advantage TrueAlert ES addressable appliances on IDNAC SLCs provide separate visible and audible notification using a single two-wire circuit that also confirms connection to the individual notification appliance s electronic circuit. This operation increases circuit supervision integrity by providing supervision that extends beyond the appliance wiring connections. Reduced current allows efficient IDNAC SLC operation. With IDNAC SLCs, a constant 29 VRMS source voltage is maintained, even during battery standby, allowing strobes to operate at higher voltage with lower current and ensuring a consistent current draw and voltage drop margin under both primary power and secondary battery standby. Efficiencies include wiring distances up to 2 to 3 times farther than with conventional notification, or support for more appliances per IDNAC SLC, or use of smaller gauge wiring, or combinations of these benefits, all providing installation and maintenance savings with high assurance that appliances that operate during normal system testing will operate during worst case alarm conditions. Reducing Installation and Testing Time. With separate controls on the same two-wire SLC, installation time and expense for both retrofit and new construction can be significantly reduced. When Class B wiring is used, wiring can be T tapped, allowing more savings in distance, wire, conduit (size and utilization), and overall installation efficiency. Use of Self-Test and Magnet Test features improves installation efficiency. TrueAlert device reports conveniently identify information about each connected appliance. Product Selection TrueAlert ES Diagnostics Test Features. When IDNAC SLCs are in diagnostic mode, Self-Test and Magnet Test features provide individual appliance testing. With the Self-Test feature, appliance operation can be confirmed without leaving the control panel. Additionally, each appliance s LED can be selected to pulse when it receives a supervision poll during normal operation. Self-Test Details. Selecting Self-Test Mode from the control panel allows on-board sensors, depending on the device type, to detect its own strobe and/or horn output and then report their status to the control panel. Operation is by selected VNAC appliance groups and is either automatic (all briefly simultaneously activated) or individually activated by applying a magnet. (Refer to data sheet S for more Self-Test information.) Silent Appliance Magnet Test. In this test mode, in response to application of a magnet, the appliance LED pulses sequentially to conveniently indicate the appliance s address. Operational Appliance Magnet Test. In this test mode, after the address is indicated by pulsing the appliance LED, the strobe will briefly flash and the A/V horn will briefly sound to indicate proper operation. TrueStart Instrument Two (TSIT). The 2nd generation of the Simplex TrueStart Test Instrument adds testing of IDNAC SLC wiring and TrueAlert ES appliances to its ability to test IDCs, NACs, and IDNet communications before connection to the control panel. Please contact your local Simplex representative for additional information. TrueAlert Addressable Wiring Isolator Isolator Model is available for remote mounting on TrueAlert addressable circuits to isolate short circuited wiring from functioning wiring. (Refer to data sheet S for additional information.) UL Listed TrueAlert ES Addressable Weatherproof Notification Appliances Type Strobe (V/O) Horn/Strobe (A/V) Model Cover Color FIRE Lettering 49VO-WRFO(-BA) Red White 49VO-WRSO(-BA) Red Blank 49VO-WWFO-BA White Red 49VO-APPLW-O order cover separately 49AV-WRFO(-BA) Red White 49AV-WWFO-BA White Red 49AV-APPLW-O order cover separately Description UL listed weatherproof TrueAlert ES addressable appliance; requires weatherproof box, see below Note: (-BA) indicates model is available either with or without the -BA suffix; model numbers ending in -BA are assembled in the USA Intensity Ratings UL 1971 UL cd or 75 cd 75 cd (setting WP75) or 185 cd (setting WP185 ) Separate Covers (Required when ordering 49VO-APPLW-O or 49AV-APPLW-O) Wording Red VO Cover Models Red AV Cover Models White VO Cover Models White AV Cover Models FIRE 49VOC-WRFIRE-O 49AVC-WRFIRE-O 49VOC-WWFIRE-O 49AVC-WWFIRE-O ALERT 49VOC-WRALT-O 49AVC-WRALT-O 49VOC-WWALT-O 49AVC-WWALT-O FEU 49VOC-WRFEU-O 49AVC-WRFEU-O 49VOC-WWFEU-O 49AVC-WWFEU-O FEU/FIRE 49VOC-WRBLNG-O 49AVC-WRBLNG-O 49VOC-WWBLNG-O 49AVC-WWBLNG-O Blank 49VOC-WRS-O 49AVC-WRS-O 49VOC-WWS-O 49AVC-WWS-O Wall Mount Weatherproof Boxes (Required) Model Color Description Dimensions 49WPBB-AVVOWR Red 5 ½ H x 6 ⅛ W x 1 ⅝ D Surface Mount Weatherproof Mounting Box (required) 49WPBB-AVVOWW White (140 mm x 156 mm x 41 mm) 2 S49WP /2014

123 TrueAlert Device Reports Reference Service Port Page 1 REPORT 5 : TrueAlert Device Report 12:34:56am FRI 10-Jan-14 POINT ID CUSTOM LABEL DEVICE TYPE CANDELA T Location Label... up to 40 characters V/O 15 T Break Room 5 A/V 110 T Boiler Room A/V 75 T Elec. Room 7 A/V 135 Weatherproof Appliance Installation Reference Housing (A/V shown) Housing to mounting box screws (2) Cover to mounting box mounting screws (3) 1 3 Knockouts top, bottom, sides, and back; 5 total Weatherproof mounting box (required): 49WPBB-AVVOWR, Red 49WPBB-AVVOWW, White Perimeter gasket, pre-installed Standard cover (A/V shown) Three (3) cover attachment tabs located bottom, left and right side Internal cover gasket is pre-installed Magnet test location (bottom of housing) 2 WP185 WP FACP Strobe intensity viewing slot Intensity selection plug, accessible only from rear of housing; factory setting is FACP, selected from fire alarm control panel: UL 1971 listed model settings are 15 or 75 cd; UL 1638 listed model settings are WP75 (75 cd) or WP185 (185 cd) Dimension and Mounting Height Reference 5-3/8" (137 mm) IMPORTANT! INDOOR WALL MOUNT MOUNTING HEIGHT REFERENCE LED Indicator 5-17/32" (140 mm) total height 4-1/2 (114 mm) NFPA 72 requires that the entire alens be not less than 80" and not greater than 96" above the finished floor 81" (2.06 m) minimum to mounting tabs 5-9/16" (141 mm) between mounting holes 6-1/8" (156 mm) 4-11/32" (110 mm) total depth 1-21/32" (42 mm) 3 S49WP /2014

124 TrueAlert ES Appliance and IDNAC SLC Controller Compatibility Reference Compatible Controller and additional TrueAlert ES Appliances Data Sheet Reference Controller Output IDNAC SLC Output Voltage Appliance Voltage Design Reference 4100ES with EPS+ or EPS Power Supply S IDNAC Repeater S TrueAlert ES Audible Only (Horns) S49AO-0001 TrueAlert ES Audible/Visible S49AV-0001 IDNAC SLC 29 VRMS 23 VRMS (with 6 VRMS drop) TrueAlert ES Visible Only (Strobes) S49VO-0001 Specifications Typical Operating Voltage Range Supervisory Requirements SLC Loading Wiring Resistance Rating Temperature Range Humidity Range IDNAC SLC Wiring Specifications (refer to control panel installation instructions for more information) Connections 23 VRMS to 31 VRMS, Special Application 1 unit load Maximum of 63 addresses per SLC, 75 unit loads 26 Ω maximum resistance between appliances UL 1971 Listed Rating 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C); 15 or 75 cd setting UL 1638 Listed Rating -31 F to 150 F (-35 C to 66 C); WP75 or WP185 cd setting UL 1971 Listed Rating 10% to 93%, at 100 F (38 C) UL 1638 Listed Rating up to 98%, at 104 F (40 C) UTP, unshielded twisted pair recommended Maximum wire length allowed with T-Taps for Class B wiring per SLC = 10,000 ft (3048 m) Maximum wire length to any appliance = 4000 ft (1219 m) Maximum wiring resistance between compatible appliances = 26 Ω Terminal blocks for 18 AWG to 12 AWG (0.82 mm 2 to 3.31 mm 2 ); two wires per terminal for in/out wiring Installation Instructions A/V Horn Output 10 ft (3 23 VRMS Sound Type (see Note) Steady/High Steady/Low Coded/High Coded/Low Horn Output Reverberant Chamber, UL 464 Test 81.3 db 73.8 db 76.4 db 69.9 db Ratings Anechoic Chamber, ULC 525 Test 87.4 db 81.0 db 87.2 db 80.6 db Note: UL 464 test coded values are typical of the output measured with a Temporal or a March Time pattern and with a sound level meter reading on a fast setting. Under the same test conditions, coded horn output peak sound level readings are typically 4 dba higher. Anechoic horn output ratings are typically more representative of actual installed sound output. 23 VRMS Current Ratings UL 1971 Ratings UL 1638 Ratings 32 F to 120 F 32 F to 150 F -31 F to below 32 F Temperature Model (0 C to 49 C) (0 C to 66 C) (-35 C to 0 C) Candela Setting 15 cd 75 cd WP75 cd WP185 cd WP75 cd WP185 cd V/O Models 60 ma 160 ma 160 ma 185 ma 212 ma 239 ma A/V Models, horn on continuous, high setting 80 ma 165 ma 163 ma 189 ma 238 ma 274 ma UL 1638 WP75 and WP185 Light Output Reference Vertical, Below Axis Horizontal, Left/Right of Axis Angle On-Axis WP75 Minimum Candela Rating (over temp. range) 75 cd 69 cd 17 cd 60 cd 28 cd WP75 Typical Candela at 77 F (25 C) 142 cd 86 cd 22 cd 74 cd 35 cd WP185 Minimum Candela Rating (over temp. range) 185 cd 90 cd 21 cd 81 cd 40 cd WP185 Typical Candela at 77 F (25 C) 220 cd 112 cd 27 cd 101 cd 50 cd A/V Sound Dispersion per ULC-S525 Anechoic testing performed at 3 m (10 ft); referenced to on-axis = 0 Level Decrease -3 db -6 db Horizontal Angle) Vertical Angle +50 (to right) +55 (above axis) -40 (to left) -70 (below axis) +85 (to right) +60 (above axis) -85 (to left) -90 (below axis) TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Tyco Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA USA S49WP / Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

125 MC ES FACP Operating Manual

126 4100U/4100ES/4010ES InfoAlarm OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOLLOWING AN ALARM, SUPERVISORY, OR TROUBLE CONDITION YOUR SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF THOSE AROUND YOU ALWAYS COMES FIRST. Actions taken during a fire depend upon local practices. Be sure you know what to do. Systems Using Individual Acknowledge ALARM RED LED FLASHES AND TONE ALERT PULSES SUPERVISORY/TROUBLE YELLOW LED FLASHES AND TONE ALERT ON STEADY 1. Unlock and open the panel door. You will either see a text display or a site map. If the site map has been configured, the display can be switched by pressing the softkey next to the Site icon (see the preceding figure) or System Status icon. In all text screens, the point status and the custom label will display. 2. Press the <ALARM ACK> key under the flashing red LED. Read the LCD display. Continue to press the <ALARM ACK> key until all alarms are acknowledged. When this occurs, the tone-alert turns off and the ALARM led changes from flashing to ON steady. Silencing the Signals 1. Press the <ALARM SILENCE> key and read the display. The alphanumeric display reads ALARM SILENCE IN PROGRESS and the ALARM SILENCED LED turns on steady. Resetting the System 1. When the alarm condition has been cleared, restore or replace all affected devices (smoke detectors, motion sensors, etc.) in accordance with the instructions provided with each device. 2. Reset the system as follows: FIRE ALARM Condition. Press the <SYSTEM RESET> key. PRIORITY 2 ALARM Condition. Depending on the system configuration, reset the alarm condition using either the <SYSTEM RESET> key or a dedicated CONTROL key, located on the left side of the panel. After a delay, the red ALARM LED flashes and the tone-alert sounds with a pulsing tone. 3. Press the <ALARM ACK> key under the flashing red LED. Continue to press the <ALARM ACK> key until all alarm conditions have been acknowledged. 4. After a delay, the display returns to normal operation. 1. Unlock and open the panel door. The display shows the number of abnormal conditions. (This example describes managing a Trouble condition. A Supervisory condition is handled similarly). 2. Press the <TROUBLE ACK> key under the flashing yellow LED. Read and follow the instructions on the display. The display shows the area and type of problem. The tone-alert momentarily silences and then resounds. Continue to press the <TROUBLE ACK> key until all trouble conditions are acknowledged. 3. Press the <TROUBLE ACK> key under the flashing yellow LED again to review the abnormal status. The display shows the area and type of problem, the tone-alert silences, and the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED turns on steady. Read the alphanumeric display and then investigate the problem to determine its cause. 4. If a Trouble condition exists, restore or replace the defective equipment (switch, wire, device, etc.) in accordance with the equipment s instructions. Note: When the abnormal condition causing the trouble clears, the yellow LED flashes and the tone-alert sounds steady. 5. Press the <TROUBLE ACK> key under the flashing yellow LED. The display shows the system status. 6. Press the <TROUBLE ACK> key again. After a delay the system returns to normal operation. In case of trouble, notify: Name: Address Phone # FRAME AND MOUNT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO THE PANEL. SEE OPERATOR S MANUAL FOR DETAILED OPERATION. R 2006, 2010, 2011 SimplexGrinnell LP. All rights reserved Rev. B

127 4100U/4100ES/4010ES InfoAlarm OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOLLOWING AN ALARM, SUPERVISORY, OR TROUBLE CONDITION YOUR SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF THOSE AROUND YOU ALWAYS COMES FIRST. Actions taken during a fire depend upon local practices. Be sure you know what to do. Systems Using Global Acknowledge ALARM RED LED FLASHES AND TONE ALERT PULSES SUPERVISORY/TROUBLE YELLOW LED FLASHES AND TONE ALERT ON STEADY 1. Unlock and open the panel door. You will either see a text display or a site map. If the site map has been configured, the display can be switched by pressing the softkey next to the Site icon (see the preceding figure) or System Status icon. In all text screens, the point status and the custom label will display. 2. Press the <ALARM ACK> key under the flashing red LED. Read the LCD display. The tone-alert turns off and the ALARM LED changes from flashing to steady ON. Silencing the Signals 1. Press the <ALARM SILENCE> key and read the display. The display reads ALARM SILENCE IN PROGRESS and the ALARM SILENCED LED turns on steady. Resetting the System 1. When the alarm condition has been cleared, restore or replace all affected devices (smoke detectors, motion sensors, etc.) in accordance with the instructions provided with each device. 2. Reset the system as follows: FIRE ALARM Condition. Press the <SYSTEM RESET> key. PRIORITY 2 ALARM Condition. Depending on the system configuration, reset the alarm condition using either the <SYSTEM RESET> key or a dedicated CONTROL key, located on the left side of panel. After a delay, the system returns to normal operation. 1. Unlock and open the panel door. The display shows the number of abnormal conditions. (This example describes managing a Trouble condition. A Supervisory condition is handled similarly). 2. Press the <TROUBLE ACK> key under the flashing yellow LED again to review the abnormal status. The display shows the area and type of problem, the tone-alert silences, and the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED turns ON steady. Read the display and then investigate the problem to determine its cause. 3. If a Trouble condition exists, restore or replace the defective equipment (switch, wire, device, etc.) in accordance with the equipment s instructions. The Trouble condition automatically clears when the abnormal condition has been corrected. After a short delay, the system returns to normal operation. In case of trouble, notify: Name: Address Phone # FRAME AND MOUNT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO THE PANEL. SEE OPERATOR S MANUAL FOR DETAILED OPERATION. R 2006, 2010, 2011 SimplexGrinnell LP. All rights reserved Rev. B

128 FIRE FIRE FIRE 4100ES Fire Alarm System Operator s Manual Rev. G 574-xxx Rev. 4

129 Copyrights and Trademarks 2007, 2008, 2011 SimplexGrinnell LP. All rights reserved. Simplex and the Simplex logo are registered trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its affiliates and are used under license. Specifications and other information shown were current as of publication and are subject to change without notice.

130 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify an authorized Simplex product supplier. ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. All repairs should be performed by a representative or authorized agent of your local Simplex product supplier. STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components. Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times. EYE SAFETY HAZARD - Under certain fiber optic application conditions, the optical output of this device may exceed eye safety limits. Do not use magnification (such as a microscope or other focusing equipment) when viewing the output of this device. FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS PART 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.

131 Table of Contents 8BHow to Use this Publication... ix 38BIntroduction... ix 39BGeneral Conventions... ix 40BKeyboard Conventions... ix 41BUsing the Mouse... x Chapter 1 0Basic Concepts and Operations BIntroduction BIn this Chapter Basic System Description BOverview BNormal Appearance of Operator Interface Panel BDescription Chapter 2 1BAlarm Conditions BIntroduction BIn this Chapter BAcknowledging an Alarm BHow the FACP Indicates that an Alarm has Occurred BOverview Acknowledging Alarms BGlobally Acknowledging Alarms BIndividually Acknowledging Alarms BSilencing an Alarm BOverview BUsing the Alarm Silence Key BResetting the System BOverview BResetting a System with Active Alarms BPerforming a Hardware Reset BDisabling a Point that Remains in Alarm BOverview BImportant Notes BProcedure Chapter 3 2BTrouble Conditions BIntroduction BIn this Chapter BOverview BHow the FACP Indicates the Presence of a Trouble BWhat Acknowledge Does BGlobal Versus Individual Acknowledge BTrouble Indications for TrueAlarm Sensors BWhat to Do when TrueAlarm Troubles Occur BAcknowledging Troubles v

132 67BGlobally Acknowledgi ng Troubles BIndividually Acknowledging Troubles BIf the Trouble Doesn t Clear BOverview BSystem Reset Key BDisabling a Point with a Trouble Condition Chapter 4 3BSupervisory Conditions BIntroduction BIn this Chapter BOverview BHow the FACP Indicates the Presence of a Supervisory Condition BWhat Acknowledge Does BAcknowledging Supervisory Conditions BGlobally Acknowledging Supervisory Conditions BIndividually Acknowledging Supervisory Conditions Chapter 5 4BSelecting Points for Status and Control BIntroduction BIn this Chapter BSelecting Points from Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory List BProcedure BSelecting Points from the Menu BProcedure BSelecting Points with the Entry Keypad BOverview BSelecting Points Chapter 6 5BAdvanced Functions BIntroduction BIn this Chapter BLogging In and Out of the System BIntroduction BLog In Procedure BLog Out Procedure BSetting System Time and Date BProcedure BViewing the Time at which an Event Occurred BOverview BProcedure BEnabling and Disabling Points BOverview BProcedure BForcing Points On and Off vi

133 94BOverview BForcing Points ON and OFF BReturning a Point to Automatic Operation BDisplaying and Clearing Historical Logs BOverview BDisplaying/Clearing Historical Logs BPrinting Reports BOverview BProcedure Chapter 7 0B Install Mode Introduction In this chapter Accessing InstallMode Adding and Removing Points and Cards Adding and Removing Lists Adding and removing groups to Install Mode Viewing Install Mode Chapter 8 6BSystem Test Procedures BIntroduction BIn this Chapter BLamp Test / Tone Alert Test BOverview BPerforming a Lamp Test BTesting the Tone-Alert BWalk Test Overview BOverview BImportant Notes BSetting WalkTest Options BEnabling WalkTest for a Group BSetting Options BTrueNAC Voltage Drop Test BOverview BAccessing the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test BAccessing the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test BTesting all TrueAlert Power Supply s SLCs BTesting all TrueAlert Power Supply s SLCs BTesting each TrueAlert Power Supply s SLC BTesting each TrueAlert Power Supply s SLC BThe TrueNAC Report BTrueNAC Report Samples BTrueNAC Report Samples BTrueNAC Report Samples BOverview BDisable IDNET CO Algorithms without WalkTest Enabled BDisable IDNET CO Algorithms with WalkTest Enabled Chapter 9 7BAudio Operations vii

134 124BIntroductio n BIn this Chapter BSingle Channel Audio Operation BOverview BEvacuate Entire Building BEvacuate Specific Floors when No Alarms are Present BEvacuate Additional Floors During an Alarm BPage Entire Building BPage Only Floors Being Evacuated BPage Additional Floors BListen to What is Being Played Using the Local Speaker BSilencing the Audio System BResetting the Audio System BSingle Channel Audio Plus Paging BOverview BEvacuate Entire Building BEvacuate Specific Floors when No Alarms are Present BEvacuate Additional Floors During an Alarm BPage Entire Building BPage Specific Floors BPage Additional Floors BListen to What is Being Played Using the Local Speaker BSilencing the Audio System BResetting the Audio System BTwo Channel Audio Operation BOverview BEvacuate Entire Building BEvacuate Specific Floors when No Alarms are Present BEvacuate Additional Floors During an Alarm BAlert Specific Floors BEvacuate Floors On Which Alert Message is Playing BPage Entire Building BPage Specific Floors BPage Additional Floors BListen to What is Being Played on the EVAC Channel Using the Local Speaker BListen to What is Being Played on the Alert Channel Using the Local Speaker BSilencing the Audio System BResetting the Audio System BThree to Eight Channel Audio System Operation BOverview BEvacuate Entire Building BEvacuate Specific Floors when No Alarms are Present BEvacuate Additional Floors During an Alarm BAlert Specific Floors BEvacuate Floors On Which Alert Message is Playing BPage Entire Building BPage Specific Floors BPage Additional Floors BPlay Announcements on Specific Floors BListen to What is Being Played on the EVAC Channel Using the Local Speaker BListen to What is Being Played on the Alert Channel Using the Local Speaker BSilencing the Audio System BResetting the Audio System viii

135 8BHow to Use this Publication 38BIntroduction Before you start using the 4100ES Fire Alarm Operator s Manual, it's important to understand the typographic conventions used in this publication. 39BGeneral Conventions The following conventions are used in this publication to identify special names or text. Convention Bold type Italic type Meaning Indicates words or characters that you type. Unless it is specifically noted, you can type the text in lowercase or uppercase characters. For example, cd access means that you type the lowercase letters cd followed by a space and the lowercase word access. Indicates information that the user must supply, such as filenames. For example, cd directory_name means that you type the letters cd followed by a space and a directory name. Text in quotes Bulleted lists Indicates important terms or titles of publications. Indicates the title of a chapter or section of the manual, such as How to Use This Publication. Provides you with information. They are also used to indicate alternatives in numbered procedural steps. 1. Numbered lists Indicates procedures that you must carry out sequentially. 40BKeyboard Conventions The following conventions are used to describe keys and key combinations. Convention SHIFT CTRL+ALT+DEL ALT,F,P Arrow keys Meaning Key names appear in bold type and in capital letters and are referred to by their names only, without the word "key." For example, "press SHIFT" means press the key labeled "Shift." A plus sign (+) between two key names means that you hold down the first key while pressing the second key. For example, "press SHIFT+F1" means hold down the SHIFT key while pressing the F1 key. If the key sequence includes three or more key names, hold down all of the keys except for the last one, and then press and release the last key. For example, "press CTRL+ALT+DELETE" means hold down the CTRL and ALT keys, and then press the DELETE key. A comma between key names means that you press and release the first key, and then press and release the second key, and so on. For example, "press ALT, F, P" means press ALT and release it, press F and release it, then press P and release it. Arrow keys refers to the UP ARROW ( ), DOWN ARROW ( ), LEFT ARROW ( ), and RIGHT ARROW ( ) keys. Continued on next page ix

136 How to Use this Publication, Continued 41BUsing the Mouse The following table lists four common terms related to mouse operation that you should know. Use the left mouse button for all actions unless instructed otherwise. Note: When using the mouse button to point, click, or drag, keep the mouse steady; otherwise, you may select the wrong item. Term Point Click Double-click Drag Function Move the mouse until the tip of the mouse pointer rests on the screen object or area that you wish to select. Point to the item you want to select, then press and immediately release the mouse button. Point to the item you want to select, then press and immediately release the mouse button twice in rapid succession. Point to the item you want to move, then press and hold down the mouse button while you move the mouse to the desired location. Once you have moved the mouse pointer to the position you want, release the mouse button. x

137 Chapter 1 0Basic Concepts and Operations 42BIntroduction This chapter provides an overview of the operator interface panel and describes the normal appearance of the operator interface panel. 43BIn this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Basic System Description 1-2 Normal Appearance of Operator Interface Panel

138 9Basic System Description 4BOverview The Simplex 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) has three general functions. It monitors fire alarm initiating points (smoke detectors, heat detectors, and pull stations). It activates fire alarm notification appliances (horns, strobes, audio evacuation messages) when an initiating point activates. It monitors and controls auxiliary building equipment (fan dampers, relays, security devices). Note: The term point is used extensively throughout this manual. It is a generic term used to refer to an individual component of the system, such as a single smoke detector, a single pull station, etc.) The operator interface, shown in Figure 1-1, allows a system operator to control and monitor the facility-specific components connected to the FACP. Facility-Specific Control Keys Labels shown are examples. Entry Keypad Figure 1 1. Operator Interface Table 1 1. Components of the Operator Interface LED/Key Description Refer To Fire Alarm LED and Fire Alarm ACK Key Alarm Silenced LED/Alarm Silence Key The Fire Alarm LED flashes to indicate the presence of an unacknowledged alarm condition. Other components of the system, such as the horns and strobes, also activate to indicate the presence of an alarm. The FIRE ALARM ACK key allows you to indicate that you have observed the presence of an alarm. Pressing the ALARM SILENCE key provides a means of silencing the building s audible notification appliances (horns). The LED indicates when this key has been used. Chapter 2 Chapter 2 Continued on next page 1-2

139 Basic System Description, Continued Overview Table 1-1. Components of the Operator Interface (continued) LED/Key Description Refer To System Warning Keys and LEDs System Reset Key AC Power LED Event Time Key Entry Keypad Facility-Specific Control Keys Enable/Disable Keys On/Off/Auto Keys Arm/Disarm Keys Alphanumeric Display The System Warning LEDs Supervisory and Trouble indicate when abnormal, non-fire conditions occur to the fire alarm s wiring or devices. The System Warning keys SUPV ACK and TROUBLE ACK allow an operator to acknowledge the presence of the abnormal condition. Pressing this key directs the panel to reset all attached devices and clear all acknowledged alarms, troubles, and supervisory conditions. Indicates the presence of AC power at the panel. Used to display the time at which an acknowledged alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition occurred. Used to call up points for monitoring and control. These are programmable keys. Typical functions include manual evacuation, ground fault monitor, etc. Pressing these keys allows you to enable or disable devices attached to the panel. Pressing these keys allows you to force a device (such as a relay) ON or OFF. The Auto key returns control of the device to the panel. Used with security points. These keys allow you to turn security devices on (arm) or off (disarm). Displays text describing abnormal conditions for devices attached to the panel (i.e., smoke detector in main lobby is in alarm). Also displays system prompts and messages. Chapter 3 for Troubles. Chapter 4 for Supervisory Conditions Chapter 2 N/A Chapter 6 Chapter 5 N/A Chapter 6 Chapter 6 Chapter 6 Important Note: The degree to which you are allowed to control the system depends on the passcode assigned to you. See Logging in and Out of the System for details on this. 1-3

140 10BNormal Appearance of Operator Interface Panel 45BDescription The operator interface panel shows the following under normal conditions. Green power LED is ON indicating the panel is receiving AC Power. All other LEDs off. Alphanumeric display reports that the system is normal, as shown below. SYSTEM IS NORMAL 08:23:45 MON 18-SEPT-00 Note: If the appearance of the operator interface panel is not as shown above, refer to the information in Chapters 2, 3, and 4 for instructions on managing the alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. 1-4

141 Chapter 2 1BAlarm Conditions 46BIntroduction An alarm condition occurs when an initiating device (such as a manual pull station, smoke detector, etc.) activates. The FACP indicates the presence of the alarm condition through messages it displays on the alphanumeric display, by flashing the ALARM indicator, and by activating the building s notification appliances (horns and strobes). Note: An alarm condition is a serious event, indicating the possibility of fire danger. In addition to using the operator interface panel to investigate and manage alarm conditions as described in this chapter, you should also be aware of any facility-specific procedures that you may be required to follow. 47BIn this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Acknowledging an Alarm 2-2 Silencing an Alarm 2-5 Resetting the System 2-6 Disabling a Point that Remains in Alarm

142 1BAcknowledging an Alarm 48BHow the FACP Indicates that an Alarm has Occurred When an alarm condition is detected by the FACP, the panel does the following to indicate the presence of the alarm. Red LED, labeled Fire Alarm flashes Tone-alert (piezo buzzer) pulses LEDs on remote annunciators may illuminate The alphanumeric display on the interface panel indicates an alarm condition. The exact manner in which the alphanumeric display reports information for the alarm condition depends on whether the system s Display First Alarm Option is enabled. If Display 1 st Alarm Option is Enabled. The display alternates between two screens similar to Screen 1 and Screen 2 shown below. Screen 1 is a tally screen indicating the total number of fire alarms, priority 2 alarms, supervisory conditions, and trouble conditions present on the panel. Screen 2 is a detailed description of the first alarm received by the panel. Screen 1 **FIRE** Press (ACK) to review. FIRE = 1 PRI2=0 SUPV=0 TRBL=0 Screen 2 FIRST FLOOR EAST WING ROOM 31 PULL STATION If Display 1 st Alarm Option is not enabled. Only a screen similar to Screen 1 appears, indicating the total number of alarm conditions present on the system. 49BOverview Acknowledging Alarms The first step in managing an alarm condition is to acknowledge the alarm. Acknowledging an alarm does two important things: It records the time and date at which you observed the presence of an alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition on the operator interface panel and stores that information in the system s historical log. When you press the acknowledge key, the system displays specific data on the location of the alarm. It is important to understand that the FACP can be configured with either Global or Individual Acknowledge. These options function as follows: Global Acknowledge. When global acknowledge is enabled, one press of the ALARM ACK key acknowledges every abnormal point currently reporting an alarm status. This is helpful when a series of devices enter an alarm state (for example, all of the smoke detectors in an area of the building) and you want to acknowledge all of them at the same time. Individual Acknowledge. If individual acknowledge is enabled, the ALARM ACK key must be pressed to individually acknowledge each alarm. Individual acknowledge must be selected if the panel is providing proprietary receiving service in accordance with NFPA72. The ALARM ACK key, which is used to acknowledge alarms (either globally or individually), is located just beneath the SYSTEM ALARM LED 2-2 Continued on next page

143 Acknowledging an Alarm, Continued 50BGlobally Acknowledging Alarms Use the following procedure if the Global Acknowledge option is enabled on your system. 1. Unlock and open the enclosure door. Read the alphanumeric display on the interface panel. It reports the number of alarm conditions as shown below. **FIRE** Press <ACK> to review. Fire =1 PRI2 = 0 SUPV = 0 TRBL=0 2. Press the ALARM ACK key. Read and follow the instructions on the alphanumeric display. After you press the ALARM ACK key, the system responds as follows: The tone-alert silences and the alphanumeric display reports pertinent information about the alarm, such as the following: FIRST FLOOR EAST WING ROOM 31 PULL STATION FIRE ALARM The SYSTEM ALARM LED changes from flashing to steady ON, and all alarm conditions are acknowledged. Pressing the ALARM ACK key again displays information on the next alarm. Continue to do this to review all alarms in the system. 51BIndividually Acknowledging Alarms Use the following procedure if the Individual Acknowledge option is enabled on your system. 1. Unlock and open the enclosure door. Read the alphanumeric display on the interface panel. It reports the number of alarm conditions as shown below. **FIRE** Press <ACK> to review. Fire =1 PRI2 = 0 SUPV = 0 TRBL=0 2. Press the ALARM ACK key. A report similar to the one shown below appears. Read and follow the instructions on the alphanumeric display. FIRST FLOOR EAST WING ROOM 31 Press ACK key to acknowledge ALARM PULL STATION ALARM Continued on next page 2-3

144 Acknowledging an Alarm, Continued Individually Acknowledging Alarms 3. Press the ALARM ACK key again. Read the report data. Repeat this procedure to review all reports. Reports are displayed in chronological order. Tone-alert silences when the last unacknowledged alarm is acknowledged. System Alarm LED is ON, but is no longer flashing. 2-4

145 12BSilencing an Alarm 52BOverview When an alarm condition exists, various signals (horns and strobes), auxiliary relays, the city connection (which is the link to the local fire department or central station monitoring service), and the tone-alert may activate. The ALARM SILENCE key turns OFF all devices that are programmed to turn off when it is pressed. Typically, this will be the audible notification appliances (horns). Note: Depending on the programming of the system, some devices may not turn off when the ALARM SILENCE key is pressed. At a minimum, the following occurs when the key is pressed. Turns OFF signal circuits (which usually connect to the Notification Appliances) Turns ON the ALARM SILENCED LED Displays a message indicating the ALARM SILENCE function is activated You should be aware that the following functions affect the operation of the ALARM SILENCE function. If a Coded Input Device (typically a pull station) activates, the <ALARM SILENCE> key may be ignored until this function has completed coding. Notification appliances (horns) cannot be silenced when a coded station is in alarm, but silence upon coding completion. If the Alarm Silence Inhibit Option -- which is a timer that inhibits the operation of the ALARM SILENCE function is enabled, pressing the <ALARM SILENCE> key is ignored until the timer expires. The message ALARM SILENCE INHIBITED displays for a short time to indicate the action was not taken. The message ALARM SILENCE NO LONGER INHIBITED displays when the timer expires. If Waterflow Sprinkler Devices are activated, Notification Appliances may or may not be silenced (depending on local code requirements). Usually, a dedicated bell will continue to sound to indicate water flow. Some visual notification appliances may continue to flash until the system is reset. 53BUsing the Alarm Silence Key Press the <ALARM SILENCE> key and read the display. The alphanumeric display shows signal status and the ALARM SILENCE LED turns ON steady. ALARM SILENCE IN PROGRESS 2-5

146 13BResetting the System 54BOverview The function of the SYSTEM RESET key depends on whether active alarms are present at the time the key is pressed. Active Alarms Present. Pressing the SYSTEM RESET key when alarms are present attempts to return the system to its normal state. This includes resetting initiating devices (pull stations and smoke detectors, for example), relays (including city relay and door holder relays), notification appliances (horns and strobes), and all LEDs and indicators that have been programmed to be reset with the SYSTEM RESET key. See Resetting a System with Active Alarms below for more information. No Active Alarms Present. Pressing the SYSTEM RESET key when no alarms are present causes the system to perform a hardware reset. See Performing a Hardware Reset below for more information. 5BResetting a System with Active Alarms Activated devices (i.e, devices in alarm) can be reset, using the SYSTEM RESET key. Doing this allows the system to return to a normal state following alarm activation. Follow these steps to perform a System Reset when alarms are present. 1. Press the SYSTEM RESET key. The following message appears. SYSTEM RESET IN PROGRESS 2. One of the following occurs, depending on whether the activated devices reset or not. If all zones or devices in alarm reset, the SYSTEM ALARM LED flashes. Press the <ALARM ACK> key, and the following message appears. SYSTEM IS NORMAL 8:37:13 MON 18-SEP-00 If a zone or device remains in alarm and fails to reset, the SYSTEM RESET IN PROGRESS message is followed by the message shown below. ALARM PRESENT, SYSTEM RESET ABORTED When this message appears, the system remains in an alarm state. The display indicates the total number of alarms present in the system along with a prompt to use the <ALARM ACK> key to review the points. (These points do not require acknowledgment.) The SYSTEM ALARM LED remains ON to indicate that a fire alarm device is still in the alarm condition. Read the display to determine the type and location of the device. Follow local procedures to investigate the area of the building in alarm. Look for devices that are in an alarm state -- pull stations with the handle down, smoke detectors with their LED lit. 2-6 Continued on next page

147 Resetting the System, Continued 56BPerforming a Hardware Reset A hardware reset reinitializes the state of certain hardware components and is typically used to reset a Class A Trouble (for example, on a MAPNET, IDNet, or RUI channel) after the problem causing the trouble is resolved. If you attempt to perform a hardware reset without first fixing the problem causing the trouble, the hardware reset fails and the trouble reappears. To perform a hardware reset, press the SYSTEM RESET key when no alarms are present. 2-7

148 14BDisabling a Point that Remains in Alarm 57BOverview If a device remains in alarm and no alarm condition (i.e., smoke or an activated pull station) exists, the FACP provides a way to inhibit alarm reporting for the malfunctioning point. Disabling a point causes a trouble condition for the point or zone that you disable. The <DISABLE> key, which is used to disable points, may be passcode protected. If it is, you need to first log in to the system using the passcode that enables the key. Refer to Logging In and Out of the System in Chapter 6 for information on doing this. 58BImportant Notes Be aware of the following issues related to disabling points. Disabling a point causes the point to NOT report alarm conditions or other status changes. A point should not be disabled unless it is clearly understood that fire detection or security for the area of the building covered by that point will be lost. Appropriate steps must be taken to provide alternate means of protecting the area of the building covered by the disabled point. If the Service Reset option is enabled, an operator can clear an alarm condition (i.e., successfully perform a system reset) even though the device that caused the alarm remains in a trouble state. The typical application for this would be the case where a malfunctioning initiating device such as a smoke detector (consisting of a base and removable sensor) causes an alarm and activates the city circuit. With this option enabled, the sensor can be removed and the system (including the city circuit) can be reset. Without this option enabled, removing the sensor would cause a trouble, which would prevent the city circuit from being reset. Note: Service Reset is not a UL-Approved option and enabling this option on the panel invalidates the panel s UL certification. 59BProcedure To disable a point in alarm, follow these steps. 1. Press the <ALARM ACK> key to display the point s information on the alphanumeric display. For example: SECOND FLOOR EAST WING ROOM 16 PULL STATION ALARM 2. Press the <DISABLE> key. The alphanumeric display shows the following message. PRESS <ENTER> TO DISABLE MONITOR ZONE: ZNXX Note: XX represents the point to be disabled. Continued on next page 2-8

149 Disabling a Point that Remains in Alarm, Continued Procedure 3. Press the <ENTER> key. The alphanumeric display shows the action taken. ALARM PRESENT, SYSTEM RESET ABORTED Note: The system indicates a trouble condition each time a point is disabled. It is important to repair the disabled point as soon as possible. Once repaired, the disabled point should be enabled as soon as possible. 2-9

150 Chapter 3 2BTrouble Conditions 60BIntroduction A Trouble message is used to indicate the presence of a circuit break or ground within a system point, or somewhere between the FACP and one of its points. This chapter describes using the Operator Interface Panel keys to investigate the details of the trouble condition. 61BIn this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Overview 3-2 Acknowledging Troubles 3-4 If the Trouble Doesn t Clear

151 15BOverview 62BHow the FACP Indicates the Presence of a Trouble When a trouble condition is detected by the FACP, the panel does the following to indicate the presence of the trouble condition. Yellow LED, labeled SYSTEM TROUBLE flashes Tone-alert (piezo buzzer) sounds steady LEDs on remote annunciators may illuminate The alphanumeric display on the interface panel indicates trouble condition, as shown below Figure 3 1. Interface Panel Showing Trouble Condition 63BWhat Acknowledge Does The first step in managing a trouble condition is to acknowledge the trouble. Acknowledging a trouble does two important things: It records the time and date at which you observed the presence of the trouble and stores that information in the system s historical log. When you press the acknowledge key, the system displays specific data on the location of the trouble. It is important to understand that the FACP can be configured with either Global or Individual Acknowledge. These options function as follows: 64BGlobal Versus Individual Acknowledge Global Acknowledge. When global acknowledge is enabled, one press of the <TBL ACK> key acknowledges every point currently reporting a trouble. Individual Acknowledge. If individual acknowledge is enabled, the <TBL ACK> key must be pressed to individually acknowledge each trouble. Individual acknowledge must be selected if the panel is providing proprietary receiving service in accordance with NFPA72. The <TBL ACK> key, which is used to acknowledge troubles (either globally or individually), is located just beneath the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED. Refer to Figure 3-1. If the <TBL ACK> key is passcode protected (by default, it is not), you cannot use this key to acknowledge troubles unless you have the required passcode. Continued on next page 3-2

152 Overview, Continued 65BTrouble Indications for TrueAlarm Sensors TrueAlarm devices are considered sensors instead of detectors because these devices do not determine alarm conditions. Instead, the TrueAlarm smoke sensor is a measuring device that sends data regarding smoke density to the FACP. The TrueAlarm heat sensor operates in a similar fashion, but it sends temperature data to the control panel instead of smoke density data. Also, CO heat/smoke sensors operate just like the TrueAlarm heat/smoke sensors. The FACP uses this data to determine whether a trouble has occurred. The TrueAlarm and CO sensors have three automatic trouble indications. Dirty. A Smoke Detector Dirty condition is reported any time the average value on an individual sensor reaches a set threshold value. Excessively Dirty. A Smoke Detector Excessively Dirty trouble condition is reported any time the average value of an individual sensor reaches a slightly higher threshold level. Expired Trouble. An Expired Trouble condition is reported anytime a CO sensor has reached the end of its useful lifetime. In addition to the three automatic trouble conditions, the FACP software includes three preprogrammed digital pseudo points: P132, P463 and P464. The pseudo point P132 (Sensor Almost Dirty Log Enable) can be turned ON through the FACP PC Programmer application to allow a TrueAlarm sensor that is close to being dirty to report as if it were one. This is useful when maintenance is being scheduled for dirty sensors, as it provides a means of seeing which sensors are approaching a dirty state. The pseudo points P463 and P464 are used to log all the CO sensors that will expire in 6 and 12 months respectively. Once a minute the FACP performs a test of each TrueAlarm sensor. The test raises the value of each sensor to a value that simulates an alarm condition. If the sensor reports back a value that is not within the alarm range, a Self-Test Abnormal trouble is displayed for the sensor. 6BWhat to Do when TrueAlarm Troubles Occur System Operators should do the following when these troubles occur. Almost Dirty Trouble. In this case, a Simplex Technical Representative has programmed the system to allow almost dirty sensors to report as dirty. Contact your facilities management personnel to report the trouble and schedule maintenance (cleaning) for the sensors. Dirty. This trouble means the sensor is holding its sensitivity, that maintenance should be scheduled for the sensor. Contact your facilities management personnel to report the trouble and schedule maintenance (cleaning) for the sensors. Excessively Dirty. This trouble means the sensor is no longer compensating for dirt and dust. False alarms are possible in this condition and sensors should be cleaned as soon as possible. Contact your facilities management personnel to report the trouble and immediately schedule maintenance (cleaning) for the sensors. Self-Test Abnormal. All TrueAlarm sensors are automatically tested once a minute. If a sensor fails to report properly to the FACP, a Self-Test Abnormal trouble occurs. This indicates that the sensor is not working properly and needs to be replaced. Contact your facilities management personnel to report the trouble. Expired. This trouble means that the CORC (CO Replacement Cartridge) needs to be replaced. Almost Expired. This trouble means that the CORC is almost at the end of its lifetime and would need to be replaced within 6 or 12 months, depending on the system configuration. 3-3

153 16BAcknowledging Troubles 67BGlobally Acknowledging Troubles If global acknowledge is enabled on the FACP, the system automatically clears after the source of the trouble clears. Approximately 30 seconds after the source of the trouble clears, the alphanumeric display should indicate a normal system. To globally acknowledge trouble points, follow these steps. 1. Unlock and open the enclosure door. The alphanumeric display shows the trouble condition. For example: **TROUBLE Press <ACK> to review. FIRE = 0 PRI2 = 0 SUPV = 0 TRBL = 1 2. Press the <TBL ACK> key under the flashing yellow LED. The alphanumeric display shows the area and type of trouble. The tone-alert silences and the yellow LED glows steady. **TROUBLE Press <ACK> to review. FIRE = 0 PRI2 = 0 SUPV = 0 TRBL = 1 3. Read the alphanumeric display and investigate the area to determine the cause of the trouble. a. Restore or replace the defective device (switch, wire, notification appliance, etc.) in accordance with the device s instructions. b. The trouble condition automatically clears when the problem has been corrected. c. After a delay, the alphanumeric display reads: SYSTEM IS NORMAL 8:36:28 FRI 15-SEP-00 68BIndividually Acknowledging Troubles When individual acknowledge is used, the tone-alert re-sounds when the condition clears. Individual acknowledge must be selected if the panel is providing proprietary receiving service in accordance with NFPA72. Follow these steps to use individual acknowledge. 1. Unlock and open the enclosure door. The alphanumeric display shows the trouble condition. For example: **TROUBLE Press <ACK> to review. FIRE = 0 PRI2 = 0 SUPV = 0 TRBL = 1 Continued on next page 3-4

154 Acknowledging Troubles, Continued Individually Acknowledging Troubles 2. Press the <TBL ACK> key. Repeat this step and read the reports. You need to do this for each trouble event. The following occurs The tone-alert silences and the LED glows steady The alphanumeric display shows the area and type of problem, as shown below. FIRST FLOOR EAST WING ROOM31 Press ACK key to acknowledge FIRE MONITOR ZONE OPEN CIRCUIT TROUBLE 3. Read the alphanumeric display. Investigate the trouble to determine its cause. Restore or replace defective device (switch, wire, notification appliance, etc.) in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. When the trouble clears, the Trouble LED flashes and the tone-alert sounds steady. 4. Press the <TBL ACK> key. The display shows the system status. Press the <TBL ACK> key again. After a delay, the display shows that the system status is normal. 3-5

155 17BIf the Trouble Doesn t Clear 69BOverview Normally, trouble points do not require acknowledgment of the cleared condition. If the system does not clear, read the display. Check for devices still in trouble (pull stations with their handles down, smoke detectors with their LEDs ON). If the source of the trouble cannot be located, call Simplex to repair the system. 70BSystem Reset Key Some troubles latch until they are reset manually, or are reset by pressing the SYSTEM RESET key. Try pressing the SYSTEM RESET key if the trouble is any one of the following: Style D initiating device circuit trouble City Circuit trouble 24 Point I/O trouble If pressing the SYSTEM RESET key does not clear the trouble, or if the trouble toggles (clears and then reappears), you may choose to either disconnect the device or to disable the point, using the procedure outlined in the next section. 71BDisabling a Point with a Trouble Condition Keep the following in mind when disabling points. Disabling a point causes the point to NOT report alarm conditions or other status changes. A point should not be disabled unless it is clearly understood that fire detection or security for the area of the building covered by that point would be lost. Appropriate steps must be taken to provide alternate means of protecting the area of the building covered by the disabled point. Repair or replace the failed device or circuit as soon as possible. Once repaired, the disabled point should be enabled as soon as possible. 1. Press the TBL ACK key to display the point s information on the alphanumeric display. For example: SECOND FLOOR EAST WING ROOM 16 PULL STATION OPEN CIRCUIT TROUBLE 2. Press the DISABLE key. The alphanumeric display shows the following message. PRESS <ENTER> TO DISABLE MONITOR ZONE: ZNXX Note: XX represents the point to be disabled. Continued on next page 3-6

156 If the Trouble Doesn t Clear, Continued Disabling a Point with a Trouble Condition 3. Press the <ENTER> key. The alphanumeric display shows the action taken. ACTION TAKEN Note: The system indicates a trouble condition each time a point is disabled. It is important to repair the disabled point as soon as possible. Once repaired, the disabled point should be enabled as soon as possible. 3-7

157 Chapter 4 3BSupervisory Conditions 72BIntroduction A Supervisory trouble indicates a problem with the condition of the building s automatic sprinkler system or some other system used for the protection of life and property. This chapter describes using the Operator Interface Panel keys to investigate the details of the supervisory condition. 73BIn this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Overview 4-2 Acknowledging Supervisory Conditions

158 18BOverview 74BHow the FACP Indicates the Presence of a Supervisory Condition When a supervisory condition is detected by the FACP, the panel does the following to indicate the presence of the condition. Yellow LED, labeled SUPERVISORY flashes Tone-alert (piezo buzzer) sounds steady The alphanumeric display on the interface panel indicates supervisory condition, as shown below Figure 4 1. Interface Panel Showing Supervisory Condition 75BWhat Acknowledge Does The first step in managing a supervisory condition is to acknowledge the condition. Acknowledging a supervisory does two important things: It records the time and date at which you observed the presence of the condition and stores that information in the system s historical log. When you press the acknowledge key, the system displays specific data on the location of the supervisory condition. It is important to understand that the FACP can be configured with either Global or Individual Acknowledge. These options function as follows: Global Acknowledge. When global acknowledge is enabled, one press of the SUPV ACK key acknowledges every point currently reporting a supervisory condition. Individual Acknowledge. If individual acknowledge is enabled, the SUPV ACK key must be pressed to individually acknowledge each supervisory condition. Individual acknowledge must be selected if the panel is providing proprietary receiving service in accordance with NFPA72. The SUPV ACK key, which is used to acknowledge supervisory conditions (either globally or individually), is located just beneath the SUPERVISORY LED. Refer to Figure 4-1. If the SUPV ACK key is passcode protected (by default, it is not), you cannot use this key to acknowledge supervisory conditions unless you have the required passcode. 4-2

159 19BAcknowledging Supervisory Conditions 76BGlobally Acknowledging Supervisory Conditions Pressing the SUPV ACK key once globally acknowledges all supervisory conditions that exist within the fire alarm system. In addition, the SUPERVISORY LED changes from flashing to steady ON and the tone-alert silences. If global acknowledge is enabled on your system, use the following procedure to acknowledge the supervisory conditions. 1. Unlock and open the enclosure door. The alphanumeric display shows the supervisory condition, similar to the following example. **SUPERVISORY** Press <ACK> to review FIRE = 0 PRI2 = 0 SUPV = 1 TRBL = 0 2. Press the SUPV ACK key under the flashing yellow LED. The alphanumeric display shows the area and type of condition. The tone-alert silences and the yellow LED glows steady. REVERE BASEMENT NORTH WING ROOM 31 SPRINKLER MONITOR ABNORMAL Read the alphanumeric display. Investigate the problem to determine its cause. Restore or replace the defective device (switch, wire, notification appliance) in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions, or call Simplex to repair the system. When the problem causing the supervisory is corrected, the supervisory automatically clears and, after a delay, the alphanumeric display indicates that the system status is normal. 7BIndividually Acknowledging Supervisory Conditions If individual acknowledge is enabled on your system, you need to separately acknowledge each supervisory condition. Use the following procedure to do this. 1. Unlock and open the enclosure door. The alphanumeric display shows the supervisory condition, similar to the following example. **SUPERVISORY** Press <ACK> to review FIRE = 0 PRI2 = 0 SUPV = 1 TRBL = 0 Continued on next page 4-3

160 Acknowledging Supervisory Conditions, Continued Individually Acknowledging Supervisory Conditions 2. Press the SUPV ACK key. Repeat this step and read the reports. The alphanumeric display shows the area and type of condition. The tone-alert silences and the yellow LED glows steady. a. The tone-alert silences and the LED glows steady. b. The display shows the area and type of problem, as shown below. FIRST FLOOR EAST WING ROOM 31 Press <ACK> key to acknowledge OR FIRST FLOOR EAST WING ROOM 31 FIRE PUMP MONITOR RUNNING 3. Read the alphanumeric display. Investigate the problem to determine its cause. Restore or replace the defective device (switch, wire, notification appliance) in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions, or call Simplex to repair the system. When the problem causing the condition is corrected, the SUPERVISORY LED flashes and the tone-alert sounds steady. 4. Press the SUPV ACK key. The display shows the system status. 5. Press the SUPV ACK key again. After a short delay, the display indicates that the system is normal. 4-4

161 Chapter 5 4BSelecting Points for Status and Control 78BIntroduction Many of the advanced operations that can be accomplished from the operator interface first require you to select the point on which you want to perform the operation. Points can be selected in one of three ways. Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory List. Points that are reporting an alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition can be selected from the active alarm, trouble, or supervisory list. Using the Menu. The menu system includes an option that allows you to scroll through each category (monitor, signal, etc.) of point, and then after selecting a category, you can scroll through the points for the category. Using the Entry Keys. The Entry keys, located on the far right of the operator interface, contain abbreviated labels for each category of point. (For example, the key in the upper left corner of the Entry keys is labeled ZONE and the key to its right is labeled SIG. Pressing one of these keys causes the system to prompt you to select a specific point within the selected category. 79BIn this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Selecting Points from Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory List 5-2 Selecting Points from the Menu 5-3 Selecting Points with the Entry Keypad

162 20BSelecting Points from Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory List 80BProcedure When a point experiences an abnormal condition, such as an alarm, trouble, or supervisory, it is added to the appropriate list (alarm list, supervisory list, or trouble list). Points within these lists can be selected as follows: 1. Press the appropriate acknowledge key to enter the list. (For example, press the FIRE ALARM ACK key to enter the list of current fire alarms; press the TROUBLE ACK key to enter the list of current troubles). 2. Use the NEXT and PREV keys to scroll through the entries in this list. Stop scrolling when the point you are interested in is displayed. 5-2

163 21BSelecting Points from the Menu 81BProcedure 1. Press the MENU key to enter the panel s menu system. 2. Press the NEXT key until the alphanumeric display reads as follows: Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll Select a List of Points? 3. Press ENTER. The display reads as follows: Press ENTER to select a list of points All Monitor Zones? 4. Press the NEXT key to scroll through the categories of points until the appropriate category is shown. Press the ENTER key. The first point in the selected category appears. In the example below, the point shown is the first one in the monitor zone category. MONITOR CARD 1 ZONE NUMBER 1 FIRE MONITOR ZONE NORMAL 5. Press the NEXT key to scroll through the list of points in the category. When the point that you want to select is displayed, press ENTER. 5-3

164 2BSelecting Points with the Entry Keypad 82BOverview The Entry Keypad, shown below, allows you to quickly select a category of points. For example, pressing the ZONE key on the upper left side of the keypad selects the monitor zone category. After selecting a category, messages on the display prompt you for the specific point in the category. You can use the keypad to select either a local point or a network point. A local point is one that is physically connected to the panel you are currently at, and a network point is one that is located on a different panel but has been programmed so that it can be selected and controlled from another panel. Figure 5 1. Entry Keypad 83BSelecting Points Refer to the following table for information on using the keypad to select local points on this panel. Table 5 1. Keypad Use Key ZONE allows you to select a Monitor Zone point. SIG allows you to select a Signal point. AUX allows you to select an Auxiliary Relay Data to Enter ZN, followed by ENTER, where ZN represents a zone card and is a number from 1 to n. (n represents the number of the last zone card in your system.) After selecting a zone, use NEXT and PREV to scroll through the points. SIG, followed by ENTER, where SIG represents a signal card and is number from 3 to n. (n represents the number of the last signal card in your system.) After selecting a signal card, use NEXT and PREV to scroll through the signal points. AUX, followed by ENTER, where AUX represents an auxiliary relay and is a number from 3 to n. (n represents the number of the last auxiliary relay in your system.) Continued on next page 5-4

165 Selecting Points with the Entry Keypad, Continued Selecting Points Press this Key on Keypad FB allows you to select a feedback point. IO allows you to select a point on a 24 Point I/O card IDNet allows you to select an IDNet, MAPNET, or VESDA point. P / A / L allows you to select a digital (P), analog (A), or List (L) pseudo point. NET allows you to select a network point. ADDR = sw address of the point in the system Table 5-1. Keypad Use (continued) Data to Enter FB, followed by ENTER, where FB represents a feedback point and is a number from 3 to n. (n represents the number of the last feedback point in your system.) IO, followed by ENTER, where IO represents a point and is a number from 1 to n. (n represents the number of the last I/O point in your system. C-D, followed by ENTER, where C represents the IDNet, MAPNET, or VESDA channel and D represents the device number. You must insert the dash between channel and device. Use the NET key to insert the dash. Notes: IDNet. Specify the channel with a number from 1 through 10. Use the number 0 to represent channel 10. Device numbers on each IDNet channel run from 1 to 250. MAPNET. Specify the channel then the device. Device numbers on each MAPNET channel run from 1 to 127. VESDA. Specify the channel then the device. Device numbers on each VESDA channel run from 1 to 127. Enter the number corresponding to the digital pseudo, analog pseudo, or list point. For example, pressing the P key and entering a 1 selects the Alarm Silence Key pseudo point. Enter a network NODE number, followed by ENTER. The system then prompts for the type of point you want to select. Press the keypad key corresponding to the type of point (Zone, Signal, etc.) Use the descriptions above for information on selecting the specific point. Specify the address using the format C-P-S, where C is the card, P is the point, and S is the subpoint. You must insert the dash between the components of the address. Use the NET key to enter the dash. 5-5

166 Chapter 6 5BAdvanced Functions 84BIntroduction This chapter describes advanced functions that you can perform from the operator interface panel. 85BIn this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Logging In and Out of the System 6-2 Setting System Time and Date 6-5 Viewing the Time at which an Event Occurred 6-6 Enabling and Disabling Points 6-7 Forcing Points On and Off 6-8 Displaying and Clearing Historical Logs 6-9 Printing Reports

167 23BLogging In and Out of the System 86BIntroduction The FACP system uses four access levels, referred to by the numbers one through four, to control what system operators can do with the system. The system typically operates at access level one, which allows an operator to accomplish basic tasks (for example, acknowledge alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions) without logging in to the system. Other functions for example, the use of the user-defined function keys are passcode protected to prevent access by unauthorized personnel. 87BLog In Procedure Follow these steps to log in to the system at access level two, three, or four. The keypad used to enter the passcode is located behind the interface panel access door. 1. Obtain the passcode for the access level at which you want to operate. 2. Press the <MENU> key on the Display/Action keypad, located on the right side of the interface panel. The alphanumeric display shows the following message. Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll Change Access Level? 3. Press the <ENTER> key on the Display/Action keypad. The following message displays. 1 = Login 2 = Logout CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = 1 4. Press the 1 key on the Display/Action keypad. The display shows the following message. Enter a Passcode followed by <ENTER> 5. Enter the passcode for the access level. The passcode can be up to 10 numbers in length. Press the <ENTER> key on the Display/Action keypad when you have finished entering the code. An X is displayed for each digit of your passcode, as shown below. Enter a Passcode followed by <ENTER> XXX Continued on next page 6-2

168 Logging In and Out of the System, Continued Log In Procedure If the passcode entered in Step 5 is correct, the following message is shown. Enter a Passcode followed by <ENTER> ACCESS GRANTED After a brief pause, the system displays the granted access level, such as the level 2 message shown below. 1 = Login 2 = Logout CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = 2 Press the <CLR> key twice. The display shows the system status, as shown below. 1 = Login 2 = Logout CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = 2 8BLog Out Procedure Failure to log out allows unauthorized personnel access to the various passcode protected functions. If no keypad activity is detected for ten minutes, the system returns to Level 1 access. Perform the following procedure to log out and return the operator access level to Level Press the <MENU> key. The following message is displayed. Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll Change Access Level? 2. Press the <ENTER> key. The following message is displayed. 1 = Login 2 = Logout CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = 2 Continued on next page 6-3

169 Logging In and Out of the System, Continued Log Out Procedure 3. Press the <F2> key. After a brief pause, the display shows a message similar to the one below. 1 = Login 2 = Logout CURRENT ACCESS REDUCED TO LEVEL 1 4. Press the <CLR> key to exit. The display shows the system status. 6-4

170 24BSetting System Time and Date 89BProcedure Follow these steps to set the time and date used by the FACP. Ensuring that the current time and date are correct on the system is important. In particular, the accuracy of historical logs and reports depends on the system time 1. Press the MENU key. Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key until the display shows the option for setting time and date. Press <Next> or <Previous> to Scroll Set Time and Date? 2. Press the ENTER key. The system responds as follows: Press <INFO> to Change Time and Date 12:44:12 am WED 01-JAN Press the MORE INFO key. The display shows the time and date and places an underline character under the hour, meaning it is the part of the time and date that can be changed. 12:44:12 am WED 01-JAN Set the time and date as follows: Time. Use the < and > keys to move the underline character between hours and minutes. Use the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to increment or decrement the value. For example, to change the minutes, first use the < and > keys to move the highlight under the minutes field. Then use the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to change the value of the minutes field. Date. Use the < and > keys to move the underline character between the components of the date field. Use the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to increment or decrement the value of the field until it is correct. 5. When the date and time are correct, press the ENTER key. 6-5

171 25BViewing the Time at which an Event Occurred 90BOverview The system records the time at which each alarm, trouble, and supervisory event occurs. You can view this information in one of two ways: By displaying or printing the historical alarm or trouble log. Refer to Displaying Historical Logs later in this chapter for information on doing this. By scrolling through the list of active alarm, trouble, or supervisory conditions, selecting a specific event, and using the EVENT TIME key. Refer to the procedure below for information on doing this. 91BProcedure 1. Select the alarm, trouble, or supervisory event whose event time you want to display. To do this, follow these steps. a. Press the FIRE ALARM ACK, PRIORITY 2 ACK, TROUBLE ACK, or SUPERVISORY ACK key to enter the appropriate list of events. (For example, press the FIRE ALARM ACK key to enter the list of active fire alarms.) b. Use the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to scroll through the list until the alarm in which you are interested is displayed. c. Press the EVENT TIME key. The time at which the alarm, priority 2 alarm, trouble, or supervisory occurred appears in the display. 6-6

172 26BEnabling and Disabling Points 92BOverview Enabling and disabling points is sometimes necessary when performing maintenance on the system. When using this function, it is critical that you understand whether Custom Control (either the system s default Custom Control or any user Custom Control) makes reference to the point or not. Actions driven by custom control are suspended for the duration of time the point is disabled, but execute immediately after the point is enabled. Example. Suppose you disable a signal point and during the time the point is disabled, a Custom Control equation executes that turns the point ON. This action is suspended for the duration of time the point is disabled. However, when the point is subsequently enabled, the point s state updates and the Custom Control equation turning the point ON executes, turning the signal ON. 93BProcedure Follow these steps to enable or disable a point. 1. Select the point. Refer to Chapter 5 for information on selecting points. 2. Press the DISABLE or ENABLE key. 3. Press the ENTER key to carry out the action. The system generates a Disable Trouble to remind you that the point is disabled. When you enable the point again, the trouble clears. 6-7

173 27BForcing Points On and Off 94BOverview Forcing control points ON and OFF allows a precise degree of manual system control. For example, you can force a relay or signal point ON to test or execute its function. Unlike ENABLE/DISABLE (see description in previous section), a point that you force OFF does not refresh its state when the point is turned back ON. Example. Suppose you turn a signal point OFF and during the time the point is disabled, a Custom Control equation executes that turns the point ON. When the point is subsequently returned to automatic operation, the point s state does not update and the Custom Control equation turning the point ON does not execute. 95BForcing Points ON and OFF Follow these steps to force a point ON or OFF. 1. Select the point. Refer to Chapter 5 for information on selecting points. 2. Press the ON or OFF key. 3. Press the ENTER key to carry out the action. The system generates a Manual Override Trouble for the point to remind you that the point has been forced ON or OFF. 96BReturning a Point to Automatic Operation Automatic operation is the normal operation of the point. For example, if the point is a signal point, a setting of AUTOMATIC indicates that the signal is under the control of the job executing on the panel. To return the state of a point that is currently ON or OFF to AUTOMATIC, follow these steps. 1. Select the point. Refer to Chapter 5 for information on selecting points. 2. Press the AUTOMATIC key. 3. Press the ENTER key to carry out the action. The system clears the Manual Override Trouble. 6-8

174 28BDisplaying and Clearing Historical Logs 97BOverview Historical logs provide a record of both the events that have occurred on the system and the actions taken by an operator to manage those events. The system contains the following logs. Historical Alarm Log. Provides detailed information on each alarm, including time and date stamp, that has occurred since the last time the logs were cleared. Historical Trouble Log. Provides detailed information on each trouble, including time and date stamp, that has occurred since the last time the logs were cleared. 98BDisplaying/Clearing Historical Logs 1. Press the MENU key. Use the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to scroll through the choices until the DISPLAY HISTORICAL ALARM LOG or DISPLAY HISTORICAL TROUBLE LOG choice is displayed. 2. Press ENTER to enter the log file. 3. Use the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to scroll through the entries in the selected log. 6-9

175 29BPrinting Reports 9BOverview The system can generate any of the following reports. Table 6 1. Reports Report Alarm History Log Report Trouble History Log Report TrueAlarm Status Report TrueAlarm Service Report TrueAlert Device Report Description Report includes all information contained in the alarm history log device number, custom label, time and date device entered alarm. Report includes all information contained in the trouble history log device number, custom label, type of trouble, time and date device experienced trouble. Reports the following information for each point. Device Number Custom Label Current Sensitivity of the Point Point Status: Normal, Trouble, Alarm Almost Dirty Status: Points which are almost dirty have an asterisk in this field to denote this. Reports the following information for each point. Device Number Custom Label Alarm Level (sensitivity level of the device) Average Value Current Value -- Percent of Alarm: Shows the current value for the sensor. Value is shown as a percentage of 100 percent (alarm). For example, if the value shown is 9%, it means that the sensor is currently at 9% of the value required to trigger an alarm. Peak Value. Shows the highest value that the sensor has reached. Value is shown as a percentage of 100 percent (alarm). For example, if the value shown is 9%, it means that the peak value experienced by the sensor was 9% of the value required to trigger an alarm. Current State: Possible values include Normal, Trouble, Dirty, Excessively Dirty, and Almost Dirty. Report the following information for each TrueAlert device. Point ID Custom Label Device Type Candela Continued on next page 6-10

176 Printing Reports, Continued Overview Report TrueAlert Status Report Table 6-1. Reports (continued) Description This report can be created after the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test (see Chapter 7) is run. It reports the following information for each Multi Candela TrueAlert Device. Point ID Custom Label Pass/Fail Report the following information for each SLC Nominal Current (A) - The current draw on the TrueAlert circuit when the test was run. Worst Case Current (A) - The current draw on the SLC under worst case operating conditions. Worst Case voltage Above/Below threshold (V) This report provides the following information regarding the CO devices: TrueAlarm CO Report Device Number (on the network) Custom Label (custom description of device) Current Device Value (PPM) End-of-Life Date Device Status (Normal, Trouble) This report provides the following information regarding the Install Mode list: Install Mode List Report Point ID Custom Label Device Status This report provides the following information for each device supporting alarm verification: Alarm Verification Tally Report Device Number Custom Label Device Type Point Type Tally Count 10BProcedure 1. Press the MENU key. Use the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to scroll through the choices until the PRINT REPORTS? choice is displayed. 2. Use the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to scroll through the categories of report (Alarm History, Trouble History, etc.). 3. When the category of report you want to print is displayed, press ENTER. The system prompts you to confirm that you want to generate the report. Press ENTER again. The report prints on the panel s report printer. 6-11

177 4 Chapter 7 0BInstall Mode Introduction The Install Mode is a 4100ES feature that allows the user to minimize the amount of Troubles that occur when the system is being installed or when it is undergoing extensive service. Install Mode allows the technician to select device points and cards that might raise Troubles due to installation issues and place them in Install Mode. Install Mode will only raise one Trouble INSTALL MODE ACTIVE, regardless of the number of items in it. Install mode is available on Panels programmed with a revision 1.01 of the ES Programmer or later. In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics Topic Page Accessing Install Mode 7-2 Adding and Removing Items to and from Install Mode 7-3 Adding and Removing Points and Cards 7-3 Adding and Removing Lists 7-4 Adding and removing groups to Install Mode 7-4 Viewing Install Mode

178 Accessing Install Mode Accessing Install Mode Install mode is accessed directly from the user interface. To access Install Mode: I. Power-up the panel 2. Log into the FACP at a level3 or higher. Once logged in, you can move and remove points, cards, lists and groups to and from Install Mode. 7-2

179 Adding and Removing Items to and from Install Mode Adding and Removing Points and Cards Moving a point or a card to Install Mode: IMPORTANT: A Card in the Install Mode List no longer reports Card Faults. For example, a Power Supply in Install Mode does not report AC Failures, Depleted/Missing Batteries, or Ground Faults. 1. Press on the button that represents the point type you want to add to Install Mode. For example, press on the 6 button to access IDNet points. 2. Enter the Name or Address of the item you want to add. 3. Press Enter 4. Once the Item appears on the display, press the More Info button. 5. Use the arrows to find and select Add this Point/Card to Install Mode?. 6. Press Enter to confirm the selection and move the item to Install mode. Removing a point or a card to Install Mode: 1. Press on the button that represents the point type you want to move to Install Mode. 2. Enter the Name or Address of the item you want to move. 3. Press Enter 4. Once the Item appears on the display, press the More Info button. 5. Use the arrows to find and select Remove Point/Card from Install Mode?. 6. Press Enter to confirm the selection and remove the point/card from Install Mode. Depending upon the state of the point being removed (normal or alarm, respectively), one of the following screens is displayed: Please stand by M1-6 Will Enable in 60 seconds Or **WARNING** Press <Disable> to abort M1-6 will Alarm in 60 seconds IMPORTANT: An Alarm could be reported after removing a List or a Card from the Install Mode List (without warning). 7-3

180 Adding and Removing Item to and from Install Mode, Continued Adding and Removing Lists Adding and Removing Lists from Install Mode: Note: For information on making lists refer to the ES Panel Programmer s Manual ( ). 1. Press on the 9 button to access the lists. 2. Enter the Number of the list you want to move. 3. Press Enter 4. Once the Item appears on the display: Press 1 to move the List to Install Mode Press 2 to remove the List from Install Mode. Once the action has been confirmed the following screen will appear. Please stand by M1-6 Will Enable in 60 seconds IMPORTANT: An Alarm could be reported after removing a List or a Card from the Install Mode List (without warning). Adding and removing groups to Install Mode Adding a group of points that raise the same Trouble to Install mode: 1. Press on the Menu button. 2. Use the Arrows to Scroll to the Diagnostic Function option. 3. Press Enter. 4. From that menu, use the arrows to scroll down to the View/Change Install Mode List option. 5. Press Enter. 6. From View Change Install Mode List use the arrows to scroll down and select the group of Troubles you want moved to Install Mode. For Example: Move NO ANSWER devices to Install mode? 7. Select the group and press Enter to add them to Install Mode. Removing a group of points from Install Mode: 1. Press on the Menu button. 2. Use the Arrows to Scroll to the Diagnostic Function option. 3. Press Enter. 4. From that menu, use the arrows to scroll down to the View/Change Install Mode List option. 5. Press Enter. 6. From View Change Install Mode List use the arrows to scroll down and select either: Remove ALL NORMAL pts from Install Mode Remove ALL POINTS from Install Mode. Choosing this option makes the following screen appear: Please stand by M1-6 Will Enable in 60 seconds IMPORTANT: Active Alarms can initiate without warning after the 60 second countdown. 7-4

181 Viewing Install Mode Viewing Install Mode To view Install Mode: 1. Press the Menu button. 2. Use the Arrows to Scroll to the Diagnostic Function option. 3. Press Enter. 4. From that menu, use the arrows to scroll down to the View/Change Install Mode List option. 5. Press Enter. 6. From View Change Install Mode List use the arrows to scroll down and select View the Install Mode List 7. Press Enter to Display the List of items in Install Mode. 7-5

182 Chapter 8 6BSystem Test Procedures 101BIntroduction This section describes performing the system tests that can be performed from the front panel of the FACP. 102BIn this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Lamp Test / Tone Alert Test 8-2 Walk Test Overview 8-3 Setting WalkTest Options 8-5 TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test 8-6 Disable IDNET CO Algorithms

183 30BLamp Test / Tone Alert Test 103BOverview The LAMP TEST key on the operator interface panel is used to determine local lamp failures within the system. Lamps on the operator interface panel illuminate along with the five function and acknowledge LEDs. The tone-alert (buzzer) can also be tested with the LAMP TEST. 104BPerforming a Lamp Test Do the following procedures to test for lamp failures. 1. Press the LAMP TEST push-button. All LEDs should illuminate (lamps should stay illuminated as long as the key is depressed). 2. If you find defective lamps/leds, contact your local Simplex branch office. 105BTesting the Tone- Alert Holding the Lamp Test key for more than 3 seconds tests the tone-alert. 8-2

184 31BWalk Test Overview 106BOverview WalkTest allows the function of the system s initiating devices and signals to be tested by a single person. Conducting a WalkTest requires you to perform the following steps. Step 1. Create WalkTest Groups. The FACP supports up to eight Walk Test groups. This allows the building to be divided into small portions for the Walk Test, and allows the rest of the building to be protected by the fire alarm panel. Each group has a list of monitor points (initiating devices) and a list of the signal circuits that activate when one of the group s control points activates. Refer to Chapter 9 of the ES Panel Programmer s Manual ( ) for information on adding monitor points (initiating devices) and signals/relays to a WalkTest group. Step 2. Enable WalkTest Options from Front Panel. These options include the following. Refer to the Setting WalkTest Options later in this section for information on setting these options. Which WalkTest Group is enabled. Whether the group s signals turn on when a monitor point in the same group activates. Turn this option on (along with the WalkTest logging option) to perform a silent WalkTest on the system. Whether logging of WalkTest information is enabled or not. (Enable this option to perform a silent WalkTest.) Step 3. Manually Activate Initiating Devices in Each Group and Interpret Signals. Individually activate each initiating device in the group, using a magnet or canned smoke. Make sure to proceed in a logical manner (i.e., start with the lowest IDNet or MAPNET address and work toward the highest). Each time you activate an initiating device, the system s signals pulse a code that allows you to verify exactly which initiating device triggered the signals. For hardwired monitor zones, the signal code corresponds to the number of the zone. (For example, if the zone number is eight, the signals pulse eight times to indicate zone eight.) For IDNet and MAPNET devices, the first set of pulses from the signals correspond to the channel. The signals then pauses momentarily and the second set of pulses correspond to the number of the device on the channel. For example, if you activate an IDNet smoke detector with an address of M1-25, the signals would sound once to indicate channel one, pause for a short duration, and then sound 2 times pause, and then sound 5 times to indicate device 25. In some cases, immediately after verifying the function of an initiating device, you may also want to verify its ability to generate a trouble condition. To do this, cause a trouble on the device (i.e., remove the sensor from a TrueAlarm device), and then listen to the signals. The signals sound steady for 4 seconds to indicate trouble conditions, then reset. 107BImportant Notes Signals and initiating devices (with the exception of pull stations) automatically acknowledge and automatically reset, allowing for one-man testing without the need for someone at the main control panel to acknowledge and reset the system each time an initiating device and its associated signals activate. A silent Walk Test may be performed (no signals will sound) and logging of events may be selected. Refer to Setting WalkTest Options below for additional information. Continued on next page 8-3

185 Walk Test Overview, Continued Important Notes If an alarm condition is detected from a zone that is not in the present active Walk Test group, the system will operate as a fire alarm panel and the active Walk Test groups are aborted. 8-4

186 32BSetting WalkTest Options 108BEnabling WalkTest for a Group 1. Press the MENU key and then use the NEXT and PREV keys until ENABLE WALKTEST? is displayed. Press ENTER. 2. Use the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to scroll through the WalkTest groups until the group that you want to test is displayed. Press ENTER. A screen similar to the following appears. 1 = on->off 2 = no->log 3 =?->ZONE 4 = no->sig 109BSetting Options Each of the options shown in the example above is associated with a number from one to four. Pressing the associated number on the keypad toggles the setting of the option. The arrow points to choice currently enabled for the option. Example: The first option shown above( 1 = on --> OFF )allows you to turn WalkTest on and off for the group you selected in Step 2 above. In the example, the arrow points to OFF, indicating that WalkTest is not currently on for the selected group. To turn it on, you would press the number 1 on the keypad. When you do this, the arrow turns around to indicate that ON is selected and the option reads 1 = ON <-- off. The options are as follows Option 1 = on --> OFF 2 = no --> LOG 3 =? --> ZONE 4 = no --> SIG Table 8 1. WalkTest Options Description Turns WalkTest on and off for the selected group. Press 1 on the keypad to toggle the setting of the option. Allows you to enable or disable logging. If the arrow points to LOG, logging is enabled. If the arrow points to NO, logging is disabled. Press 2 on the keypad to toggle the setting of this option. When ZONE is selected, the signals play a code that indicates the activated initiating device s address. (For hardwired zones, the signals sound the number of the zone. For IDNet and MAPNET, the code has two parts, separated by a pause. The first part indicates the channel and the second part indicates the device number. When? is selected, the signals play 2 ¼ second pulses. Press 3 on the keypad to toggle the setting of this option. Allows you to configure a silent WalkTest (i.e., no signals are used). Make sure to enable the logging of Walk Test events, which allows each zone with an abnormal condition to be time tagged and added to the log. See previous option above. When SIG is selected, signals sound during the WalkTest. When NO is selected, no signals are used during the WalkTest. 8-5

187 3BTrueNAC Voltage Drop Test 10BOverview The TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test is used in conjunction with the TrueNAC Circuit Design tool. A job is first designed using the TrueNAC Circuit Design tool. The tool provides a report with job layout and device voltages. After the job is installed, the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test is run to verify proper installation of the 4906 devices. The TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test determines the line voltage for notification appliances that are connected to a TrueAlert Power Supply s (TPS) Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) channels, under worst case panel operating conditions. It differs from simply checking with a meter, in that the voltage output of the panel under nominal operating conditions is typically higher than the voltage output under worst case conditions (e.g. on end-of-life batteries). Prior to the start of the test, the horn volume is selected to be either ON (horns set to high volume) or OFF (silent testing of the system). The TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test is compatible only with the 4906 series TrueAlert devices connected to a TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS). The test can be run on a single TrueAlert SLC, or on all the TPS s in the system. If older "fixed candela devices are present, the tool will indicate incompatible devices and will not run. This will also be indicated in the report TPS PCA's Revision E and older may be updated with the latest slave code to run the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test. The results will be less accurate than with Revision F or later TPS's. The reports will also indicate the use of an older TPS and caution that results are less accurate. If older TPS slave code (1.04 and earlier) is installed on a newer TPS PCA (Revision F or later), a "HW CONFIG/SW REV MISMATCH TROUBLE" trouble will be indicated on the FACP. The TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test performs the following diagnostic verification: Devices are polled and report terminal voltage, candela rating, and device type to the FACP. The line impedance of the SLC channel is determined through the TrueNAC algorithm. Notification Appliances that fall below the device threshold are reported as failed devices to the FACP, and the panel indicates TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test failed trouble. Devices that have failed the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test require the following actions: Fix the device with the lowest voltage as indicated in the TrueNAC status report. Repeat the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test. The FACP keeps track of the devices that failed the TrueNAC Voltage Drop test. A trouble alarm is indicated on the panel for devices that failed the test. This trouble is cleared after hardware reset. The TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test must be repeated to verify that all troubles are fixed. 1BAccessing the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test To gain access to the TrueNAC Voltage Drop diagnostic test, you must login with an access level higher than level one (Refer to Chapter 6 for access level discussion). 1. Press the <MENU> key on the Display/Action keypad, located on the right side of the interface panel. The alphanumeric display shows the following message. Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll Change Access Level? Continued on next page 8-6

188 TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test, Continued 12BAccessing the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test 2. Press the <NEXT> key on the Display/Action keypad. Use the <NEXT> and <PREVIOUS> keys to scroll to the Diagnostic Functions. The following message displays. Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll Diagnostic Functions? 3. Press the <ENTER> key on the Display/Action keypad. Scroll to the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test using the <NEXT> and <PREVIOUS> keys on the Display/Action keypad. The following message displays. Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll TrueAlert TrueNAC Test? 4. Press the <ENTER> key on the Display/Action keypad. The following message displays. ALL TPS SLCs <ENTER>=Enable TrueNAC Test 13BTesting all TrueAlert Power Supply s SLCs Use the following procedure to test all the TrueAlert Power Supply s SLC lines at once. Before you start this test, make sure you have already completed the procedure Accessing the TrueNac Voltage Drop Test. 1. Press the <ENTER> key on the Display/Action keypad. The following message displays. ALL TPS SLCs <ENTER>=HORN ON 2. To turn the horn on or off before performing the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test, use the <NEXT> and <PREVIOUS> keys to set the horn state. Note: The horn can be turned off to prevent any disturbance during the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test. Horns that are turned on are set to high volume. If Horns are on, the panel will perform two passes one with horns on and one with horns off. This is done to enhance measurement accuracy with A/V s. Continued on next page 8-7

189 TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test, Continued 14BTesting all TrueAlert Power Supply s SLCs 3. Press the <ENTER> key on the Display/Action keypad. If the test is successful, the following message displays. ALL TPS SLCs TrueAlert TEST COMPLETED 15BTesting each TrueAlert Power Supply s SLC Use the following procedure to test separately each of the TrueAlert Power Supply s SLC lines. Before you start this test, make sure you have already completed the procedure Accessing the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test. 1. Press the <NEXT> key on the Display/Action keypad. The following message displays. CARD X, TRUEALERT POWER SUPPLY <ENTER>=Select Channel 2. Press the <ENTER> key on the Display/Action keypad. The following message displays. TPS CARD: X Channel: X <ENTER>=Enable TrueNAC Test 3. Use the <NEXT> and <PREVIOUS> keys on the Display/Action keypad to change the SLC channel. 4. Press the <ENTER> key on the Display/Action keypad. The following message displays. TPS CARD: X Channel: X <ENTER>=HORN ON 5. To turn the horn on or off before performing the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test, use the <NEXT> and <PREVIOUS> keys to set the horn state. Note: The horn can be turned off to prevent any disturbance during the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test. Horns that are turned on are set to high volume. If Horns are on, the panel will perform two passes one with horns on and one with horns off. This is done to enhance measurement accuracy with A/V s. Continued on next page 8-8

190 TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test, Continued 16BTesting each TrueAlert Power Supply s SLC 6. Press the <ENTER> key on the Display/Action keypad. If the test is successful, the following message displays. TPS CARD: X Channel: X TrueNAC TEST COMPLETED 17BThe TrueNAC Report A TrueNAC status report can be generated by the panel with the completion of the TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test. Sample reports are shown below. 18BTrueNAC Report Samples Example of a successful single-channel test: Service Port Page 1 Report 6: TrueAlert Device Status Report 10:23:45am WED 07-FEB TPS 3 SLC 1 POINT ID CUSTOM LABEL TEST RESULT T3-1-1 Cafeteria East PASSED T3-1-2 Cafeteria West PASSED T3-1-3 Main Lobby PASSED T3-1-4 Library East PASSED T3-1-5 Library West PASSED NOMINAL CURRENT (A): 1.34 WORST_CASE CURRENT (A): 1.97 WORST_CASE VOLTAGE ABOVE/BELOW THRESHOLD (V): 0.9 SLC HAS NOT PASSED UNLESS ALL DEVICES ARE MARKED AS PASSED Continued on next page 8-9

191 TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test, Continued 19BTrueNAC Report Samples Example of a failed single-channel test: Service Port Page 1 Report 6: TrueAlert Device Status Report 10:23:45am WED 07-FEB TPS 3 SLC 1 POINT ID CUSTOM LABEL TEST RESULT T3-1-1 Cafeteria East PASSED T3-1-2 Cafeteria West PASSED T3-1-3 Main Lobby PASSED T3-1-4 Library East PASSED T3-1-5 Library West FAILED -0.4 T3-1-6 Electrical West FAILED -0.6 NOMINAL CURRENT (A): 1.34 WORST_CASE CURRENT (A): 1.97 WORST_CASE VOLTAGE ABOVE/BELOW THRESHOLD (V): -0.6 SLC HAS NOT PASSED UNLESS ALL DEVICES ARE MARKED AS PASSED Example of a successful test with an old HW version for TPS 3: Service Port Page 1 Report 6: TrueAlert Device Status Report 10:23:45am WED 07-FEB-07 TPS 3 SLC 1 POINT ID CUSTOM LABEL TEST RESULT T3-1-1 Cafeteria East PASSED T3-1-2 Cafeteria West PASSED T3-1-3 Main Lobby PASSED T3-1-4 Library East PASSED T3-1-5 Library West PASSED NOMINAL CURRENT (A): 1.34 WORST_CASE CURRENT (A): 1.97 WORST_CASE VOLTAGE ABOVE/BELOW THRESHOLD (V): 0.8 WARNING: OLD VERSION OF TPS HARDWARE USED, RESULTS MAY HAVE GREATER VARIATIONS THAN EXPECTED SLC HAS NOT PASSED UNLESS ALL DEVICES ARE MARKED AS PASSED Continued on next page 8-10

192 TrueNAC Voltage Drop Test, Continued 120BTrueNAC Report Samples Example of an aborted (incompatible device problem) test Service Port Page 1 Report 6: TrueAlert Device Status Report 10:23:45am WED 07-FEB-07 TPS 3 SLC 1 POINT ID CUSTOM LABEL TEST RESULT T3-1-1 Auditorium North PASSED T3-1-2 Auditorium South PASSED T3-1-3 Auditorium Lobby DEVICE NOT COMPATIBLE NOMINAL CURRENT (A): 0.80 WORST_CASE CURRENT (A): 1.17 WORST_CASE VOLTAGE ABOVE/BELOW THRESHOLD (V): 1.2 SLC HAS NOT PASSED UNLESS ALL DEVICES ARE MARKED AS PASSED

193 Disable IDNET CO Algorithms 121BOverview The Disable IDNET CO Algorithms is one of the options available under the Diagnostics menu, at the front panel of the FACP. When choosing this option, the technician ensures that the CO sensors will get a testing threshold downloaded and the CO over time is disabled. With the Disable IDNET CO Algorithms option on, the technician can then proceed to test the devices with the WalkTest option Enabled or Disabled. When the Disable IDNET CO Algorithms is entered, a trouble will be generated. The trouble screen that will appear will look as follows: IDNET CO ALGORITHMS DISABLED (TROUBLE) TROUBLE POINT ABNORMAL Since all three possible sensors (photo, heat and CO) could be tested simultaneously, the LED on the base will be used to give the technician an indication of the test result. The LED states and their meanings are as follows: LED OFF - No sensors have passed the test LED ON - At least one sensor has passed the test (If testing only one sensor this is the LED state you'd expect if the test passed). LED FLASHING - All sensors for this device have passed the test (Note: This could be 2 or 3 sensors depending on what type of CO combination device is configured. This state will not be seen if only a single sensor is being tested) Because the sensors can either be tested one at a time or by combining multiple technologies into a single test, one can follow two similar approaches to complete the tests. Figures 8-1 and 8-2 show the two flowcharts denoting those approaches. FigureTag FD Figure 8-1. Testing a Single CO Sensor Continued on next page 8-12

194 Disable IDNET CO Algorithms, Continued FigureTag FD Figure 8-2. Simultaneous Testing of Multiple Sensor Technologies 12BDisable IDNET CO Algorithms without WalkTest Enabled 123BDisable IDNET CO Algorithms with WalkTest Enabled With the WalkTest option disabled, the devices will bring in actual alarms at the panel unless specific custom control is written to prevent this. With the WalkTest option enabled, the devices won't go into alarm at the panel. Instead the device that went over threshold will be coded out and a print message will be generated to show that it passed a functional test. 8-13

195 Chapter 9 7BAudio Operations 124BIntroduction The FACP audio system provides the following functionality. Automatic, Pre-recorded Messages, which automatically play in response to system events. For example, when a fire alarm is detected on the system, a message known as the Primary Evacuation message automatically plays. Manually Selected, Pre-Recorded Messages. Some systems are capable of playing a prerecorded message when a specific button is pressed. For example, you may press a button to play an attention tone and phrase before using the microphone to make a live audio announcement. Live Audio. Microphones connected to the audio system allow operators to issue live announcement messages. 125BIn this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Single Channel Audio Operation 9-2 Single Channel Audio Plus Paging 9-5 Two Channel Audio Operation 9-7 Three to Eight Channel Audio System Operation

196 34BSingle Channel Audio Operation 126BOverview This section describes the single channel and single channel plus paging audio systems. The term Single Channel Audio refers to the audio capability of the system. A Single Channel Audio system has the ability to play pre-recorded messages or live audio messages, but it cannot do both at one time. For example, suppose the building s audio system is divided into eight groups, each of which represents a floor of the building. A single channel audio system can play a pre-recorded message or live audio one floor at a time. FACP MAIN CONTROL PANEL RED FIRE ALARM LED FIRE ALARM SILENCED LED FIRE ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE KEY TALK LED FIRE ALARM SILENCED KEY MIKE TALK SWITCH IN CONTROL 8th Flr. PHONE PIEZO SILENCE PHONE 8 CIRCUIT ALL SPEAKERS EVAC 7th Flr. PHONE 1 CIRCUIT PHONE 9 CIRCUIT SELECTIVE EVAC 6th Flr. PHONE 2 CIRCUIT PHONE 10 CIRCUIT 5th Flr. PHONE 3 CIRCUIT PHONE 11 CIRCUIT 4th Flr. PHONE 4 CIRCUIT PHONE 12 CIRCUIT LOCAL SPEAKER EVAC 3rd Flr. PHONE 5 CIRCUIT PHONE 1 CIRCUIT3 ALL SPEAKERS TALK 2nd Flr. PHONE 6 CIRCUIT PHONE 14 CIRCUIT READY TO TALK 1st Flr. PHONE 7 CIRCUIT PHONE 15 CIRCUIT OPERATION SELECT SWITCHES SPEAKER SELECT SWITCHES PHONE SELECT SWITCHES PHONE SELECT SWITCHES Figure 9 1. Single Channel Audio Continued on next page 9-2

197 Single Channel Audio Operation, Continued 127BEvacuate Entire Building 1. Press the All Speakers Evac button to play the Primary Evacuation message on every speaker circuit connected to the audio system. To indicate that the All Speakers Evac function has been activated, the LED associated with this button illuminates, as do the LEDs for each of the speaker groups (floors). 128BEvacuate Specific Floors when No Alarms are Present Specific floors in the building can be manually evacuated at any time, even when no fire alarm condition is present. To do this, follow these steps. 1. Press the speaker circuit buttons corresponding to the speaker group (floors) you want to evacuate. The LEDs corresponding to the selected speaker groups illuminate. 2. Press the Selective Evac button. The LED associated with the Selective Evac button illuminates and the Primary Evacuation message plays on the selected speaker circuit. Example To evacuate floors 1 and 2, you would first press the buttons labeled Floor 1 and Floor 2. Their LEDs light to let you know that these are the selected floors. Next, press the Selective Evac button. The Selective Evac LED lights and the message plays on the selected floors. 129BEvacuate Additional Floors During an Alarm When a fire alarm occurs, the evacuation message automatically plays on specific floors but other areas of the building may not automatically play the message. Additional floors can be evacuated, as follows: 1. Press the speaker circuit button(s) for the additional floors. When you do this, the LEDs for the selected floors illuminate and the message plays on the speaker circuits for those floors. Note: The evacuation message begins at whatever point it is currently at. For example, if the entire message is, Please evacuate this Floor. Proceed to your designated assembly area, and you press the speaker circuit when the message is half through, only the second half of the message will play on the additional speaker circuit. Continued on next page 9-3

198 Single Channel Audio Operation, Continued 130BPage Entire Building 1. Press the All Speakers Talk button. The LED associated with this button illuminates, along with the LEDs for each of the speaker circuits. 2. Key the microphone (depress the talk switch) and wait for the Ready to Talk LED to illuminate. When this LED is ON, talk into the microphone. The page is routed to all speaker circuits connected to the system. 131BPage Only Floors Being Evacuated 1. Key the microphone (depress the talk switch). 2. Wait for the Ready to Talk LED to illuminate. (It will not illuminate until the evacuation message has finished playing.) 3. Speak into the microphone to page the floors being evacuated. 132BPage Additional Floors While an evacuation is in progress, you can page additional floors. To do this, follow these steps. 1. Press the buttons associated with the additional floors prior to keying the microphone. The LEDs associated with these floors turn ON. 2. Key the microphone and wait for the Ready to Talk LED to illuminate. Once this LED illuminates, speak into the microphone. The message is played on the additional floors. 13BListen to What is Being Played Using the Local Speaker 1. Press the button labeled Local Speaker to hear what is being played at that time. The LED associated with this button illuminates when the button is pressed to indicate the function is active. Note: If the user picks up the local phone or keys the microphone while the local speaker is active, the speaker shuts off to prevent feedback. Following local phone or microphone use, the local speaker must be manually turned back on if operation is required. 134BSilencing the Audio System Press the Alarm Silence button on the front panel to silence the audio system. When you do this, the speakers remain on, but play nothing. 135BResetting the Audio System Press the System Reset button to reset the audio system. When you do this, the following occurs. All speakers and associated LEDs turn OFF. The local speaker turns off. Any paging that is in progress is canceled. 9-4

199 35BSingle Channel Audio Plus Paging 136BOverview A Single Channel Audio System Plus Paging can play one prerecorded message and one live message at the same time. In other words, a prerecorded message can be playing on Floor 1 while an announcement is being made on Floor 2. The hardware (microphone, switches, LEDs, etc.) is the same as single channel audio. Refer to Figure 9-1 for an example of the hardware configuration. 137BEvacuate Entire Building 1. Press the All Speakers Evac button to play the evacuation message on every speaker circuit connected to the audio system. To indicate that the All Speakers Evac function has been activated, the LED associated with this button illuminates, as do the LEDs for each of the speaker circuits (floors). 138BEvacuate Specific Floors when No Alarms are Present Specific floors in the building can be manually evacuated at any time, even when no fire alarm condition is present. To do this, follow these steps. 1. Press the speaker circuit buttons corresponding to the speaker group (floors) you want to evacuate. The LEDs corresponding to the selected speaker groups illuminate. 2. Press the Selective Evac button. The LED associated with the Selective Evac button illuminates and the Primary Evacuation message plays on the selected speaker circuit. Example To evacuate floors 1 and 2, you would first press the buttons labeled Floor 1 and Floor 2. Their LEDs light to let you know that these are the selected floors. Next, press the Selective Evac button. The Selective Evac LED lights and the message plays on the selected floors. 139BEvacuate Additional Floors During an Alarm When a fire alarm occurs, the evacuation message automatically plays on specific floors but other floors (or areas) of the building may not automatically play the message. Additional floors can be evacuated, as follows: 1. Press the speaker circuit button(s) for the additional floors. When you do this, the LEDs for the selected floors illuminate and the message automatically plays on the speaker circuits for those floors. Note: The evacuation message begins at whatever point it is currently at. For example, the entire message may be, Please evacuate this Floor. Proceed to your designated assembly area. If you press the speaker circuit when the message is half through, only the second half of the message will play on the additional speaker circuit. Continued on next page 9-5

200 Single Channel Audio Plus Paging, Continued 140BPage Entire Building 1. Press the All Speakers Talk button. The LED associated with this button illuminates, along with the LEDs for each of the speaker circuits. 2. Key the microphone (depress the talk switch) and wait for the Ready to Talk LED to illuminate. When this LED is ON, talk into the microphone. The page is routed to all speaker circuits connected to the system. 141BPage Specific Floors 1. Press the buttons corresponding to the floors requiring the page. The LEDs associated with the selected buttons illuminate. 2. Key the microphone (depress the talk switch). 3. Wait for the Ready to Talk LED to illuminate and speak into the microphone to page the floors selected in Step BPage Additional Floors While a page is in progress, you can add floors to the existing page. To do this, follow these steps. 1. Press the buttons associated with the additional floors. The LEDs associated with these floors turn ON and the page is heard on their speaker circuits 143BListen to What is Being Played Using the Local Speaker 1. Press the button labeled Local Speaker to hear what is being played on the EVAC channel at that time. The LED associated with this button illuminates when the button is pressed to indicate the function is active. Note: If the user picks up the local phone or keys the microphone while the local speaker is active, the speaker shuts off to prevent feedback. The local speaker turns back on when the page is complete. 14BSilencing the Audio System Press the Alarm Silence button on the front panel to silence the audio system. When you do this, the speakers remain on, but play nothing. 145BResetting the Audio System Press the System Reset button to reset the audio system. When you do this, the following occurs. All speakers and associated LEDs turn OFF. The local speaker turns off. Any paging that is in progress is canceled. 9-6

201 36BTwo Channel Audio Operation 146BOverview A Dual Channel Audio System can play one prerecorded message and one live message at the same time. In other words, a prerecorded message can be playing on Floor 1 while an announcement is being made on Floor 2. FACP MAIN CONTROL PANEL RED FIRE ALARM LED FIRE ALARM SILENCED LED FIRE ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE KEY TALK LED FIRE ALARM SILENCED KEY MIKE TALK SWITCH EVAC CHANNEL TALK CHANNEL IN CONTROL 1st Flr. 1st Flr. PHONE PIEZO SILENCE ALL SPEAKERS EVAC 2nd Flr. 2nd Flr. PHONE 1 CIRCUIT SELECTIVE EVAC 3rd Flr. 3rd Flr. PHONE 2 CIRCUIT 4th Flr. 4th Flr. PHONE 3 CIRCUIT LOCAL SPEAKER ALERT 5th Flr. 5th Flr. PHONE 4 CIRCUIT LOCAL SPEAKER EVAC 6th Flr. 6th Flr. PHONE 5 CIRCUIT3 ALL SPEAKERS TALK 7th Flr. 7th Flr. PHONE 6 CIRCUIT READY TO TALK 8th Flr. 8th Flr. PHONE 7 CIRCUIT OPERATION SELECT SWITCHES SPEAKER SELECT SWITCHES SPEAKER SELECT SWITCHES PHONE SELECT SWITCHES Figure 9 2. Two Channel Hardware Continued on next page 9-7

202 Two Channel Audio Operation, Continued 147BEvacuate Entire Building 1. Press the All Speakers Evac button to play the evacuation message on every speaker circuit connected to the audio system. To indicate that the All Speakers Evac function has been activated, the LED associated with this button illuminates, as do the LEDs for each of the speaker circuits (floors). 148BEvacuate Specific Floors when No Alarms are Present Specific floors in the building can be manually evacuated at any time, even when no fire alarm condition is present. To do this, follow these steps. 1. Press the speaker circuit buttons corresponding to the speaker groups (floors) you want to evacuate. The LEDs corresponding to the selected speaker groups illuminate. 2. Press the Selective Evac button. The LED associated with the Selective Evac button illuminates and the Primary Evacuation message plays on the selected speaker circuit. Example To evacuate floors 1 and 2, you would first press the buttons labeled Floor 1 and Floor 2. Their LEDs light to let you know that these are the selected floors. Next, press the Selective Evac button. The Selective Evac LED lights and the message plays on the selected floors. 149BEvacuate Additional Floors During an Alarm When a fire alarm occurs, the evacuation message automatically plays on specific floors but other floors (or areas) of the building may not automatically play the message. Additional floors can be evacuated, as follows: 1. Press the speaker circuit button(s) for the additional floors. When you do this, the LEDs for the selected floors illuminate and the message automatically plays on the speaker circuits for those floors. Note: The evacuation message begins at whatever point it is currently at. For example, the entire message may be, Please evacuate this Floor. Proceed to your designated assembly area. If you press the speaker circuit when the message is half through, only the second half of the message will play on the additional speaker circuit. 150BAlert Specific Floors Follow these steps to play the Alert message on specific floors (areas) of the building. 1. Press the speaker circuit buttons corresponding to the speaker groups (floors) on which you want to play the Alert message. The LEDs corresponding to the selected speaker groups illuminate. 2. Press the Selective Alert button. The LED associated with the Selective Alert button illuminates and the Alert message plays on the selected speaker circuit. Continued on next page 9-8

203 Two Channel Audio Operation, Continued 151BEvacuate Floors On Which Alert Message is Playing Follow these steps to convert the Alert message playing on a group of speakers to an Evacuation message. 1. On the EVAC display card, press the buttons corresponding to the floors currently playing the Alert message (the LEDs on the Alert display card for these floors are lit). 2. Press the Selective Evac button. When you do this, the following occurs. The Alert message stops playing The Evacuation message starts playing The LEDs on the Alert Display Card turn off The LEDs on the EVAC display card that correspond to the buttons pressed in Step 1 turn on Note: If other floors were playing the Evacuation message, the evacuation message would start at the point it is at on the other floors. 152BPage Entire Building 1. Press the All Speakers Talk button. The LED associated with this button illuminates, along with the LEDs for each of the speaker circuits. 2. Key the microphone (depress the talk switch) and wait for the Ready to Talk LED to illuminate. When this LED is ON, talk into the microphone. The page is routed to all speaker circuits connected to the system. 153BPage Specific Floors 1. Press the buttons corresponding to the floors requiring the page. The LEDs associated with the selected buttons illuminate. 2. Key the microphone (depress the talk switch). 3. Wait for the Ready to Talk LED to illuminate and speak into the microphone to page the floors selected in Step BPage Additional Floors While a page is in progress, you can add floors to the existing page. To do this, follow these steps. 1. Press the buttons associated with the additional floors. The LEDs associated with these floors turn ON and the page is heard on their speaker circuits 15BListen to What is Being Played on the EVAC Channel Using the Local Speaker 1. Press the button labeled Local Speaker to hear what is being played on the EVAC channel at that time. The LED associated with this button illuminates when the button is pressed to indicate the function is active. Note: If the user picks up the local phone or keys the microphone while the local speaker is active, the speaker shuts off to prevent feedback. The local speaker turns back on when the page is complete. Continued on next page 9-9

204 Two Channel Audio Operation, Continued 156BListen to What is Being Played on the Alert Channel Using the Local Speaker 1. Press the button labeled Local Speaker Alert to hear what is being played on the Alert channel at that time. The LED associated with this button illuminates when the button is pressed to indicate the function is active. Note: If the user picks up the local phone or keys the microphone while the local speaker is active, the speaker shuts off to prevent feedback. The local speaker turns back on when the page is complete. 157BSilencing the Audio System Press the Alarm Silence button on the front panel to silence the audio system. When you do this, the speakers remain on, but play nothing. 158BResetting the Audio System Press the System Reset button to reset the audio system. When you do this, the following occurs. All speakers and associated LEDs turn OFF. The local speaker turns off. Any paging that is in progress is canceled. 9-10

205 37BThree to Eight Channel Audio System Operation 159BOverview Triple Channel Audio FACP MAIN CONTROL PANEL RED FIRE ALARM LED FIRE ALARM SILENCED LED FIRE ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE KEY TALK LED FIRE ALARM SILENCED KEY MIKE TALK SWITCH ALERT CHANNEL EVAC CHANNEL TALK CHANNEL IN CONTROL 1st Flr. 1st Flr. 1st Flr. PHONE PIEZO SILENCE ALL SPEAKERS EVAC 2nd Flr. 2nd Flr. 2nd Flr. PHONE 1 CIRCUIT SELECTIVE EVAC 3rd Flr. 3rd Flr. 3rd Flr. PHONE 2 CIRCUIT 4th Flr. 4th Flr. 4th Flr. PHONE 3 CIRCUIT LOCAL SPEAKER ALERT 5th Flr. 5th Flr. 5th Flr. PHONE 4 CIRCUIT LOCAL SPEAKER EVAC 6th Flr. 6th Flr. 6th Flr. PHONE 5 CIRCUIT3 ALL SPEAKERS TALK 7th Flr. 7th Flr. 7th Flr. PHONE 6 CIRCUIT READY TO TALK 8th Flr. 8th Flr. 8th Flr. PHONE 7 CIRCUIT OPERATION SELECT SWITCHES SPEAKER SELECT SWITCHES SPEAKER SELECT SWITCHES PHONE SELECT SWITCHES Figure 9 3. Three to Eight Channel Hardware PHONE SELECT SWITCHES Continued on next page 9-11

206 Three to Eight Channel Audio System Operation, Continued 160BEvacuate Entire Building 1. Press the All Speakers Evac button to play the evacuation message on every speaker circuit connected to the audio system. To indicate that the All Speakers Evac function has been activated, the LED associated with this button illuminates, as do the LEDs for each of the speaker circuits (floors). 161BEvacuate Specific Floors when No Alarms are Present Specific floors in the building can be manually evacuated at any time, even when no fire alarm condition is present. To do this, follow these steps. 1. Press the speaker circuit buttons corresponding to the speaker groups (floors) you want to evacuate. The LEDs corresponding to the selected speaker groups illuminate. 2. Press the Selective Evac button. The LED associated with the Selective Evac button illuminates and the Primary Evacuation message plays on the selected speaker circuit. Example To evacuate floors 1 and 2, you would first press the buttons labeled Floor 1 and Floor 2. Their LEDs light to let you know that these are the selected floors. Next, press the Selective Evac button. The Selective Evac LED lights and the message plays on the selected floors. 162BEvacuate Additional Floors During an Alarm When a fire alarm occurs, the evacuation message automatically plays on specific floors but other floors (or areas) of the building may not automatically play the message. Additional floors can be evacuated, as follows: 1. Press the speaker circuit button(s) for the additional floors. When you do this, the LEDs for the selected floors illuminate and the message automatically plays on the speaker circuits for those floors. Note: The evacuation message begins at whatever point it is currently at. For example, the entire message may be, Please evacuate this Floor. Proceed to your designated assembly area. If you press the speaker circuit when the message is half through, only the second half of the message will play on the additional speaker circuit. 163BAlert Specific Floors Follow these steps to play the Alert message on specific floors (areas) of the building. 1. Press the speaker circuit buttons corresponding to the speaker groups (floors) on which you want to play the Alert message. The LEDs corresponding to the selected speaker groups illuminate. 2. Press the Selective Alert button. The LED associated with the Selective Alert button illuminates and the Alert message plays on the selected speaker circuit. Continued on next page 9-12

207 Three to Eight Channel Audio System Operation, Continued 164BEvacuate Floors On Which Alert Message is Playing Follow these steps to convert the Alert message playing on a group of speakers to an Evacuation message. 1. On the EVAC display card, press the buttons corresponding to the floors currently playing the Alert message (the LEDs on the Alert display card for these floors are lit). 2. Press the Selective Evac button. When you do this, the following occurs. The Alert message stops playing. The Evacuation message starts playing. The LEDs on the Alert Display Card turn off. The LEDs on the EVAC display card that correspond to the buttons pressed in Step 1 turn on. Note: If other floors were playing the Evacuation message, the evacuation message would start at the point it is at on the other floors. 165BPage Entire Building 1. Press the All Speakers Talk button. The LED associated with this button illuminates, along with the LEDs for each of the speaker circuits. 2. Key the microphone (depress the talk switch) and wait for the Ready to Talk LED to illuminate. When this LED is ON, talk into the microphone. The page is routed to all speaker circuits connected to the system. 16BPage Specific Floors 1. Press the buttons corresponding to the floors requiring the page. The LEDs associated with the selected buttons illuminate. 2. Key the microphone (depress the talk switch). 3. Wait for the Ready to Talk LED to illuminate and speak into the microphone to page the floors selected in Step BPage Additional Floors While a page is in progress, you can add floors to the existing page. To do this, follow these steps. 1. Press the buttons associated with the additional floors. The LEDs associated with these floors turn ON and the page is heard on their speaker circuits Continued on next page 9-13

208 Three to Eight Channel Audio System Operation, Continued 168BPlay Announcements on Specific Floors Multi channel audio systems have the capability to play specific announcements on specific floors. To do this, follow these steps. 1. Press the button corresponding to the floors. 2. Press the Start All Selected button. When you do this, the LEDs on the display card light and the announcement plays over the speakers. 169BListen to What is Being Played on the EVAC Channel Using the Local Speaker 1. Press the button labeled Local Speaker to hear what is being played on the EVAC channel at that time. The LED associated with this button illuminates when the button is pressed to indicate the function is active. Note: If the user picks up the local phone or keys the microphone while the local speaker is active, the speaker shuts off to prevent feedback. The local speaker turns back on when the page is complete. 170BListen to What is Being Played on the Alert Channel Using the Local Speaker 1. Press the button labeled Local Speaker Alert to hear what is being played on the Alert channel at that time. The LED associated with this button illuminates when the button is pressed to indicate the function is active. Note: If the user picks up the local phone or keys the microphone while the local speaker is active, the speaker shuts off to prevent feedback. The local speaker turns back on when the page is complete. 171BSilencing the Audio System Press the Alarm Silence button on the front panel to silence the audio system. When you do this, the speakers remain on, but play nothing. 172BResetting the Audio System Press the System Reset button to reset the audio system. When you do this, the following occurs. All speakers and associated LEDs turn OFF. The local speaker turns off. Any paging that is in progress is canceled. 9-14

209 Rev. G 2007, 2008, 2011 SimplexGrinnell LP. Specifications and other information shown were current as of publication and are subject to change without notice.

210

211 FIRE 4098 Detectors, Sensors, and Bases Application Manual Rev. M

212 Copyrights and Trademarks Copyrights Copyright 2004 Tyco Safety Products - Westminster (a Tyco company). All specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written consent of Tyco Safety Products. Suffix C or CA following an eight-digit Product ID number denotes ULC-listed product. Suffix E following an eight-digit Product ID number denotes Global product. The second suffix identifies market country, models with this suffix are not UL Listed. Trademarks Tyco, IDNet, Simplex and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco International Services AG or its affiliates in the U.S. and/or other countries. MAPNET II Communication Net is protected by US Patent No. 4,796,025. TrueAlarm Analog Detection is protected by US Patent No. 5,155,468. TrueAlarm Detector Base is protected by US Patent No. 5,173, 683. All illustrations of actual detectors, sensors, and bases shown in this publication are artist s renditions.

213 Cautions and Warnings Cautions and Warnings DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify your Simplex product supplier. ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified technical representatives. STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows: 1. Ground yourself before opening or installing components. 2. Keep uninstalled component wrapped in anti-static material at all times. RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY WARNING: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

214 Table of Contents Chapter 1. Overview Introduction In this Chapter Special Considerations Overview Special Considerations for Smoke Detectors and Sensors Smoke Detector/Sensor Applications Where to Place Detectors and Sensors Proper Locations for Detectors and Sensors Where Not to Place Detectors and Sensors Improper Locations for Detectors and Sensors Principles of Operation Introduction Heat Detector Operation Photoelectric Smoke Detectors/Sensors Ionization Smoke Detectors/Sensors Chapter Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors, and Bases Introduction In this Chapter Smoke Detectors Introduction Smoke Detector Limitations Specifications Mounting Requirements Heat Detectors Introduction Heat Detector Types Specifications Bases Introduction Mounting Wiring Chapter 3. TrueAlarm Sensors, Sensor Bases, and QuickConnect Smoke Sensors Introduction In this Chapter TrueAlarm Sensors Specifications Special Applications Mounting

215 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases Introduction Specifications Setting the Base s Address Address Setting for the 2120 CDT System Address Setting for the 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, or 4120 System Multi-Sensor Bases and Wiring TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors Overview Specifications Setting the Sensor s Address Mounting Wiring Chapter 4. Accessories Introduction In this Chapter Relay Module Accessories Relay Module Wiring Relay Module Wiring Relay Module Installation Remote LED Module Chapter 5. Compatibility and Testing Introduction In this Chapter Compatibility Compatibility for 4098 Detectors and Detector Bases Maintenance and Testing Maintenance Testing Preferred Method of Testing Smoke Detectors/Sensors Test Equipment Available Alternate Method for Testing Sensors Magnetic Test for Photoelectric Detectors Magnetic Test for Ionization Detectors Ion Detector Sensitivity Test Cleaning Introduction Photoelectric Smoke Detector/Sensor Cleaning Special Considerations for QuickConnect Sensors Special Considerations for Ion Detectors and Sensors Trouble Indications Trouble Indications for TrueAlarm Sensors Fire Alarm Trouble and Maintenance Log Fire Alarm Trouble and Maintenance Log Index... I-1

216 Chapter 1 Overview Introduction The purpose of this publication is to provide information concerning the proper application of both heat and smoke detectors/sensors in conjunction with fire alarm systems. The information in this publication is intended to be used only as a technical guide. The requirements of applicable codes and standards, as well as directives of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ s), should be followed. In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Special Considerations 1-2 Where to Place Detectors and Sensors 1-3 Where Not to Place Detectors and Sensors 1-6 Principles of Operation

217 Special Considerations Overview Before installing detectors/sensors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with information provided in NFPA 72, (an excerpt of which is provided in the Smoke Detector/ Sensor Applications section below). For additional information, refer to NFPA 72 and the NEMA Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. Special Considerations for Smoke Detectors and Sensors Is there human occupancy? Contents to be protected. Type of construction and use. Burning characteristics of contents. Air movement - stratification. Deflections and obstructions. Height of ceilings. Surface conditions of ceilings. Type of ceiling construction. Total area. Vent locations - velocities - dilution. Smoke Detector/Sensor Applications Each detector/sensor is capable of providing up to 900 square feet (84 square meters) of coverage, depending on the following: Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. 1-2

218 Where to Place Detectors and Sensors Proper Locations for Detectors and Sensors IMPORTANT: The guidelines in this section are adapted from standards published by the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Massachusetts, U. S. A. These standards include NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code ; NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760; and NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. To provide effective early warning of a developing fire situation, smoke detectors/sensors should be installed in all areas of the protected premises. Total coverage as defined by NFPA 72 should include all rooms, halls, storage areas, basements, attics, lofts, and spaces above suspended ceilings including plenum areas utilized as part of the HVAC system. In addition, this should include all closets, elevator shafts, enclosed stairways, dumbwaiter shafts, chutes and other subdivisions and accessible spaces. Fire detection systems installed to meet local codes or ordinances may not be adequate for early warning of the fire. Some codes or ordinances have minimum objectives such as capturing elevators or preventing circulation of smoke through HVAC systems instead of early detection of fire. You should weigh the costs against the benefits of installing a complete fire detection system when any detection system is being installed. The location, quantity and zoning of detectors/sensors should be determined by what objectives are desired rather than the minimum requirements of any local codes or ordinances. Detectors/sensors may be omitted from combustible blind spaces when any of the following conditions prevail: Where the ceiling is attached directly to the underside of the supporting beams of a combustible roof or floor deck. Where the concealed space is entirely filled with noncombustible insulation. (In solid joist construction, the insulation need only fill the space from the ceiling to the bottom edge of the joist of the roof or floor deck.) Where there are small concealed spaces over rooms, provided the space in question does not exceed 50 square feet (4.6 square meters). In spaces formed by sets of facing studs or solid joists in walls, floors, or ceilings where the distance between the facing studs or solid joists do not exceed 6 inches (15 cm). Detectors/sensors may also be omitted from below open grid ceilings where all of the following conditions are met: The openings of the grid are at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the smallest dimension. The thickness of the material does not exceed the smallest of the grid openings. The openings constitute at least 70% of the area of the ceiling material. Continued on next page 1-3

219 Where to Place Detectors and Sensors, Continued Proper Locations for Detectors and Sensors, (continued) Detectors/sensors are usually required or recommended underneath open loading docks or platforms and their covers, and in accessible under-floor areas in buildings without basements. Detectors/sensors may be omitted from combustible blind spaces when all of the following conditions prevail: 1. The space is not accessible for storage purposes, it is protected against the entrance of unauthorized persons, and it is protected against the accumulation of windblown debris. 2. The space contains no equipment/structures (such as steam pipes, electrical wiring, ducts, shafts, or conveyors) that could potentially ignite or conduct the spread of fire. 3. The floor over the space is tight. 4. Non flammable liquids are processed, handled, or stored on the floor above the space. Total coverage as described in NFPA 72, is the definition of a complete fire detection system. In some of the specified areas of coverage, such as attics, closets, under open loading docks or platforms, a heat detector may be more appropriate than a smoke detector. Careful consideration should be given to the detector manufacturer s instructions and the following recommendations in this guide. In general, when only one detector/sensor is required in a room or space, the detector/sensor should be placed as close to the center of the ceiling as possible. Central location of the detector/sensor is best for sensing smoke and/or fire in any part of the room. If a center location is not possible, it may be placed no closer than 4 inches (10 cm) from the wall, or if listed for wall mounting, it may be mounted on the wall. Wall mounted detectors/sensor should be located approximately 4 to 12 inches (10 to 30 cm) from the ceiling to the top of the detector, and at least 4 inches (10 cm) from any corner wall junction (see the figure below). Ceiling 4 in (10 cm) Acceptable here Never here 4 in (10 cm) Minimum Top of the detector acceptable here 12 in (30 cm) Maximum Note: Measurements shown are to the Note: closest Measurements edge of the shaown detector. are to the closest edge of the detector. Side wall Figure 1-1. Wall and Ceiling Mounted Detector/Sensor Continued on next page 1-4

220 Where to Place Detectors and Sensors, Continued Proper Locations for Detectors and Sensors, (continued) When an air supply and/or an air return duct opening is present in a room or space, the detector/sensor(s) should be placed in the path of the air flow toward the return air duct opening (see below). Return air Correct Supply air Incorrect Figure 1-2. Detector Placement - Air Supply and/or Return Ducts Smoke tests are helpful in determining proper placement. Special attention should be given to smoke travel directions and velocity, since either can affect detector/sensor performance. Placement of a detector/sensor near air conditioning or incoming air vents can also cause excessive accumulation of dust and dirt on the detector/sensor. This dirt can cause the detector/sensor to malfunction and cause nuisance alarms. Detectors/sensors should not be located closer than 3 feet (0.9 m) from an air supply diffuser. Spot type detectors/sensors in properly engineered systems, may also be placed in return air ducts, or in approved duct detector housings designed for this application. Although duct detectors are not a substitute for open area detectors, they can provide an effective method of initiating building control functions to prevent smoke from being transported from the fire area to other parts of a building. 1-5

221 Where Not to Place Detectors and Sensors Improper Locations for Detectors and Sensors One of the major causes of nuisance alarms is improper placement of detectors/sensors. The best way to avoid nuisance alarms is to not install detectors/sensors in environments that can cause them to malfunction. See the table and examples provided below. Table 1-1. Environmental Conditions that Influence Detector Response* Detection Protection Air Velocity >300 ft. (91.4m)/min. Atm. Pressure 3000 ft. (914m) Above Sea Level Humidity >93% RH Temp. <32 F (0 C) >100 F (38 C) Color of Smoke Ion X X X X O Photo O O X X X Beam O O X X O Air Sampling O O X X O * See Table A in NFPA 72 X = May affect detector/sensor response O = Generally does not affect detector/sensor response DO NOT PLACE DETECTORS/SENSORS: In excessively dusty or dirty areas, such as feed rooms, steel mills, etc. Dust and dirt can accumulate on the detector/sensor s sensing chamber and make it overly sensitive, or block the air entrances to the sensing chamber and make the detector/sensor less sensitive to smoke. Be especially careful to avoid areas where fumigants, fog or mist-producing materials, or sweeping and cleaning compounds are used. These substances may cause nuisance alarms. Outdoors, in stables, open storage sheds, or other open structures affected by dust, air currents, or excessive humidity and temperature. In damp or excessively humid areas, or next to bathrooms with showers. Water droplets can accumulate inside the sensing chamber and make the detector/sensor overly sensitive. A tremendous amount of humid air is produced during a hot shower. The moisture in this humid air can enter the sensing chamber as water vapor, then cool and condense into droplets that can cause a nuisance alarm. In elevator lobbies over ashtrays or where people smoke while waiting for the elevator. In very cold or very hot environments, or in unheated buildings or rooms where the temperature can fall below or exceed the operating temperature range of the detector/sensor. At temperatures below 32 F (0 C), ice crystals or condensation can appear inside the sensing chamber and make it overly sensitive or cause a nuisance alarm. At temperatures above the operating range of the detector/sensor greater than 120 F (49 C), its internal components may not function properly. In or near areas where combustion particles are normally present, such as in kitchens or other areas with ovens and burners; in garages, where particles of combustion are present in vehicle exhausts; within 15 feet (4.5 meters) of any type of furnace, hot water heater, or gas space heater; or in welding shops or other types of work areas where some form of combustion is used in the activity normally conducted in that area. When a detector must be located in or adjacent to such an area, a fixed temperature heat detector may be appropriate. Continued on next page 1-6

222 Where Not to Place Detectors and Sensors, Continued Improper Locations for Detectors and Sensors, (continued) In air streams passing by or through kitchens. Air often enters a residence or a residential unit of an apartment building through cracks around the front and/or back doors. If the air return is in the bedroom hallway or in the bathroom, and if air from the kitchen easily enters the air stream going from the door to the air return, combustion particles from cooking can cause nuisance alarms. Install detectors/sensors so that they protect the bedrooms, but so they are out of the air stream. In or near manufacturing areas, battery rooms, or other areas where substantial quantities of vapors, gases or fumes may be present. Strong vapors, like excessive humidity, can make detectors/sensors overly sensitive or less sensitive than normal. In very large concentrations, gases heavier than air, such as carbon dioxide, may make detectors/sensors more sensitive, while gases lighter than air, such as helium, may make them less sensitive. Aerosol particles may collect on detector/sensor chamber surfaces and cause nuisance alarms. Insect-infested areas. If insects enter a detector/sensor s sensing chamber, they can cause a nuisance alarm. Take proper insect eradication procedures before installing detectors/sensors in such locations. If spraying is done, do not allow insect spray to enter the detectors/sensors. Near fluorescent light fixtures. Electrical noise generated by fluorescent light fixtures may cause nuisance alarms. Install detectors/sensors at least 1 foot (0.3 meters) away from such light fixtures. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) has three standards for smoke detectors: one for duct detectors/sensors, UL 268A; one for single and multiple station detectors/sensors, UL 217; and one for system type detectors/sensors, UL 268. Detectors/sensors should only be used in the applications for which they are specifically listed. The NFPA 101 Life Safety Code states that single station smoke detectors shall sound an alarm only within an individual living unit or similar area and shall not actuate the building fire alarm system. It also states, All systems and components shall be approved for the purpose for which they are installed. In addition to possible code noncompliance, the following deficiencies would exist in a series of residential smoke detectors connected in a fire alarm system mode: Since the fire alarm system is not supervised, vandals or others could disconnect a detector or the entire system, leaving a building without protection. The residents would be unaware of the serious life threatening condition. Residential detectors do not latch in alarm. In other words, the detector self-resets. One detector in alarm sounds all the detectors connected together. It would be difficult to identify or locate a specific detector that initially put the system into alarm after the alarm condition was cleared. System detectors/sensors latch in alarm. They do not reset until power is momentarily disconnected. This makes it convenient to identify the location of the detector/sensor that caused the control panel to alarm. In addition, system detectors are specifically designed to connect to a supervised control panel. Two-wire detectors require a UL compatibility review to verify that the detector and panel properly operate together. A typical life safety fire alarm system for an apartment complex would be to use system detectors/sensors and manual fire alarm stations in the hallways and common areas of the complex and residential single station type detectors and heat detectors in the individual apartments. The system detectors/sensors, manual stations and heat detectors would be connected to a supervised control panel, sound a general alarm and automatically notify the proper authorities that a fire condition exists. The residential detectors located in the apartments would be interconnected only within the individual living quarters of each apartment. These residential units would sound an alarm only in the apartment unit. 1-7

223 Principles of Operation Introduction This section describes how the different types of detectors and sensors work. For additional information on TrueAlarm sensor operation, refer to the TrueAlarm Concepts publication (PER ). Heat Detector Operation The heat detector senses the heat or the Rate-of-Rise (ROR) in the air temperature of the environment in which it is located. The heat detector is comprised of electronic circuitry and a mechanical package that is designed to sense the ROR of the air temperature in an expedient and reliable fashion. Upon detection of an abnormal increase in air temperature, or ROR in air temperature, the electronics indicate an alarm by increasing the amount of current draw from the monitor zone it is connected to. The monitor zone is a supervised detection circuit that is tied back to a main control panel that takes appropriate action to indicate an alarm has been reported, if the zone current is substantially increased. Being of an electronic design, the temperature of the air is sensed by using two negative temperature coefficient thermistors. The resistance of the thermistors goes down with an increase in temperature. One thermistor is placed in a position such as to sense the open air temperature very rapidly (RT1). The second thermistor is positioned in a small cavity that protrudes out from the main body of the detector (RT2). The location of RT2 allows for fast detection of a quick change in the air temperature, but yet for a slow or medium rate of temperature change, the detector does not trip due to the ROR feature. For a slower change in temperature, the detector trips into alarm due to a set fixed temperature that is sensed by RT1. For a fast temperature rise, when a difference in temperature sensed by RT1 and RT2 has reached a predetermined amount, the detector trips into alarm. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors/Sensors These devices operate on a light scattering principle. The smoke sensing chamber contains an infrared LED source with a peak spectral emission of 880 nanometers. This source is placed at an angle from a spectrally matched photodiode receiver. During a NO SMOKE condition, only light reflected from the chamber walls enters the receiver and shows up as a small photocurrent. As smoke particles enter the sensing chamber and cross the light beam of the LED, more light reaches the receiver due to scattering. The receiver circuitry converts this photocurrent into a signal voltage. In a detector, when this voltage reaches a preset level, an alarm is produced. In a sensor, this signal voltage goes into an 8-bit, A to D (analog to digital) converter. A digital representation of this signal voltage is then transmitted to the fire alarm panel for further processing. Ionization Smoke Detectors/Sensors These devices use a small radiation source, Americium-241, which emits alpha particles that ionize air molecules between two electrically charged electrodes. With the application of a DC voltage to these electrodes, a small ionization current flows within the chamber. As smoke enters the chamber, a decrease in ionization current results. This current is converted into a signal voltage by a transimpedance circuit. In a detector, when this signal voltage drops below a preset level, an alarm is produced. In a sensor, this signal voltage goes into an 8-bit A to D (analog to digital) converter. A digital representation of this signal voltage is then transmitted to the fire alarm panel for further processing. 1-8

224 Chapter Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors, and Bases Introduction This chapter contains specification and mounting information for 4098 Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors, and Bases. In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # 4098 Smoke Detectors Heat Detectors Bases

225 4098 Smoke Detectors Introduction CAUTION: Install the detectors described in this publication in accordance with applicable NFPA standards, local codes, and the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs). Failure to follow these instructions may result in failure of the detector to initiate an alarm condition. The manufacturer is not responsible for detectors that have been improperly installed, tested, or maintained. Smoke Detector Limitations The smoke detectors used with these bases are designed to activate and initiate emergency action, but do so only when used in conjunction with other equipment. They are designed for installation in accordance with NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. Smoke detectors do not work without power. AC or DC powered smoke detectors do not work if the power supply is cut off for any reason. Smoke detectors do not sense fires when smoke does not reach the detectors. Smoke from fires in chimneys, in walls, on roofs or on the other side of closed doors may not reach the smoke detector and alarm it. A detector may not detect a fire developing on another level of a building. For this reason, detectors should be located on every level of a building. Smoke detectors have sensing limitations. Ionization detectors are better at detecting fast, flaming fires than slow, smoldering fires. Photoelectric detectors sense smoldering fires better than flaming fires. Because fires develop in different ways, and are often unpredictable in their growth, neither type of detector is always best, and a given detector may not always provide warning of a fire. In general, detectors cannot be expected to provide warning for fires resulting from inadequate fire protection practices, violent explosions, escaping gases, improper storage of flammable liquids like cleaning solvents, other safety hazards, or arson. Smoke detectors cannot last forever. Smoke detectors contain electronic parts. Even though detectors are made to last for many years, any of these parts could fail at any time. Therefore, test your smoke detector system per NFPA 72 at least annually. Clean and take care of your smoke detectors regularly. (See Chapter 5 of this publication for cleaning instructions.) Continued on next page 2-2

226 4098 Smoke Detectors, Continued Specifications Table 2-1. Smoke Detector Specifications Specifications Detector PID (4098) Smoke Detector Data -9601, Type of Detector Working Voltage (2-wire) Rated Voltage (4-wire) Input Ripple Voltage Max. Alarm Current Photoelectric Photoelectric with Heat Ionization VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC 25% Max. 25% Max. 25% Max. 86 ma 86 ma 86 ma Surge Current <200 µa <200 µa <200 µa Standby Current <100 µa <100 µa <100 µa Heat Element Rating Humidity Range (Non-Condensing) Air Velocity Range N/A 135 F N/A 10-95% RH 10-95% RH 10-95% RH FPM FPM FPM Continued on next page 2-3

227 4098 Smoke Detectors, Continued Mounting Requirements All smoke detectors identified in Table 2-1 mount to a detector base (refer to the 4098 Bases section of this chapter for more information). Use the following considerations and Figure 2-1 when mounting smoke detectors. IMPORTANT: Smoke must enter the chamber of the detector. Thus, air flow, air stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air migration affects detector efficiency. Note: Where the possibility of positive airflow from the electrical conduit/junction box exists, seal the conduit openings with 3M Weatherban #606 (or equivalent), a non-flammable sealing compound. Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100 F (38 C) or fall below 32 F (0 C). Because the detector combines heat sensing, DO NOT install this detector in locations where the ambient temperatures exceed 100 F (38 C) or where temperature fluctuations above 6 F/min. occur. Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches (10 cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke before it reaches the detector. Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchens, furnace rooms, laundry rooms, loading docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles, soldering rooms, etc.). Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (in hospital patient rooms with vaporizers, near shower rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies. Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches ( cm) from the ceiling to detector head. Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris! Remove any protective covers before activating the system. If using the adapter plate, tighten the mounting screws without warping the adapter plate. 2-4

228 4098 Heat Detectors Introduction This section contains general notes, specifications, and mounting information for the heat detectors shown in Table 2-2. WARNING: Notes: Heat detectors are NOT life-safety devices; USE HEAT DETECTORS FOR PROPERTY PROTECTION ONLY! For life-safety requirements, use smoke detectors. For all heat detectors, provide electronic supervision with battery back-up at the fire alarm control panel. Where the possibility of positive airflow from the electrical conduit/junction box exists, seal the conduit openings with 3M Weatherban #606 (or equivalent), a non-flammable sealing compound. Refer to NFPA 72 for application, test, and maintenance requirements. Heat Detector Types Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors: Electronic fixed temperature heat detectors use a fast response, thermistor based design to provide temperature sensing that quickly, accurately, and consistently identifies when fixed temperatures are exceeded. For this reason, the fixed temperature detectors are recommended for most applications. With a UL spacing distance of 60 X 60 feet, the fixed temperature electronic heat detectors replace both mechanical fixed as well as mechanical ROR heat detectors. ROR Temperature Heat Detectors: Electronic Rate-of-Rise (ROR) heat detectors detect fixed temperature alarm thresholds the same as the fixed temperature heat detectors, plus detect a ROR alarm with a patented ROR detection design that can quickly respond to sudden temperature variations. Due to the nature of the fast response to temperature changes, care must be taken for proper installation of ROR heat detectors. ROR heat detectors should be installed in stable environmentally controlled areas. These detectors must not be installed where hot or cold air can be blown on them (near ductwork, industrial equipment, air vents etc.). ROR detectors should not be installed where more then 6 F per minute temperature changes can normally occur. Specifications Features: Rate-of-Rise and Fixed Temperature (see Table 2-2) Alarm LED Compatible with 2-Wire Initiating Device Circuits Current-Limited Alarm State Electrical Specifications: Typical Standby Current - 80 Microamps Typical Alarm Current - 40 Milliamps Maximum Current - 80 Milliamps while in alarm state Operating Range VDC Maximum Ripple Voltage Allowed - 30% Continued on next page 2-5

229 4098 Heat Detectors, Continued Specifications, (continued) Table 2-2. Heat Detector Models and Features Detector Model Rating or Class* Area / Language Color Code (UL) 135 F (57 C) FT English (UL) 135 F (57 C) FT and RR English (UL) 200 F (93 C) FT English White (UL) 200 F (93 C) FT and RR English White E A1 European Green E C European Red E A Australian White E B Australian Blue E D Australian Red E I Chinese Green E 134 F (56.7 C) FT Korean E 134 F (56.7 C) FT and RR Korean E 134 F (56.7 C) FT Taiwanese E 134 F (56.7 C) FT and RR Taiwanese E 190 F (87.8 C) FT Korean E 190 F (87.8 C) FT and RR Korean E 190 F (87.8 C) FT Taiwanese E 190 F (87.8 C) FT and RR Taiwanese * RR abbreviates Rate-of-Rise; FT abbreviates Fixed-Temperature. Continued on next page 2-6

230 4098 Heat Detectors, Continued Specifications, (continued) All heat detectors identified in the table below mount to a detector base (refer to the 4098 Bases section of this publication for more information). Use the information in Figure 2-1 when mounting. Table 2-3. Heat Detector Specifications Product ID Description Application Max. Spacing Allowed (UL) FM Fixed-Temp. Only, 135 F (57 C) Unusually violent temp. fluctuations and ceiling temperatures not exceeding 100 F (38 C) 70 X 70 ft (21 X 21 m) 15 X 15 ft (4.6 X4.6 m) Fixed-Temp. and Rate-of-Rise, 135 F (57 C) Normal temp. fluctuations and ceiling temperatures not exceeding 100 F (38 C) 70 X 70 ft (21 X 21 m) 30 X 30 ft (9.2 X 9.2 m) Fixed-Temp. Only, 200 F (93 C) Unusually violent temp. fluctuations and ceiling temperatures exceeding 100 F (38 C) but not 150 F (68 C) 70 X 70 ft (21 X 21 m) 15 X 15 ft (4.6 X4.6 m) Fixed-Temp. and Rate-of-Rise, 200 F (93 C) Normal temp. fluctuations and ceiling temperatures exceeding 100 F (38 C) but not 150 F (68 C) 70 X 70 ft (21 X 21 m) 30 X 30 ft (9.2 X 9.2 m) 2-7

231 4098 Bases Introduction The base is designed to be used with 4098 Series smoke and heat detectors, as well as the QuickConnect2 photo sensor. To use a 4-wire configuration, you must use the relay base. Heat detectors require the base when used with a remote LED. This section only covers the information necessary to mount and wire these base configurations. Before installing these bases, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with information provided in NFPA 72. For additional information, refer to the NEMA Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. CAUTION: Install the bases in this section in accordance with applicable NFPA standards, local codes, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs). Failure to follow these instructions may result in failure of the detector to initiate an alarm condition. The manufacturer is not responsible for detectors that have been improperly installed, tested, or maintained. Continued on next page 2-8

232 4098 Bases, Continued Mounting The base mounts to a 4-inch octagonal, 4-inch square, or single gang electrical box. When mounting to a 4-inch square or any surface mounted box, the adapter plate kit must be used. ALL BASES FLUSH MOUNTED (BOX TO BE FLUSH OR RECESSED 1/4 " MAX ) , -9791, -9792, AND ALL DETECTOR BASES FLUSH MOUNTED (BOX TO BE FLUSH MOUNTED OR RECESSED 1/4" MAX) , AND ONLY FLUSH MOUNTED (BOX WITH ADAPTER BRACKET TO BE FLUSH OR RECESSED 1/4" MAX) SINGLE GANG (2 1/8" DEEP) ELECTRICAL BOX (NOT SUPPLIED) 4" (10.16cm x 1 1/2" DEEP) OCTAGONAL ELECTRICAL BOX ( NOT SUPPLIED) 4" (10.16cm x 1 1/2" DEEP) SQUARE ELECTRICAL BOX (NOT SUPPLIED) (SEE NOTE 4) ADAPTER PLATE KIT (REQUIRED FOR 4" SQUARE/ OCTAGONAL SURFACE MOUNTED ELECTRICAL BOX) RACO 787 ADAPTER BRACKET OR EQUIVALENT (NOT SUPPLIED) BASE # 8-32 x 1 1/4" PANHEAD MACHINE SCREW (TIGHTEN UNTIL SNUG, 1-3 in.-lbs.) # 6-32 SCREW WITH WASHER (NOT SUPPLIED) # 8-32 x 1 1/4" PANHEAD MACHINE SCREW (TIGHTEN TO 4-6 in.-lbs.) # 8x 1" THREAD FORMING PANHEAD SCREW (TIGHTEN TO 4-6 in.-lbs.) BASE #6-32 x 1 1/4" PANHEAD SCREW (TIGHTEN TO 4-6 in.-lbs.) SENSOR (AS REQUIRED) SEE NOTES 1 AND 2 CLOCKWISE FOR ATTACHMENT Figure 2-1. Typical Detector/Sensor Mounting Notes: 1. Break off plastic lock tab to engage locking mechanism. To lock detector/sensor into base, turn unit until the locking tab clicks into place. To unlock detector/sensor, insert the blade of a screwdriver into this slot and then pull down on handle. This action allows the detector/sensor to be turned and removed (see Figure 2-2). 2. Refer to the Compatibility and Testing chapter of this publication for detailed information on compatible detectors/sensors. 3. Bases with relay modules require a 1 ½-inch extension ring (not supplied) mounted to the 4-inch square or octagonal electrical box to meet the space requirement of the relay cube and its wires. The relay module(s) cannot be used in single-gang electrical box installations. The relay cube must be installed in the electrical box directly behind the sensor base. 4. Adapter Plate Kit when mounting the and to a surface mounted 4-inch square or octagonal box. Adapter plates must be installed with textured side towards the electrical box for this installation only. 2-9 Continued on next page

233 4098 Bases, Continued Wiring All screw terminals accommodate 14 to 18 AWG solid or stranded wire. When tightening screws, the range of torque is 8 to 12 in-lbs. Connect wiring to the terminals shown in the figure below. (Figures 2-3 through 2-6 show typical wiring applications for the 4098 bases.) CAUTION: Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide supervision of connections See Note 2 See Note 1 See Note 3 Figure 2-2. Wiring and Mounting the Bases Notes: 1. Break off plastic tab where indicated to engage locking mechanism. 2. Once locking mechanism is engaged, you must insert a flat-head screwdriver in slot indicated to release the detector from the base. 3. Use the slotted hole indicated for the first screw when mounting the base. Continued on next page 2-10

234 4098 Bases, Continued Wiring, (continued) BACKUP 2 (SEE NOTE 3) - + (SEE NOTE 4) INITIATING CIRCUIT + - PRIMARY 1 (SEE NOTE 3) BASE BASE (SEE NOTE 5) (SEE NOTE 5) (SEE NOTE 5) BASE EOL RESISTOR (IF USED) (SEE NOTE 2) LISTED SIMPLEX FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 2120, 4001, , 4100+, 4100U 4004, OR RED BLK RED BLK REMOTE LED (SEE NOTE 1) REMOTE LED (SEE NOTE 1) Figure Base Connections for Style B or D Initiating Circuits Notes: 1. If used, Remote LED is polarized. Refer to Figure 2-6 to wire remote LED to the Heat Detector; observe color-coded wiring. 2. Refer to wiring diagrams provided with system panel for proper End-Of-Line (EOL) resistor value. 3. It is recommended that the Primary-1 and the Backup-2 lines be in separate wire runs and in compliance with local requirements. 4. For Style D initiating circuit, wire per dotted lines and do not use EOL resistor. 5. Break wires before connecting to Terminal 4 to maintain supervision. Do not loop wire underneath Terminal 4. Continued on next page 2-11

235 4098 Bases, Continued Wiring, (continued) BACKUP 2 INITIATING CIRCUIT SEE NOTE 4 PRIMARY 1 SEE NOTE 4 SEE NOTE 3 SEE NOTE 3 EOL RESISTOR (IF USED) 2 1 LISTED SIMPLEX FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 2120, 4001, , 4100+, 4100U 4004, OR BLK REMOTE LED (SEE NOTE 1) 3 RED VIO RED BLU GRY BLK YEL BLK ORN GRN (SEE NOTE 2) N/C C N/O N/C C N/O (SEE NOTE 5) Figure Wire Relay Base Connections for Style B or D Initiating Circuits Notes: 1. If used, remote LED is polarized; refer to Figure 2-6 to wire remote LED to a heat detector, observe color-coded wiring. 2. Wire only one relay base per initiating circuit. 3. For Style D initiating circuit, wire per dotted lines and do not use EOL resistor. If Style B initiating circuit, refer to wiring diagrams provided with the system panel for proper EOL resistor value. 4. It is recommended that the Primary-1 and the Backup-2 lines be in separate wire runs and in compliance with local requirements. 5. Aux. Relay contacts, each rated 1 amp at 28 VDC/0.5 amp at 125 VAC, resistive. Continued on next page 2-12

236 4098 Bases, Continued Wiring, (continued) 24VDC EOL RELAY OR RESETABLE POWER SOURCE 24VDC + - REMOTE LED (SEE NOTE 1) REMOTE LED (SEE NOTE 1) RED BLK YEL YEL INITIATING CIRCUIT + - RED RED BLK BLK ORG RED ORG ORG RED ORG ORG RED ORG EOL RESISTOR (SEE NOTE 3) LISTED SIMPLEX FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 2120, 4001, , 4100+, 4100U 4004, OR 4005 GRN BLK N/C N/O GRN BLK VIO BLU GRY SEE NOTE 6 GRN BLK N/C N/O GRN BLK VIO BLU GRY SEE NOTE 6 GRN BLK N/C N/O GRN BLK VIO BLU GRY SEE NOTE 6 RELAY RELAY RELAY Notes: Figure Wire Base Connections for Style B Initiating Circuits 1. If used, remote LED is polarized, observe color-coded wiring. (Refer to Figure 2-6 to wire remote LED to heat detector.) 2. Aux. Alarm contacts - Form C - each rated 3 amps at 28 VDC/115 VAC, resistive. 3. Refer to wiring diagrams provided with system panel for proper EOL resistor value. Continued on next page 2-13

237 4098 Bases, Continued Wiring, (continued) BACKUP 2 INITIATING CIRCUIT SEE NOTE 2 PRIMARY 1 SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE HEAT DETECTOR BASE HEAT DETECTOR BASE SEE NOTE 3 EOL RESISTOR (IF USED) LISTED SIMPLEX FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 2120, 4001, , 4100+, 4100U 4004, OR 4005 RED 4 3 BROWN REMOTE LED (SEE NOTE 1) RED 4 3 BROWN REMOTE LED (SEE NOTE 1) BLK BLK BLK WHITE BLK WHITE Figure Heat Detector LED Base Connections for Style B or D Initiating Circuits Notes: 1. If used, remote LED is polarized; observe color-coded wiring. 2. It is recommended that the Primary-1 and the Backup-2 lines be in separate wire runs and in compliance with local requirements. 3. For Style D initiating circuit, wire per dotted lines and do not use EOL resistor. If Style B initiating circuit, refer to wiring diagrams provided with the system panel for proper EOL resistor value. 2-14

238 Chapter 3 TrueAlarm Sensors, Sensor Bases, and QuickConnect Smoke Sensors Introduction This chapter contains general notes, specifications, and mounting information for the TrueAlarm Sensors, Sensor Bases and QuickConnect Smoke Sensors. WARNING: Be sure that the location of each smoke sensor and each heat sensor has been planned per local and national fire codes (see NFPA 72). Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control panel. This functionality complies with NFPA 72. When functional testing of these sensors is required per NFPA 72, use the test methods described in Chapter 5 of this manual Compatibility and Testing. Refer to NFPA 72 for application, test, and maintenance requirements. The heat sensor and multi-sensor provide a Rate-of-Rise function that is software programmed and selectable at 15 F (8.3 C) or 20 F (11.1 C) per minute. The and also provide general temperature monitoring within the range of F (0-50 C). In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # 4098 TrueAlarm Sensors TrueAlarm Sensor Bases TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors

239 4098 TrueAlarm Sensors Specifications Table 3-1. TrueAlarm Sensor Specifications Sensor PID Type of Sensor Photoelectric Ionization Heat Photo/Heat Average Operating Current 80 µa 80 µa UL Temperature Rating* Humidity Range (Non-Condensing) 6 µa at 68 F (20 C) 13 µa at 135 F (57 C) 135 F (57 C)** 155 F (68 C) 90 µa 135 F (57 C)** 155 F (68 C) 10-95% RH 10-95% RH 10-95% RH 10-95% RH Air Velocity Range FPM FPM FPM * Fixed temperature functions are software programmed and selectable from the UL temperature rating. ** UL Max. Ambient Ceiling Temp. of 100 F (38 C) at 3600 sq. ft of Max. Coverage. UL Max. Ambient Ceiling Temp. of 100 F (38 C) at 1600 sq. ft of Max. Coverage. Special Applications 1. Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control unit. The sensitivity range (setting) for the and sensor is 0.2%/FT to 3.7%/FT smoke obscuration. The sensitivity range (setting) for sensors is 0.5%/FT to 1.3%/FT. 2. The 0.2%/FT, 0.5%/FT, and 1.0%/FT settings for the and sensor and the 0.5%/FT and 0.9%/FT settings for the sensor are for special applications only. The 0.2%/FT, 0.5%/FT, 0.9%/FT, and 1.0%/FT settings are very sensitive settings: only use the 0.2%/FT setting when a sensor is located in a totally smoke-free and controlled temperature environment, such as a computer room or telephone switching exchange. 3. To determine if an area is suitable for the 0.2%/FT setting, set the sensitivity for the installed sensor at 1.5%/FT and monitor the peak values for 90 days. If you record a peak value of 0.1%FT or higher during the 90 days, do not use the 0.2%/FT setting. 4. To determine if an area is suitable for the 0.5%/FT setting, set the sensitivity for the installed sensor at 1.5%/FT and monitor the peak values for 90 days. If you record a peak value of 0.25%FT or higher during the 90 days, do not use the 0.5%/FT setting. 5. To determine if an area is suitable for the 0.9%/FT or 1.0%/FT setting, set the sensitivity for the installed sensor at 1.3%/FT (Ion) 1.5/FT (Photo) and monitor the peak values for 90 days. If you record a peak value of 0.5% or higher during the 90 days, do not use the 0.9%/FT (Ion) or 1.0%/FT (Photo) settings. Mounting All sensors identified in Table 3-1 mount to a sensor base (refer to the 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases section of this chapter for more information). Use the following information and Figure 2-1 when mounting TrueAlarm sensors. 3-2

240 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases Introduction TrueAlarm smoke/heat sensor bases are connected to a 2120 Multiplex Communicating Device Transponder (CDT), 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4120, or 4010 panel by a single wire pair (MAPNET II/IDNet). The , -9789, 9793, and 9796 bases and their sensors obtain both power and data over MAPNET II/IDNet wiring. The sensor base requires 24VDC power for relay operation and the and sensor base with sounder requires 24 VDC or Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) power. The , -9794, -9795, and 9796 are NOT compatible with the 2120 CDT. The is only compatible with the 4010 panel. Specifications The table below contains specifications for TrueAlarm Sensor Bases. Table 3-2. TrueAlarm Sensor Bases Specifications Sensor Base PID Working Voltage (MAPNET II/IDNet) 24V Working Voltage (Relay or Sounder Power) MAPNET II/IDNet Current * 24V Standby Current (Relay or Sounder) 24V Current (Relay or Sounder Activated) (w/ Remote LED) (w/ Relay and Remote LED) (Isolator Base) (Sounder Base) (Multi-Sensor Sounder Base) (Multi-Sensor w/ Remote LED) VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC 400 µa 400 µa 400 µa 500 µa 400 µa 500 µa 500 µ 270 µa 270 µa 270 µa 28 ma 17 ma 20 ma LED Output Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Sounder Output * MAPNET II/IDNet current with Photo Sensor plugged into Base 88 dba minimum 88 dba minimum Setting the Base s Address Each sensor base has a unique address. This address is associated with a custom label that identifies its physical location within a building. The base s address and location must match up with the address listed in the specification sheets of the 2120 Job Configuration Report or the Programmer s Report for the 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4120, or 4010 System. See Figure 3-1 for DIP Switch location for , -9791, -9792, -9793, and Sensor Bases. See Figure 3-2 for DIP Switch location for and Continued on next page 3-3

241 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued Setting the Base s Address, (continued) ON OFF DIP Switches Figure , -9791, -9792, -9793, Sensor Bases Location of DIP Switches ON Position DIP Switch Position 9 ON for NAC Power Input DIP Switches OFF Position DIP Switch Position 9 OFF for 24 VDC Power Input Figure and Sensor Bases Location of DIP Switches Note: The Sounder Base and Multi-Sensor Sounder Base have a 9-position DIP Switch. The first eight DIP Switches set the sounder base address. DIP Switch Position 9 is set to OFF or ON depending upon the sounder base power source. When the sounder base is connected to a 24 VDC power source, DIP Switch Position 9 is set to OFF and the 24 VDC power is supervised by the sounder base. When the sounder base is powered by the panel s Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC), DIP Switch Position 9 is set to ON and the power is supervised by the NAC and not the sounder base. Continued on next page 3-4

242 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued Address Setting for the 2120 CDT System Address Setting for the 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, or 4120 System 1. Using the 2120 Job Configuration Report, find the entry for the sensor base ( and only) you are about to install. The CUSTOM LABEL column provides the location while the DEVICE ADDRESS column provides the switch setting data. 2. Using the switch setting data for the base you are installing, set the base s address. See Figure 3-1 for location of switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. 3. Double-check the location of the sensor base and its address before proceeding to electrical installation (see Figure 2-1). 1. Using the Programmer s Report for the 4020 (Figure 3-3), 4100+, 4100U, 4120 or 4010 (Figure 3-4), find the entry for the sensor base you are about to install. The device ADDRESS and CUSTOM LABEL are located in the SYSTEM POINT SUMMARY under M. For example, Address M1-7 (for the 4100+, 4100U, 4120, or 4010 system) is circled in Figure 3-4. M1 is the addressable channel while -7 is the device address on the channel. For a base with Address M1-7, Address 7 must be set on the base s DIP Switches (SW1). 2. Using the example given in Step 1 as guideline, set the base s address using the information in Figure 3-5. See Figure 3-1 and 3-2 for location of DIP Switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. 3. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for your base by shading a label box for each base DIP Switch in the ON position. Then apply the label to the base near the base s DIP Switch. 4. Double-check the location of the sensor base and its address before proceeding to electrical installation. Device Address Figure Programmer s Report Device Address Figure , 4100U, 4120, or 4010 Programmer s Report 3-5 Continued on next page

243 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued Address Setting for the 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, or 4120 System, (continued) The figure below shows the address DIP Switch settings for the 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, and 4120 Systems. Refer to the Compatibility and Testing chapter of this publication for information on which devices are compatible with the various FACPs. Note: The 4020, 4100+, 4100U, and 4120 systems support up to 127 devices on each of their MAPNET II channels. The 4010 supports up to 250 devices on its IDNet channel. LSB MSB DIPSWITCH IS SHOWN SET AT ADDRESS 7. ON OFF 1 = ON 0 = OFF DIP SWITCHES 5 THRU Figure , 4020, 4100+,4100U, or 4120 MAPNET/IDNet Addresses Continued on next page 3-6

244 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued Multi-Sensor Bases and The and Multi-Sensor Bases are only for use with the multi-sensor and are not compatible with the 2120 CDT. Both bases have remote LED output and the also has an integrated sounder similar to the Sounder Base. The and Multi-Sensor Bases must be used with the multi-sensor when connected to a 4010, 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system. When connected to a 4100U the multi-sensor can also be used with the , -9791, -9792, -9793, and bases. The Multi-Sensor Base answers to two addresses, therefore the DIP Switch must be set for even addresses only. The even address is a photo sensor/sounder base ( ) or a photo sensor/standard base ( ), and the odd address (DIP Switch + 1) is a heat sensor/standard base. The figure below shows the allowable addresses for the Multi-Sensor Bases. IMPORTANT: Switch Position 1 is not used and must always be OFF (0) for the Multi-Sensor Bases to function properly. The odd address immediately after the DIP Switch setting must not be used by any other sensor base or MAPNET/IDNet device. LSB MSB SEE NOTE ON OFF 1 = ON 0 = OFF SEE NOTE DIPSWITCH IS SHOWN SET AT ADDRESS 4. RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE DIP SWITCHES 5 THRU 8 DIP SWITCHES 1 THRU SWITCH 1 MUST BE SET TO OFF FOR PROPER OPERATION RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Figure , Multi-Sensor Base DIP Switch Address Settings Note: The Multi-Sensor Sounder Base has a 9-position DIP Switch that is used for setting base address and selecting the sounder power source. See Figure 3-2 for DIP Switch location. Wiring Sensor bases are connected to the fire alarm control panel via a single wire pair for the , -9792, -9793, and -9796, and two pairs of wires for the , -9794, and Using Figure 3-7 as a reference, connect the bases to the MAPNET II/IDNet wire pair and 24V power (if used). IMPORTANT: For additions to existing installations, remove power from the panel before wiring any bases to avoid damage to equipment. Continued on next page 3-7

245 FROM PANEL +24V OR NAC +ALM + S +COMM 0V OR NAC -ALM TO NEXT 24V OR NAC CIRCUIT TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued Wiring, (continued) -COMM WHITE - S , SENSOR BASE BLUE - + (SEE NOTES 8 & 10) SHIELD (SEE NOTE 3) +COMM REMOTE LED OR RELAY (IF USED) (SEE NOTE 1) BLACK , SENSOR BASE SENSOR BASE BROWN ORANGE SENSOR BASE CENTER CENTER (SEE NOTE 8) VIOLET YELLOW N.C. N.C. GREY GREEN N.O. N.O. -COMM + - SHIELD (SEE NOTE 3) FROM PANEL BLUE +COMM WHITE +24V 0V (SEE NOTE 5) (SEE NOTE 8) -COMM SHIELD (SEE NOTE 3) CONTACT B (SEE NOTE 4) BLUE WHITE RED RED BLACK RELAY MODULE (SEE NOTE 6) (SEE NOTE 6) CONTACT A (SEE NOTE 4) BLUE (SEE NOTE 9) WHITE +COMM BLACK/WHITE BLACK -COMM +24V 0V CENTER N.C. N.O. CONTACT B (SEE NOTE 7) SHIELD (SEE NOTE 3) TO OTHER 24V DEVICES BLACK BLACK BLUE VIOLET GREY RELAY (SEE NOTE 9) ORANGE CENTER YELLOW N.C. GREEN N.O. CONTACT A (SEE NOTE 7) SENSOR BASE (SE NOTE 8) COMM COMM COMM COMM TO OTHER IDNET DEVICES (SEE NOTE 2) FROM PANEL + MAPNET II/IDNet - MAPNET II/IDNet + MAPNET II/IDNet - MAPNET II/IDNet TO OTHER MAPNET II/ IDNet DEVICES (SEE NOTE 2) FROM 4010 PANEL IDNet IDNet Notes: 1. Remote LED and relay wires are not supervised. Figure 3-7. Sensor Base Connections SHIELD IS OPTIONAL (SEE NOTE 3) 2. Maximum quantity of devices per circuit is 127 for 4020, 4100+, 4100U or 4120, 128 for the 2120 CDT panel, and 250 for the 4010 panel. Maximum quantity of and Multi-Sensor bases is 63 with 4020, 4100+, 4100U, and 4120, and 124 for the 4010 panel. If output is coded (Temporal code, etc.) via MAPNET II/IDNet control see Note If shield is used, twist shield wires together and cap with wire nut. Shield should be insulated from electrical box. 4. Contact A or B: Dry, Form C - each rated 2 amperes at 24 VDC/0.5 amperes at 110 VAC, resistive to 32 VDC,.008 amperes typical/.013 amperes max. 6. Do not use remote LED if the relay module is used. 7. Contact A or B: Dry, Form C Each rated at 3 amperes at 28 VDC/115 VAC, resistive , , , and are not compatible with 2120 CDT. 9. Maximum wire length between sensor base and relay module is 100 feet. 10. Maximum quantity of sensors with or sounder bases limited to 43 if output is coded (Temporal code, etc.) via MAPNET II/IDNet control. If coding is performed via 24VDC or NAC circuit, see Note 2. SHIELD Continued on next page 3-8

246 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases, Continued Wiring, (continued) Figure 3-8 shows the wiring connections for the isolator sensor base. All screw terminals accept 14 to 18-gauge AWG solid or stranded. Maximum torque should not exceed 12-inch-pounds. CAUTION: Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire runs to provide supervision. COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM FROM 4010 PANEL IDNet IDNet IDNet IDNet TO OTHER IDNet DEVICES (SEE NOTE 2) SHIELD IS OPTIONAL (SEE NOTE 3) SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD Figure Isolator Sensor Base Connections Notes: 1. Isolator base compatible with 4010 or 4100U panel ONLY. 2. Maximum quantity of devices per circuit is 250 for 4010 and 4100U panels. 3. If shield is used, twist shield wires together and cap with wire nut. Shield should be insulated from electrical box. 3-9

247 4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors Overview This section contains general notes, specifications, and mounting information for the TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors shown in Table 3-3. WARNING: Ensure that the location of each smoke sensor has been planned per local and national fire codes (see NFPA 72). 1. Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control panel. This functionality complies with NFPA 72. When functional testing of these sensors is required per NFPA 72, use the test methods described in the Compatibility and Testing chapter of this publication. The sensitivity range (settings) of the and sensor are limited to 2.5%/ft to 3.7%/ft smoke obscuration. The sensitivity range of the sensor is 1.5%/ft to 3.7%/ft smoke obscuration. 2. Refer to NFPA 72 for application, test, and maintenance requirements. Specifications Table 3-3. TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensor Specifications Sensor PID and (w/ Sounder) Type of Sensor Photoelectric Photoelectric Operating Current 500 µa max. 500 µa max.* Humidity Range (Non-Condensing) 10-95% RH 10-95% RH Air Velocity Range FPM FPM Working Voltage (MAPNET II and IDNet) 24V Working Voltage (Sounder Power VDC VDC VDC Sounder Output 85 dba min. 24V Standby Current (Sounder) 24V Current (Sounder Activated) 340 µa max 30 ma max. Remote LED Output NO YES *Add 1.5 ma when LED is ON Per UL 268 Continued on next page 3-10

248 4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors, Continued Specifications, (continued) The QuickConnect2 sensor requires the base and QuickConnect sensors do not require a base, these sensors are designed for ease of installation without sensor bases. QuickConnect sensors are connected to a 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, or 4120 panel by a single wire pair (MAPNET II/IDNet). The QuickConnect sensor and QuickConnect2 sensor are only compatible with the 4010 and 4100U (with ). The sensors obtain both power and data over IDNet wiring. The QuickConnect Sensor with Sounder also requires the 24 VDC for sounder operation and is NOT compatible with the 2120 CDT. Setting the Sensor s Address Each QuickConnect sensor has a unique address. This address is associated with a custom label that identifies its physical location within a building. The sensor s address and location must match up with the address listed in the Programmer s Report for the 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, or 4120 system. Use the method described in the 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases section of this chapter to complete the sensor setup. Refer to the figure below for the location of the DIP Switches. Double-check the location of the QuickConnect sensor and its address before proceeding to electrical installation (see Figures 3-10 and 3-11). Address DIP Switches ON OFF and Figure 3-9. Location of DIP Switches on QuickConnect Sensor Continued on next page 3-11

249 4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors, Continued Mounting Use the figure below to mount the and QuickConnect smoke sensors. The uses the two wire base, see Figure 2-1 to mount base. CAUTION: Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire runs to provide supervision. FLUSH MOUNTED (BOX TO BE FLUSH OR RECESSED 1/4 " MAX ) SINGLE GANG (2 1/8" DEEP) ELECTRICAL BOX (NOT SUPPLIED) 4" (10.16cm x 1 1/2" DEEP) OCTAGONAL ELECTRICAL BOX ( NOT SUPPLIED) 4" (10.16cm x 1 1/2" DEEP) SQUARE ELECTRICAL BOX (NOT SUPPLIED) QUICK CONNECT SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE ADAPTER PLATE KIT (REQUIRED FOR 4" SQUARE/ OCTAGONAL SURFACE MOUNTED ELECTRICAL BOX) # 8-32 x 1 1/2" PANHEAD MACHINE SCREW (TIGHTEN UNTIL SNUG, 1-3 IN.-LBS.) # 6-32 SCREW WITH WASHER (NOT SUPPLIED) (TIGHTEN UNTIL SNUG, 1-3 IN. LBS.) # 8-32 x 1 1/4" PANHEAD MACHINE SCREW (TIGHTEN UNTIL SNUG, 1-3 IN. LBS.) # 8x 1" THREAD FORMING PANHEAD SCREW (TIGHTEN UNTIL SNUG, 1-3 IN.-LBS.) L- L+ P- P- P+ P TERMINAL STRIP TERMINAL STRIP QUICK CONNECT SENSOR CLOCKWISE FOR ATTACHMENT Figure Mounting the QuickConnect Sensors Notes: 1. Feed the wires through the hole of the mounting plate. 2. Fasten the mounting plate to the electrical box or adapter plate as shown, with tabs facing towards devices. 3. Connect the wires to the terminal strip (provided loose) according to the figure above. 4. Connect terminal strip to the pin strip on the QuickConnect sensor. 5. Fit the QuickConnect sensor to the adapter plate pushing the wires back into the electrical box and give a clockwise turn to attach. 6. Using the relay module requires a 1½-inch extension ring (not supplied) mounted to the 4-inch square or octagonal electrical box to meet the space requirement of the relay cube and its wires. The relay module cannot be used in single-gang electrical box installations. The relay module MUST BE installed in the electrical box directly behind the QuickConnect2 sensor. Continued on next page 3-12

250 4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors, Continued Wiring Use the following to wire the QuickConnect smoke sensors. CAUTION: Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire runs to provide supervision. FROM PANEL (IF USED) +24V 0V (SEE NOTES 8&7) (SEE NOTE 7) V 0V TO OTHER 24V DEVICES REMOTE LED OR RELAY (SEE NOTE 1) FROM PANEL -IDNet +IDNet -IDNet +IDNet TO OTHER IDNet DEVICES (SEE NOTE 2) SHIELD IS OPTIONAL (SEE NOTE 3) SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD FROM PANEL (IF USED) +24V 0V +24V 0V TO OTHER 24V DEVICES FROM PANEL (IF USED) +24V 0V +24V 0V TO OTHER 24V DEVICES (SEE NOTE 5) ALARM REMOTE LED (SEE NOTE 1) RED RED BLK BLK WHT BLU RELAY MODULE (SEE NOTE 6) ORG (C) YEL (NC) GRN (NO) BRN (C) VIO (NC) GRY (NO) CONTACT A (SEE NOTE 4) CONTACT B (SEE NOTE 4) (SEE NOTE 6) FROM PANEL -MAPNET II/IDNet +MAPNET II/IDNet TO OTHER MAPNET/IDNet DEVICES (SEE NOTE 2) FROM PANEL -MAPNET II/IDNet +MAPNET II/IDNet -MAPNET II/IDNet +MAPNET II/IDNet TO OTHER MAPNET/IDNet DEVICES (SEE NOTE 2) SHIELD IS OPTIONAL (SEE NOTE 3) SHIELD SHIELD TERMINAL STRIP TERMINAL STRIP Figure QuickConnect Sensor Connections Notes: 1. Remote LED and relay wires are not supervised. 2. Maximum quantity of devices per MAPNET II circuit is 127 for 4020, 4100+, 4100U, or 4120 panels and 250 for the 4010 and 4100U (with ) panel. Maximum quantity of sensors when output is coded (Temporal Code) is If shield is used, twist shield wires together and cap with wire nut. Shield should be insulated from electrical box. 4. Contact A or B: Dry, Form C - each rated 2 amperes at 28 VDC/0.5 amperes at 110 VAC, resistive to 32 VDC,.008 amperes typical/.013 amperes max. 6. When using the relay module, DO NOT use remote LED and are ONLY compatible with 4010 FACP QuickConnect sensor uses the base. 3-13

251 Chapter 4 Accessories Introduction This chapter covers relay module accessories. In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Relay Module Accessories

252 Relay Module Accessories Relay Module Wiring The Relay module is used with sensor base. Install the relay module using Figure 3-7 and the figure below as a reference. FROM PANEL +24VDC +24VDC TO OTHER 24VDC DEVICES OR SUPERVISORY MODULE SEE NOTE 1 BLACK/WHITE TO SENSOR BASE SEE NOTE 3 BLACK BLACK RELAY CENTER BLUE ORANGE CENTER CONTACT B SEE NOTE 2 N.C. N.O. VIOLET GREY YELLOW GREEN N.C. N.O. CONTACT A SEE NOTE 2 Figure Relay Module Wiring Notes: to 32 VDC 24 ma typical/35 ma maximum. 2. Contact A or B: dry, Form C, each rated 3 amps at 28 VDC/115 VAC, resistive. 3. Maximum wire length between sensor and relay module is 100 feet. Continued on next page 4-2

253 Relay Module Accessories, Continued Relay Module Wiring The Relay Module is used with the , -9791, -9794, -9795, and Sensor Bases and the QuickConnect Sensor with Sounder. Install the relay module using Figure 3-7 and the figure below as a reference. IMPORTANT: Do not use a remote LED if using the relay module. The relay module is not supervised and should only be used for non-critical supplementary functions. There is a limit of ten control outputs activated on a MAPNET II/IDNet channel. If the channel capacity is exceeded, the relay module may not function properly. FROM PANEL (IF USED) +24VDC 0V +24VDC 0V TO OTHER 24VDC DEVICES OR SUPERVISORY MODULE (SEE NOTE 1) -BLUE (SEE NOTE 2) +WHITE WHITE BLUE RED RED BLACK BLACK RELAY From , -9791, -9794,-9795, Sensor Base or QuickConnect Sensor with Sounder CONTACT B (SEE NOTE 3) CENTER N.C. N.O. BROWN VIOLET GREY ORANGE YELLOW GREEN CENTER N.C. N.O. CONTACT A (SEE NOTE 3) Figure Relay Module Wiring Notes: 1. Do not use remote LED to 32 VDC,.008 amps typical /.013 amps. Maximum. 3. Contact A or B: Dry, Form C - each rated 2 amps resistive at 24 VDC/0.5 amps at 110 VAC, resistive. Continued on next page 4-3

254 Relay Module Accessories, Continued Relay Module Installation Install the relay module using the following steps: 1. Mount a 1-1/2 inch (3.81 cm) extension ring (not supplied) to an octagonal or square electrical box (not supplied). The extension ring is required to meet the minimum box volume requirement (32.3 cu. inch/529.4 cu. cm) for relay module installation. 2. Mount relay module inside extension ring directly behind base and sensor. Do not mount remotely. See Figure 4-1 or 4-2 for relay module connections. Note: Use the exact configuration of electrical box (square or octagonal) with extension to mount sensor base when installing the relay module. Remote LED Module The Remote LED Module is available for the ,-9791, -9794, -9795, Sensor Bases and the QuickConnect Sensor with Sounder. Use the figure below as a reference when installing the Remote LED Module to a sensor base. RED BLACK To , -9791, -9794, -9795, Sensor Base or QuickConnect Sensor with Sounder LED Figure Remote LED Module Wiring 4-4

255 Chapter 5 Compatibility and Testing Introduction This chapter covers the compatibility of 4098 Sensors, Detectors, and Bases. Maintenance and testing are also covered. In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic. Topic See Page # Compatibility 5-2 Maintenance and Testing 5-4 Cleaning 5-8 Trouble Indications 5-9 Fire Alarm Trouble and Maintenance Log

256 Compatibility Compatibility for 4098 Detectors and Detector Bases This section describes the compatibility between FACPs, detectors, and detector bases. Table Detector and Detector Base Compatibility Detectors Compatible 2-Wire Detector Base System Max. Quantity of Bases per Initiating Circuit ET/FADM FABT/VPBT (LED base for 2120/4100+ ZAM Heat Detectors Only) U/4100+/4120/UT / /4005 High Current (Relay base not used with 4004 and 4005 Low Current systems) 1 (See Note 1) Notes: 1. Relay operation cannot be guaranteed unless it is the only device on that zone. 2. Panel compatibility identification marker is model number of the module or panel. 3. Detector compatibility identification marker is model number found on detector label. 4. For detailed interconnection data, see wiring diagrams for specific panels. Continued on next page 5-2

257 Compatibility, Continued Compatibility for 4098 Detectors and Detector Bases, (continued) Notes: 1. For detailed interconnection data, see wiring diagrams for specific panels. 22. Panel compatibility identification marker is model number of the module or panel. 33. Sensor compatibility identification marker is model number found on sensor label sensor NOT compatible with bases that have a RED DOT located in sensor mounting area. 45. Maximum quantity of sensors when output is coded (Temporal Code) is Maximum quantity of Sounder Bases and Multi-Sensor Sounder Bases when output is coded via MAPNET II/IDNet control (Temporal Code) is 43. If coding is performed via 24 VDC or NAC circuit, use limits specified in Table 5-2. This section describes the compatibility between FACPs, sensors, and sensor bases. Table Sensor and Sensor Base Compatibility Sensors Compatible Bases not required (see Note 5) not required (See Note 6) (See Note 6) (See Note 6) Max. Quantity of Devices Per Circuit MAPNET II: 127 (4020), 127 (4100+) 127 (4120), 127 (4100U) Addresses (CDT TrueAlarm) Addresses IDNET: 250 (4010), 250 (4100U) Addresses IDNET: 250 (4010) 250 (4100U with ) Addresses MAPNET II: 127 (4020), 127 (4100+) 127 (4100U), 127 (4120) Addresses IDNET: 250 (4010), 250 (4100U) Addresses MAPNET II: 127 (4020), 127 (4100+) 127 (4100U), 127 (4120) Addresses IDNET: 250 (4010), 250(4100U) Addresses MAPNET II: 63 (4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4120) Addresses 2 to 126 IDNET: 124 (4010), 124 (4100U) Addresses 2 to 248 IDNET: 250 (4100U) Addresses IDNET: 250 (4100U with ) 250 (4010) Addresses

258 Maintenance and Testing Maintenance The minimal requirement for detector and sensor maintenance should consist of clearing surface dust by using a vacuum cleaner. Cleaning programs should comply with NFPA and local environments. Cleaning of the internal chamber should only be done by a qualified technical representative. For service, return to your local branch office. Testing Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control unit. Dirty or out-or-range sensors are annunciated by the control unit. This functionality complies with NFPA 72. Note: When testing detectors/sensors, refer to NFPA 72, or contact your local branch office. CAUTION: Before functionally testing the detectors/sensors, be sure to disconnect the city connection, releasing devices, and extinguishing systems (or for the 4020, 4010, 4100+, 4100U or 4120 panel, put the panel in the Walk Test mode). Preferred Method of Testing Smoke Detectors/Sensors NFPA minimally requires annual functional testing of smoke detectors/sensors at their installed location. To perform this annual test, use the Solo 336 Aerosol Smoke Dispenser. IMPORTANT: After testing detectors, reset the fire alarm panel to restore the fire alarm system to normal status. After testing sensors, you must clear the peak values. Test Equipment Available The following test equipment is available: : Test and Removal Tool attached to Mr. Longarm 4 ft. pole (Item #7508) or 6 ft. pole (Item #7512) : Heat Detector/Sensor Removal Adapter (use with ) : Aerosol spray, Simplex Dry Smoke : Removal Adapter Head Attachment (attaches to the tool) : Magnet Tester attached to Mr. Longarm 4 ft. pole (Item #7508) or 6 ft. pole (Item #7512) : Ion Detector Test Cable. Also available are the: Gemini Sensitivity Tester (Model 501 or 502). Solo 336 Aerosol Smoke Dispenser attached to either the Solo 100 (15 ft.) telescopic fiberglass pole or the Solo 101 (4 ft.) fiberglass pole. Solo A4 Aerosol Spray. Solo Red Cup ( ). Use to hold the Aerosol Spray Can. Solo ( ) Adapter for Solo Poles. Use to adapt Test and Removal Tool to the Solo Pole. Continued on next page 5-4

259 Maintenance and Testing, Continued Alternate Method for Testing Sensors The following test method is suitable for functional checks of sensor bases or QuickConnect sensors during installation; however, testing with smoke must be performed to comply with NFPA requirements. For all sensor bases, with the exception of the and sounder bases, position the Magnet Tester ½ to ¾ counterclockwise from the visible LED found on the sensor base (see the figure below). For the QuickConnect2 photo sensor, position the Magnet Tester as shown in Figure 5-2. For the and sounder bases, position the Magnet Tester next to the embossed TEST location on the base. Testing a sensor with a magnet reports a value of 255 for actual / peak (exception 4010 panel). Clear the peak value after testing. Note: For and Multi-Sensor Bases both photo and heat addresses (even and odd) must alarm. Figure 5-1. Magnet Test Location for , -9791, -9792, -9793, -9796, -9710, and Sensor Bases using Magnet Tester Magnetic Test for Photoelectric Detectors The 4098 photoelectric detectors may be tested by placing a magnet above the location indicated by a mark embossed on the cover (see Figure 5-2) for four (4) seconds. Use the Magnetic Tester (Part No ), Table 5-3, and the following information to test detectors. Table 5-3 describes the LED reaction during Normal and MAG TEST modes to the Normal, More Sensitive, Less Sensitive, and Non-Functional states of the detector. Continued on next page 5-5

260 Maintenance and Testing, Continued Magnetic Test for Photoelectric Detectors, (continued) Figure 5-2. Magnet Test Location for , -9602, -9603, Smoke Detectors using Magnet Tester Table 5-3. MAG TEST/Normal Modes - States and Reactions STATE Normal Mode MAG TEST Mode (LED flashes every 4 secs.) LED Flashes Quickly 6 Times LED Flashes Slowly 4 Times Latches in Alarm Mode/LED stays ON Normal X X More Sensitive X X X Less Sensitive X X X Non-Functional X When placing the magnet at the location indicated by a mark embossed on the cover, the visible LED flashes indicating the detector's condition. The following are descriptions of what you should see when using the MAG TEST. NORMAL - When in MAG TEST, the detector latches into alarm if the detector is within calibration range and the visible LED stays ON. MORE SENSITIVE - When in MAG TEST, if the detector is more sensitive than the maximum calibration, the visible LED quickly flashes, twice a second. Following the sixth flash, the detector latches into alarm and the visible LED stays ON. LESS SENSITIVE - When in MAG TEST, if the detector is less sensitive than the minimum calibration, the visible LED slowly flashes four times, once every two seconds. Following the fourth flash, the detector latches into alarm and the visible LED stays ON. NON-FUNCTIONAL DETECTOR - If the detector is less sensitive than the minimum allowable sensitivity or if there is a fault in the temperature sensing circuit ( ), the visible LED does not flash normally. When in MAG TEST, the visible LED slowly flashes four times, once every two seconds. After the fourth flash, the detector does NOT latch into alarm and the LED stops flashing and turns OFF. If the detector is out of the normal operating range, it should be cleaned. If the detector still indicates as other than normal sensitivity, replace the detector. 5-6 Continued on next page